Home

GT11 User`s Manual - Mitsubishi Electric

1. 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 7 10 11 y poe Battery cover opened e i 1e y us S fF ere L Sle as e S s 0 a X S S L a OL 12 1 gt P ly t inal t F i fae gt ower supply terminal layou S x a A NUT SS g 0 FG 24VDC 1S ron aA BI aA Se ro AE Ss aise 7 JB T IHG yp 9 3 8 3 CF card cover opened No Name Specifications Compatible GOT GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ Use For connection to QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series 1 Bus interface Compatible GOT GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Use For connection to QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A series For communicating with controller bar code reader RFID or personal 2 RS 232 interface computer OS installation project data download transparent D sub 9 pin male _ Hole for the inserting installation fittings accessory during the GOT 3 Hole for unit installation fitting installation to the panel 4 holes at top and bottom 4 Rating plate nameplate 5 CF card access LED Lit CF card accessed Not lit CF card not accessed Switch for prohibiting access to CF card before removing the CF card from the GOT 6 CF card access switch a ON CF card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF No access to CF card
2. z O Key switch Function 5 Z Activates the Quick test operation T TEST 5 lt Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices F Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the system 5 MENU monitor function L 3 Subsection 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX on the BM E FORM Monitor screen or comment no comment display ai Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Zo wz Switches the screen to the Device entry screen to enter or test monitor devices SRE H Ob Entering monitor devices 37 Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and OZD devices Test operation gt 37 Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation Scroll displayed information upward or downward by a line to display the preceding or next monitor device that is not currently displayed When five or more monitor devices are entered these switches are available when their comments om LON are displayed A Y zZ Al Scrolls information upward by a line puik aon Y Scrolls information downward by a line 6 gt 3 The following table below describes the range of display o
3. Co Q JE 3 Soe GOT front face GOT rear face Tmk m Standard interface RS 232 interface Standard interface BUS interface Standard interface BUS for connection to QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q series 2 y or BUS for connection to QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A series ra DES 3 Channel number specification menu BOX Dao 0 Set when the communication interface is not used Sok 1 Set when connecting to PLC or microcomputer Only one can be set among arbitrary ees communication interfaces 8 Set when connecting to a bar code reader RFID A 9 Set when connecting to PC drawing software or modem For USB and RS 232 interfaces lt the simultaneous setting is possible However when either interface is communicating the communication is not allowed for another interface ae e Setting is not allowed for 2 to 7 ws Fixed to 9 for the USB interface e e Fixed to 1 for the BUS interface 4 Driver display BOX S The name of the communication driver for which a channel number is assigned is displayed a None is displayed in the driver display BOX in the following cases F e The communication driver is not installed gt Section 13 2 OS Information S e 0 is set in the channel number specification menu BOX When setting the channel number to 9 the communication driver Host PC is automatically
4. Grounding the cable Use the bus connection cable to ground the cable and grounding wire to the control panel where the GOT and base unit are installed it gt ne gt 1 Ground the braided shield portion of the cable to the control panel e with the cable clamp AD75CK Braided shield zZ O 3 SB fic od LS Do Cable clamps For the cable clamp attaching details refer to AD75CK type o Cable Clamping Instruction Manual lt IB 68682 gt z o H ny a For GT15 CLJEXSS 1 and GT15 C BS p Ground the ground wire to the FG terminal of the GOT power supply section Bus connection cable 18 D E r lt ur zZ FG wire gt be a i JE 5 GOT FG terminal b For other bus connection cables Ground the braided wire for grounding to the control panel by tightening a screw Fu lt Ao ow qX aka 8 xs nw INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 2 EMC DIRECTIVE 5 8 5 2 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives 6 INSTALLATION MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option function board on to fro
5. CANCEL S Touch T a Oo a we Q LO x SET RST SET VAL VALUE 16 VALUE 32 BM VAL 16 BM VAL 32 X he Touch Touch Touch Touch Touch Touch rm 7 Vv Vv Vv y y 5 If necessary change bit device on off or word device values on the setting key window screen 0 For further information about each setting key window screen see the following Subsection 14 2 27 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 47 14 2 29 Test operation basic procedure 14 2 30 Error messages and corrective actions This section describes the error messages displayed when the system monitor function is executed and corrective action Error message Description Corrective action 1 Connections between the PLC CPU and the GOT disconnected or cut cables Communication could not be 2 Has an error occurred in the PLC CPU PLC communications error established with the PLC CPU 3 Refer to the following manual for confirming whether the error has occurred in network lt 3 GT11 User s Manual 14 48 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 30 Error messages and corrective actions 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor The MELSEC A list editor enables you to change the sequence program in the ACPU QCPU A mode This function is
6. GOT setup Di splay A r P SOREA TEME x Setting item is changed if setting item is Language English t hed ON A OFF Opening screen time 5 Sec euenee BY i Min O None F erie oymenweene Setting contents are defined if OK button Screen save backlight OFF is touched Battery alarm display ON Brightness contrast Setting If tton is touched without touchin With do not push OK button X button is touched Out een if you close the screen the changed OK button the dialogue mentioned left value will be canceled is displayed OK OK button The change contents are canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The display setting screen is displayed If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with X button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents 11 5 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 3 Display setting operations Language 2 Touch the setting items to display the m gt E E Ri Select Language screen Language English 2 Opening screen time 5 Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None z Screen save backlight OFF 2 Battery alarm display ON Su Z Brightness contrast Setting Si2 OK Zuk oSm Of When touching the butto
7. Continuous write in NOP Final step program to NOP gt 1 Start step specification gt GO gt one GO specification 2 gt Start step specification gt GO i SHIFT gt WRITE SET gt Step number GO Com gt GO Write modify change of Write the new program mand program modify change gt rly 14 3 23 Operation in read mode R Details Purpose Procedures key input sequence Azadi ith th Read the command of the ommand reading with the a i eal specified step number in the READ SET gt Step number GO GO specified step number program Read the command with the Read the specified command READ gt Command 7 gt Device gt Device number gt GO ified d in th 3 specified comman in the program t CO Read the command with the Read the command with the a READ gt SET Device gt Device number gt GO p specified device used in the specified device 4 program gt GO Automatic scroll 14 74 Display the program with automatic scroll 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 22 Operation in write mode W Read operation above 7 gt SET 4 ly gt SET gt
8. No Item Display contents 1 List display area The status of contacts and coils is displayed on the left of device displays The same operations as in the READ mode of the FX list editor can be executed 2 Keys a Subsection 14 4 7 Sequence program display Ends the list monitor 3 x When the list monitor is executed on the FX list editor screen the screen is switched to the FX list editor screen 1 The status of contacts and coils is displayed as below Status Type of instruction Description E Displayed HB Not displayed LD AND OR Contact instruction Normal open Contact ON OFF LDI ANI ORI Contact instruction Normal close Contact OFF ON TC Coil ON OFF OUT SET Except TC Contact ON OFF TC Reset ON OFF Word device Value 0 Value Except 0 RST Except TC and word OFF ON device Contac MC STL Contact ON OFF LDP ANDP ORP LDF ANDF ORF Not monitored Always gj not displayed Rise or fall contact instruction 14 110 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 16 List monitor 14 4 17 Action for an incorrect key input Can not write The protect switch of the EEPROM is on Switch off the protect switch of the EEPROM Step number is out of a range The specified step number exceeded the maximum number Specify a step number below the maximum value The specified command cannot be Not fo
9. m Mount the GOT onto the control panel while considering the following control panel inside dimensions Vertical installation of the GOT requires a space with the same dimensions as the horizontal installation a turned 90 degrees clockwise seen from the display side Point gt Applicable cable 5 a Some cables may need to be longer than the specified dimensions when connecting to the GOT aie Therefore consider the connector dimensions and bending radius of the cable as 26 well for installation GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD 9 e 30 1 19 S ne 152 5 99 J E uw CF CARD 6 og CF CARD lt 1 fo amp w N wo Y e RS 422 5 oO S Ge ale y a Su ae n F y Unit mm inch 366 v ae DoW No Name ez 1 PLC connection cable PC connection cable Zz O z a n Z WIRING OPTION 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 6 2 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA A 152 5 99 gt To OIT Exe 120 4 73 140 5 52 No Name 1 Bus cable Type GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ 56 2 20 40 1 57 GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA 38 1 50 40 1 57 Unit mm inch 6 3 2 PC cable barcode cable RFID cable 6 1 Contro
10. Clearing all parameters ae PARAM gt 1 gt gt Go gt END gt gt GO initial setting status Parameter setting Set the parameters for the PARAM 2 1 for AOJ2HCPU AOJ2HCPU a Select the latch range from J Setting of latch range No latch 1 2 latch and All 1 gt L PLA 4 GO 2 latch Ly Set the availability 1536 to 1 gt 2 gt 14 gt GO gt 2 Setting of step relay 2047 of the step relay gt When the parameter setting 2 gt CLEAR gt END gt t Completion of setting is complete write the PLC Setting for multiple items is CPU also available gt GO End of writing is displayed Parameter setting Set the parameters other PARAM 21 gt 1 other than AOJ2HCPU than AOJ2HCPU 1 1 gt Capacity gt GO gt END gt 2 For main seuna meno Set the main sequence input unit 1K step 3 h program capacity and the file 1 LL gt LH gt Capacity gt GO gt IEND 2 For sub capacity r gister capacit input unit 1K step 9 pacity 1 gt 1 gt gt points GO END 2 For file register input unit 1K point Set the top device number M S setting tner used in the latch relay ste 1 gt 2 gt T ber of L gt GO gt T ber of S gt GO gt 2 than AnA AnUCPU YSP 2 gt Top number o op number o relay M L S setting Set ne top device number 1 gt 2 Top numbe
11. gt 3 4 gt 3 gt SET Address GO GO gt hexadecimal ly gt 4 ER SET Address GO gt Machine gt GO hexadecimal GO language code 4 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 27 Operation in other mode O 14 77 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa 1S L m a j e 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions Error messages and corrective actions in direct CPU connection If an error is detected with the MELSEC A list editor during operation of each mode an error message appears at the 4th line of the display Error messages display conditions and corrective actions are displayed below If an error message appears take the following actions to resume operation D Check the error message 2 Remove the cause of the error Input the corresponding key The error message disappears The screen returns to the status before error Example Reading the step with the RST command gt gt NOT Display the error message Delete the error message gt gt D The error message disappears The next operation is resumed 14 78 14 3 MEL
12. Touch any switch Setting key window screen i x 4 The setting key window screen appears r em olst EFIGPNd 0 Display example set value operation screen of T timer and C counter BASN For further information about each setting key window see BSS Sisis the following I eal a gt lt L 3 Subsection 14 2 27 Information and set items Enter Del K displayed on each setting key window screen For further information about the test operation procedure see the following lt 3 Subsection 14 2 28 Test operation procedure 14 2 System Monitor 14 41 14 2 24 Test operation UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Dey FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa 1S L m op na 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 26 Information displayed on the test menu screen and key functions 1 Test menu screen DEVICE MONITOR The table shown below describes the key functions Key Function Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the system monitor MENU function lt 3 Subsection 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation E Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DE
13. 1 After the search results are displayed you can continue searching with the same conditions by touching the GO key Touching any key other than the GO key ends the search 2 Example Searching for LD M8000 lt WRITE gt M800 MODE lt READ gt f Set the ra READ mode se gt w JLe JLo Je JLo Continue to search with the same conditions Point gt Devices that cannot be searched The following devices cannot be searched e Pointers interrupt pointers Constant K constant H constant E e Bit devices with specifying numbers only Special function unit block buffer memory e Devices specified with the operand of an applied instruction Pointers and interrupt pointers can be searched for with command searches k Command search in this section 14 96 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 8 Searching commands and devices 14 4 9 Writing commands Writes a sequence program to the FX PLC Overwrite Insert Writing basic commands 1 Operations a Inputting command only Ex ANB ORB command os For overwriting WRITE mode For insertion INSERT mode b Inputting command and device oa AND commands etc For overwriting WRITE mode For insertion INSERT mode _ 1 Input the device name and device number c aa command No 1 eas No 2 device MC mi T C commands etc For overwriting WRITE mode For insertion INSERT mode Point P Moving
14. Touch the button The GOT restarts GT11 can install up to 4 communication drivers However multiple communication drivers cannot be used at the same time Multi channel function cannot be used 2 Display of communication driver Communication drivers are displayed in the order of installation To change the assigned communication driver to one that is not listed change the Communication Settings of drawing software and download to the GOT 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting Channel number setting operation Touch channel number specification menu BOX to be set Communi cat ior Standard I F Setting RS422 an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 z 5 E lt 9 Z 5 Q co lt 0 LZ rE We Eiu Zn Keyboard TCLS anal Enter 2 gt SPO B The cursor for the channel number specification menu BOX is displayed Are WE Simultaneously the keyboard for a numerical input is displayed Bow amp Enter the channel number from the keyboard and touch the Enter key to settle the entered value Setting the channel number to 1 displays the name of the communication driver for which CH No 1 is z gt assigned with drawing software in the driver display box Em WEG Communication Set 5 FS olap Standard etting AN ChNo RS o uu yO 1 A OnA QCPU QJ 71024 O CHA R5232 S O o 9 Host PC A z 9 HostiPC T A gt CH Dr iver assign
15. Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensional diagrams of GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD 164 6 46 J lt 2 120 4 73 0 23 0 91 7 K S o 135 5 32 m 4 40UNC Inch screw type M2 6 Metric screw type lt 22 120 4 73 0 4 j Panel thickness 5mm 0 2 or less App 1 152 5 99 Appendix 1 External Dimensions 6 0 24 L Unit mm inch External dimensional diagrams of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ and GT1150 QLBDQ 167 6 57 A 28 5 110 4 33 s 1 12 210 83 P Sz aie a ae a Gre Za TA p e x M2 om F 5 Metric screw type 5 _ ii fa O ED lt gt oS NJ ae D So wt oO a 2y xs s 4 40UNC Za I Inch screw type HEE amm cc amn als G Ya i EE om if aS a aati zZ 125 110 4 33 Panel board thickness to be 5 mm 0 2 or less ne 7 a lt L En i x 0000 0 0000
16. Wait until the processing of other peripherals end and execute the recipe Execute it after i function again O o Division 0 was generated by the data operational expression 0 divisor division error 360 i Review the data operational expression so that the divisor should not Confirm operation expression become 0 370 Upper and lower limit value error The setting of lower upper limit value is Upper limit lt Lower limit Confirm value setting Correct the setting so as to be Upper limit Lower limit SEEN The time out error occurred during communication Communication timeout a aa 1 Confirm the cable omission and PLC status 402 Confirm communication pathway 2 Put COM instruction when A QnA or QCPU is connected and the PLC or modules A scanning is long Either of the overrun error parity bit error or flaming error was generated SIO status error ar N when the RS 422 RS 232 communication was received 403 Confirm communication pathway nae a Confirm the cable omission status of the PLC and the transmission or modules speed of the computer link ys 1 Station numbers other than master local station are specified at the CC Specified station access is out of Link connection via G4 406 range 2 Accessed PLC CPUs other than QCPU Confirm station no Confirm the station number of the monitor screen data Cannot perform operation The operation which could not
17. If a keyword is registered in the ACPU when the connected ACPU or the ACPU PLC No No corresponding to the operation is changed the GOT requests for input of the registered keyword Input the keyword registered in the ACPU and press the GO key If a keyword is not registered in the ACPU this operation is not required Procedure for inputting the keyword for the MELSEC A list editor lt Display gt NOW READING PLC PLESE WAIT A MOMENT MOTION CONTOROLLER NOT SUPPORTED KEYWORD When the keyword 040411 is input KEYWORD When the input keyword is correct KEYWORD OK MODE SELECTION READ INS PARAM PRESS MODE KEY KEYWORD NG lt Key operation gt lt Description of operation gt Start the list editor function shows communication status with the PLC CPU Input of the keyword is requested Input the keyword registered in GO the connected maximum with the device When the input keyword is not correct 1 ACPU and press the GO key No constant setting key 0 to 9 A to F The GOT checks the input keyword and displays the result The check result display time is about 2 seconds To Mode Selection Subsection 14 3 9 Selection and operation of modes Input the keyword to 6 letters 1 When the input keyword does not match wit
18. Peel the release paper from the back of the new protective sheet and attach its adhesive side to the GOT display section When attaching the protective sheet make sure to fit it on the display section closely without leaving any clearance between them R Daai Remark _ Replacement time of protective sheet lg Check the status of the protection sheet visually by to the daily inspection The visibility becomes worse when there is too much dirt and cracks causing malfunction Proceeds replacement promptly 8 10 8 5 Protective Sheet 8 5 1 Applicable protective sheet 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover The USB environmental protection cover protects the USB connector on the front face of GOT from dust water and oil The GOT is installed with the USB environmental protection cover at factory shipment gt Replace when damage and deterioration are caused m O 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental protection cover 6 The following USB environmental protection cover is applicable for GT1100 z Product name Model Contents fi 2 Z USB environmental Environmental protection cover for USB interface on the main unit front gt 2 GT11 50UCOV i protection cover panel conforming to IP67 8 6 2 Installing procedure 2 m i Turn the GOT power off T Disconnect the USB cable from the GOT if one is connected Open the USB e
19. z wn z WIRING Mounting hole OPTION 6 5 Installation Procedure 6 6 amp Fixing the GOT Engage the hook of the mounting fitting accessory to the unit fixing hole of the GOT and tighten the screw until the GOT is fixed with the mounting bolt accessory The GOT will be fixed in 4 upper lower parts Enlarged view Enlarged view Mounting Mounting bracket bracket Mounting Mounting screw screw GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1150 QLBD GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA Point gt Cautions on installation Tighten the mounting screw with the specified torque Failure to do so may damage the unit or distort the panel and make a surface waviness on the display area leading to deterioration of the visibility or incorrect input from the touch panel GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GOT GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 5Nem 0 36 to 0 48Nem ook 4 A protection film is attached on the display section of GOT prior to shipment Remove the film when the installation is completed 6 7 6 5 Installation Procedure 7 WIRING i A WIRING PRECAUTIONS NWARNING 2 Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do
20. G4 1 Network No 0 FF When the host station is selected 0 When the master station 2 Station No FF ie selected 1 to 64 When a local station is selected 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not 3 3 CPU No necessary when the system is connected to another CPU 1 Indicates that the device value is a 32 bit two word module 4 Data range 0 Indicates that the device value is a 16 bit one word module 5 Device name Set the name and number of the device to be monitored 6 Device number 7 1 O number When the initial I O signal of module is displayed with three digits specify the first two digits Initial device here p 1 8 number Set the initial device number of the buffer memory in decimal 1 For devices that can be set see the following GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer 3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 3 When the station No is set to the host station FF set the network No to 0 Point gt Displaying the data range The Entry Monitor Batch Monitor TC Monitor and BM Monitor screens display the data range as shown below DW 32 bit two word module e Nothing displayed 16 bit one word module Continued to next page 14 16 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor st
21. The size of drive Displays the size in use size of the drive which is selected by drive selection Operation switch Execution switch of each function install upload etc which can be executed on the OS information screen Remark Qs Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files Displayed folders and files Refer to the following for the details of displayed folders and files Section 13 1 4 Display file 13 2 OS Information 13 2 3 Display example of OS information 13 7 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS a Se N N N AND BATTERY 89 STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Display operation of OS information 13 8 OS information screen Program Data 0S Select drive A Built in CF card information C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM OS information screen Storage file folder display screen Program Data 0S information Size Date Time Install Up load Property Data ceci 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information If touch a drive in Select drive the information of the first folder of the touched drive is displayed If touch a folder name the information of the touched folder is displayed
22. a 8 Barcode Change Touch the Change button 9 Host PC Modem Granne LIAN Touch the communication driver annel No Please select communication driver installed to the GOT A QnA QCPU mae j QU71C24 A QnA QCPU QU7 1024 190 AJ 10C24 MELDAS C6 10 1 Communication Setting 10 5 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 z 5 E lt 9 Z 5 Q co lt 0 LZ rE We Eiu Zn DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 10 6 Channel Driver assign 1 A QnA QCPU QJ7 1024 8 Barcode 9 Host PC Modem Communication Setting Standard I F Setting Chh a Pe 1 A QnA QCPU QJ7 1024 ae or 9 Host PC ChNo USB 9 Host PC CH Driver assign Definition of ChNo O None L FA device 8 Barcode 9 PC Point gt Communication driver 1 Multi channel function 4 The Channel Driver assign screen is displayed again Touch the OK button Touch the X button to return to the Communication Settings screen Check that the selected communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 is assigned After checking touch the OK button
23. Even when the utility call key is set to the zero point you can display the main menu using either of the following two operations e Pressing the special function switch set on the user created screen e Powering ON the GOT while touching the upper left corner of the screen 9 3 Utility Display 9 6 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu Zz S ZS u gt gt COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 9 7 3 When touching special function switch utility If you touch the special function switch utility while user created screen is displayed the main menu is displayed The special function switch utility screen by drawing software m m Special function switch Utility can be set as a touch switch that is displayed on a user created x Communication setting fi GOT setup Time setting amp display E Program data control A Debug amp self check 7 Language For the details of the special function switch refer to the following gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 4 When powering ON the system If you power ON the GOT while touching the upper left cor
24. External dimensions of serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M e Protective cover is installed e Protective cover is removed RS 232 O POWER ORD Oso O ERROR 90 3 55 72 2 84 GTO1 RS4 M GTO1 RS4 M O POWER ORD Osp O ERROR RS 232 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG 57 2 25 il 65 2 56 Unit mm inch External dimensions of connector conversion adapter GT10 9PT5S App 5 GT10 9PT5S o 22 0 87 Unit mm inch Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensions of communication cable GT01 C30R4 25P Unit mm inch Z W 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 53 2 09 O ALN 1 97 Je _53 2 09 oz l ib an SJEN 7 P 2 a 0 28 E BO Im E J O E O g lt M2 6 E M2 6 gt De GT01 C OOO R4 25P on OOF 16 50 1 97 ne L 53 2 09 j L16 voq 0 63 0 63 wits A Ww i pmi M2 6 a M a g Value of OOO Length L mm inch 100 10000 393 7 200 20000 787 4 300
25. Please input password 7 8 9 al BI 4 5 6 Cj 0 TAAA O AC Del Enter Touching Enter executes read write check for the flash memory ai ag om 14 114 14 6 Memory Check 14 6 3 Memory check operation Internal Flush memory area write read check Executing now Internal Flush memory area Touching the OK button returns to the write read check Memory check screen Normaly completed o BS Remark Password change p The password cannot be changed When input password error the cancel dialog is displayed If touch OK returns to the Internal Flush memory area Memory check screen write read check Password error ETA 14 6 Memory Check 14 6 3 Memory check operation 14 115 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww N a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF Point P When error is found in the memory When error is found by memory check the dialog indicating the area in which the error occurred is displayed If an error is found in the D drive Internal SRAM format the internal SRAM For details of the formatting of the D drive Internal SRAM refer to the following
26. Under mentioned BootOS and Standard monitor OS are necessary to execute utility OS name Function overview Storage location Required for the control of GOT and the communication between PC and GOT Installed at factory shipment i Flash memory BootOS BootOS can be installed from drawing software or the CF card When installed C GIBOOT from drawing software or the CF card GOT is initialized to be the factory f shipment status Standard monitor OS Required for display and System Screen Data operation of the user created screen and utility screen System Screen Information Not installed in GOT at factory Standard shipment Flash memory monitor TrueType numerical font oS Install it from drawing software C G1SYS 12 dot Standard Font Gothic 16 dot Standard Font Mincho 16 dot Standard Font Gothic or the CF card At installation select Mincho or Gothic for the 16 dot standard font 16 2 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS For the installation using GOT the CF card storing BootOS or Standard monitor OS is required For the method of writing BootOS and Standard monitor OS in the CF card the following two methods are available 1 To Memory Card from drawing software GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fu
27. 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 1 Drive name allocation 13 1 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS a Se N N Py AND BATTERY 89 STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF At maintenance HB GOT main unit D drive C drive Upload y Internal SRAM Flash Memory Internal A drive Built in CF card when installed in GOT Upload Inserting Removing PC GT Designer2 GT Designer3 Copy files on Windows Built in gt card when installed in PC The data of the Flash Memory Project data etc can be saved even if the battery voltage becomes 13 2 The project data can be started only from the flash memory C drive It cannot be started from the built in CF card A drive Point gt Folder and file in memory card Multiple folders and files will be created when OS or project data is transferred to the memory card low Data type Storage location BootOS Standard monitor OS Communication driver Flash Memory C drive Extended function OS Option OS Project data na Including recipe setting alarm conditions time action and GOT setup Flash Memory C drive Al rm data Alarm log file Internal SRAM D drive Recipe data Built in CF card A drive Do not
28. CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 2 OS Information 13 2 1 Function of OS information Each file name folder name of BootOS and OS Standard monitor OS PC communication driver and Option OS by which each drive A Built in CF card C Flash memory holds can be displayed in lists Installation and uploading of the files are also possible Function Contents Reference page Information display of files and folders Displays the kind name data size creation date and time of the file or folder 13 7 13 8 Install All files written in the A drive Built in CF card can be installed in the C drive Flash 13 9 nstal memory All files in the C drive Flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive Built in CF Upload d 13 10 card Displays the property file name data size type version and creation date of the file Property display 13 11 Data check Data check of files is possible 13 12 Point gt Notes on installing OS If the Boot OS or the Standard monitor OS is installed such data on the GOT as the project data will be deleted After installing the Boot OS or the Standard monitor OS reinstall download necessary data 13 2 2 Display operation of OS information screen Main menu Program data control LF Section 9 3 Utility Display ime setting amp display Program dataggontrol debug amp self OS information Memory card Forna Pr
29. Deleting alarm log file Copying alarm log file Memory card format Formatting of CF card and Internal SRAM Memory information Display of free memory space in GOT GOT data package acquisition Copies the OS and project data to the memory card 9 3 Debug amp Self check Debug System monitor Device monitor of PLC Test function Present value change of the buffer memory monitor and the buffer memory of intelligent module A List editor Sequence program and parameter change of ACPU FX list editor Sequence program and parameter change of FX PLC A drive memory check Standard CF card Memory check C drive memory check Built in flash memory D drive memory check Internal SRAM Drawing check Missing bits color draw display and overlap display check of liquid crystal Self check Font check Installed fonts check Touch panel i Touch panel operation check checking Connected target confirmation I O check Self loopback check 4 System alarm display Displaying GOT errors CPU errors network errors Resetting GOT errors GOT start time Displaying GOT start date and time current time accumulated operating hours Clean Display the screen to clean the display section O 4 Perform the following with the drawing software e Installing the communication driver Downloading the project data with communication settings channel number and co
30. END 4 Completion of setting write 14 76 complete write the PLC CPU 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 26 Operation in parameter mode P Setting for multiple items is also available a GO End of writing is displayed 14 3 27 Operation in other mode O Details Purpose Operation that checks the Procedures key input sequence error step number error code SHIFT gt OTHER gt 2 gt 1 Except AnA AnUCPU Error check for the current error in the Ly 2 gt 1 4 4 AnA AnUCPU ACPU other than AnA and gt AnUCPU Check the program double Program check coil command code END SHIFT gt OTHER gt 2 2 F i gt GO gt Step number Buffer memory batch command Monitor the buffer memory details of the special function SHIFT OTHER gt 3 11 L2 number of unit gt Top I O gt SP monitoring unit gt H i Buffer memory GO gt t a Ly K address gt y Monitor the clock data of the Clock monitor SHIFT gt OTHER 3 gt 1 gt 3 ACPU Clear all memories in the Clearing of all PC memories ACPU SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 2 gt Go
31. GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 9 3 Utility Display 9 8 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu Zz S Z u gt gt COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration The basic configuration of the screen is as follows Title display Close Return button Main Menu Screen The screen title name is displayed in title display part As the screen is composed of multiple ae layers the title including these layers is Window move buzzer ON Title display displayed Security setting Setting Utility call key Setting Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standard 0 ms If the title overflows the title display area the middle section is omitted and is displayed at the section gE GOT setup Menu call key ntl Title display Please select keys Pressing time is effective only in case one point 2 Close Return button When a middle screen of the layers is displayed if the Close return button in the right corner of screen is touched returns to the previous screen If this button is touched when directly displayed from monitor screen the screen is closed and r
32. Keyboard Al Input numeric with keyboard e 0 to 9 Key Input the numeric e Enter Key Touching the Enter key completes numeric input and closes the keyboard e Cancel Key Touching the Cancel key cancels numeric input and closes the keyboard e 4 gt Key Moves the cursor left or right if there is an item that can be entered Del Key Del key is used when canceling the input by 1 character e gt key and the key which is not mentioned do not function 4 If Enter key is touched numeric input is completed and keyboard is closed 9 11 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING n UTILITY FUNCTION In Communication Setting the communication interface names and the related communication channel communication driver names display and channel numbers are set Moreover in Communication Detail setting the communication interface details are set Communication parameters setting 1 z E lt Z S fe 8 O au LZ re W Sl uw n 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 1 Communication setting functions 2 gt lt IOn Function Contents Zkz EHT Channel Driver assign Change the assignment of channel No and communication driver name Sai Channel n
33. Select List Monitor with 4 or v Parameter setting Keyword setup List Monitor 020 wo When the list monitor is started on the FX list editor screen the step numbers displayed on the FX list editor screen is OLD OM 50 iz displayed on the list monitor screen 2 LD IM 3 SET IM 4 LD IM 5 OUT WY 6 OUT HY 7 OUT HY 8 LDI Y 9 MOV Kb 100 st ur ee Point gt Starting list monitor with special function switches FX list monitor With setting special function switches FX list monitor the list monitor can be started on the monitor screen When the list monitor is started on the monitor screen the list editor cannot be used For how to set special function switches refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 109 14 4 16 List monitor UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa 1S L Ww N a O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF Displays and key functions The following describes the displays for the list monitor 100 SET D 500 LD EM 500 OUT HY 020 OUT HY 030 LDI Y O10 MOV K 2 L 3 4 5 OUT HY 010 6 7 8 9 D
34. Z fe O 11 5 1 Utility call key setting function 2 gt The key position for calling the main menu of the utility can be specified 5 The key position can be specified by one point or two points of 4 corners on the screen When the key position is specified by one point the time to switch to the utility when the key position is kept pressing can be set z For default setting the upper left and upper right corners are specified F Lu Point f Operation settings by drawing software SmE Z Set the utility call key at GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designer2 ET When using GT Designer3 execute the settings at GOT Setup of GOT Environmental Setting When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting by Display screen of the GOT m Zz ger gt 42 Qik Day AON GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 5 2 Utility call key display operation CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Main menu ee GOT setup Operation settings gt Section 9 3 Utility Display z GOT setup 7 GOT setup Operation x 4 uzzel SHORT ion sett ins il isplas Security se Setting ili Bettin lain Met Communica GOT setur Time se Pron i Debug amp self cha Touch GOT setup io i peration Menu call key GOT setup Menu call key FILE DISPLAY AND COPY
35. assigned When setting the channel number to 9 for the RS 232 interface the communication driver 55 Host PC or Host Modem can be selected Z When setting the channel number to 9 for the USB interface the communication driver Host PC ng is automatically assigned es 8 26 583 oo E zoe 255 10 1 Communication Setting 10 3 10 1 3 Description of communication setting screen 10 4 Point gt Precautions for communication between GOT and connected devices 1 Installing Communication driver and downloading Communication Settings To perform communication with the connected device the following actions are necessary 1 Installing Communication driver Up to 4 OS installation 2 Assigning channel number and communication driver to communication interface Communication Setting 3 Downloading Communication Settings project data assigned in step 2 Perform 1 2 and 3 with drawing software M Use Communication Settings Standard I F Settings CH No I F Driver Standard F 1 1 R5422 232 MELSEC FX v Detail Setting Standard I F 2 9 R5232 Host PC zl s Standard I F gt gt USE Host PC zl 3 Cancel For Communication Settings refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer 2 VersionO Screen Design Manual GT Designer 3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals For installation of Communication driver OS and download of project data refer
36. inl Please input Customer keyword On ea aa ZS 2nd M 35 3a 8 Elm z0 Wyte Los So gag N AE 28H 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 13 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Delete Registered keyword is deleted Touching the Delete key pops up a keyboard for keyword input When the correct keyword is input and the key is touched the keyword is deleted ceywor d Please input keyword Target PLC Settings FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword to be deleted Input a keyword to be deleted only into keyword 1 FX PLC not compatible with 2nd keyword 2nd keyword is ignored 1 Refer to the manual for the PLC in use for the models that are compatible with the 2nd keyword 10 14 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Clear To access an FX PLC where a keyword has been registered keyword protection is cancelled Touching the Clear key pops up a keyboard for keyword input When the correct keyword is input and the key is touched the protection is cancelled Keyword Please input keyword Target PLC Settings FX PLC compatible with 2nd keyword Input a keyword or Customer Keyword to cancel the protection Input a keyword into keyword to cancel the protection 4 FX PLC no
37. lt gt Section 13 5 Memory Card Format If an error is found in the C drive Flash memory or the D drive Internal SRAM right after formatting contact your nearest sales office or FA Center If touch OK the screen returns to Internal Flush memory area the Memory check screen write read error ok 14 116 14 6 Memory Check 14 6 3 Memory check operation 14 7 Drawing Check 14 7 1 Drawing check function The drawing check function carries out display checks as missing bit check color check basic figure display check move check among screens 14 7 2 Display operation of drawing check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check lt Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Display check Q self check Touch Debug amp self check Display check Debug self check Display check Draw i nggcheck Touch Drawing check Starting drawing check Touching Drawing check in the Display check displays the screen describing the drawing check operation Touch the upper right of the description screen to start a drawing check Point P Notes on drawing check Missing bits is occurred in the following cases 1 There are parts drawn in different color with the filled color 2 There are parts of basic figure and drawing patterns which are not drawn according to the layout and procedures described in Section 14 7 3 Display and operation of drawing check When
38. 0 5mm 1 Option function at four corners Ne board O A SSS GOT main unit xX N 1 Floated XX 4 Inclined Do not keep the option function board in a floated or inclined status Do not touch the circuit board in the GOT main unit during hae aaa the option function board installation Removing Turn the GOT power off Option function board Rise the lever for removing the option function board with a fingernail as shown in the figure on the right Pinch the lever with fingers and pull up it vertically to remove the option function board Groove for reverse installation protection Point gt Precautions for installing removing the option function board 1 Do not twist the lever when removing the option function board Otherwise the lever may be broken 2 Install the dummy cover when not using the option function board 8 3 Option Function Board 8 3 3 How to install or remove the option function board 8 4 Battery The battery backs up clock data alarm history and recipe data A battery is installed to GT1110 when the GT11 is shipped from the factory 8 4 1 Applicable battery The following battery is applicable for GT1100 Model Contents Battery for backup of clock data GT11 50BAT alarm history recipe data and time action setting value 8 4 2 Battery specifications Item Specifications Type Magnesium manganese dioxide lithium pri
39. 1 There are optional components common for GT15 GT11 and GT10 2 3 2 2 Component List 2 2 1 GOT G14 Models with a built in serial interface GOT GT1155 QTBD 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in serial interface GT1155 QSBD 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in serial interface GT1150 QLBD 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal monochrome black white 16 scales 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in serial interface Models with a built in bus interface GOT GT1155 QTBDQ 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in Q bus serial interface GT1155 QTBDA 5 7 320 x 240 dots TFT color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in A bus serial interface GT1155 QSBDQ 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in Q bus serial interface GT1155 QSBDA 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN color liquid crystal 256 colors 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in A bus serial interface GT1150 QLBDQ 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal monochrome black white 16 scales 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in
40. 13 16 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Touch and select the file to delete Screen mentioned left is displayed if Del button is touched Confirm the deletion targeted file is specified correctly If touch If touch OK canceled button the file is deleted Cancel button the deletion is When the deletion completes the dialog box shown left is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed Copy operation Z The file in the A drive is copied to another directory of the A drive S Copy to from C drive or D drive is disabled z a Dialog for selecting a copy destination drive Install CF card in the PC in which create a 5 Program Data Project information folder for the copy destination pelect drive Set the same character with System A Built in CF card Setting of System Environment of GT Designer2 for the folder name Su When using GT Designer3 set the same Szo C Flash Memory character with GOT Type Setting in SER D Internal SRAM Common _ GT Designer2 Version O Screen Please select T ea Design Manuel a a destination GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Z o Design Manual Fundamentals zzz 2 Install the CF card mentioned above to Dialog for selecting a copy destination folder Gor Program Data Project information Refer to the following for inserting z removing method of
41. 14 8 3 Font CHECK OPeratlOn saiisine aia hides dens AAE I RT aa 14 122 14 9 Touch Panel Check voccccsacactdsticnceccticscoacadsnasivaceacantssancadecncecedeicarssadasanedeneetaaactacescal 14 123 14 9 1 Touch panel Check FUNCTION soona eaaa aaa adea aaa aAA 14 123 14 9 2 Display operation of touch panel CHECK cccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaecaeeeeeeeeetteeteeeeeaea 14 123 14 9 3 Touch panel check operations cecceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeececaeceeeeeeeeeeeseceecaaeaeseeeeeeeeeseteeesesaeees 14 124 AIONO CHECK reacties oa vices E E E 14 125 14 10 1 I O check function 2 cece cece cece cece ence ae cent eee eee e eee eaaeaaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeesesecccaeaaeeeeeeeeeeesseessenaness 14 125 14 10 2 Display operation of I O CHECK cccccccccceceeeeeeeeeceeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesececaeaecaeeeeeeeeseseeceeesiccaeeeanees 14 125 14 10 3 1 0 CHECK operation sisson a a a a a aada 14 126 14 11 System Alarm Display nnneeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeessssseerrrerrrnrrrrrrrsesssssssssssrerrnnrrrrrrrnrnnn 14 128 14 11 1 System alarm display function 0 0 0 ccc eee e eee ee cece ee eee cece eee e eee ceaaaaeaaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeetenssnnsieeees 14 128 14 11 2 Displaying the system alarm diSpPlay cccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeaaeeeeseenaaeeees 14 128 14 11 3 Operating the system alarm display asseciseiniannnnn a 14 129 14 12 GOT Start Time iva cescsdscsdaascaaamndietrdanedstanadediniapnnidenciandsinemedecesdbadu
42. A Built in CF card T i C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM x W pa 1S Wwe Ww op fs ie 0 Select the memory to check and touch Check CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 6 Memory Check 14 113 14 6 1 Memory check function 14 6 3 Memory check operation Carries out write read check of memory Point gt When drive is not displayed When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure or memory type with reference to the following e CF card inserting removing method lt gt gt Section 8 1 CF Card When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arisen Replace the CF card or Flash memory C drive For details of Flash memory contact your nearest sales office or FA Center The following example explains about Memory Check using Flash memory C drive For the standard CF card A drive memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as Flash memory ik Flush Select Flash Memory in the Memory check ieee sai setting screen and touch the button If select the OK button the numeric keyboard window is displayed Execute now If select the Cancel button the screen returns to the initial menu 2 Touch 5 9 2 o and then Enter The password is fixed to 5920 Debug self check Memory check
43. CF card removal possible 7 CF card cover Open or close when inserting or removing the CF card 8 Battery cover Open or close when replacing the battery Power terminal and FG terminal for power supply 24VDC to GOT and 9 Power terminal i grounding 10 CF card interface Interface for installing the CF card to GOT 11 CF card eject button Button for removing the CF card GT11 50BAT battery for storing clock data alarm history recipe data and 12 Battery time action setting value The project data is stored in the built in flash memory 4 2 Back Panel 4 4 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM BS SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE 5 1 UL cUL Standards m Using GOT GOT is for use on a Flat Surface of a Type 1 Enclosure 5 2 EMC DIRECTIVE For the products sold in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directives has been a legal obligation since 1997 Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directives required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a CE mark on their products Products that the EMC Directive applies to are marked with the CE mark logo Po
44. Connector selection switch for PLC 5 PRENS Switch for selecting RS 422 or RS 232 set to RS 422 by default communication For connecting to a personal computer for changing the 6 USB port hi A P E aa communication driver 7 Connector for PLC communication D sub 9 pin female For RS 422 connection 8 Protective cover Protect unused D sub connector USB port and switches 9 Terminal block for the serial multi drop Terminal block 5 pin with a protective cover M3 Tightening torque communication 0 5 to 0 6N m 24VDC power supply connector insertion point A dedicated cable is 10 Power supply connector i included 11 Slider for installing the DIN rail 12 Mode selection switch Do not operate Set to right by default When set to left the module Slide switch does not operate normally 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 17 8 9 2 Applicable serial multi drop connection unit OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION z O a 8 9 4 Installation Installed with DIN rail Install the multi drop connection module with its hook 1 place using the DIN rail e Applicable DIN rail DIN46277 width 35mm Install the DIN rail with screws at intervals of 150mm Directly installed to panel Install the multi drop connection module to the panel using 4 5mm holes 2 places 8 9 5 Caution for compliance
45. GT10 50PSCW GT10 50PSGW GT10 40PSCB GT10 40PSGB GT10 40PSCW GT10 40PSGW GT10 30PSCB GT10 30PSGB GT10 30PSCW GT10 30PSGW GT10 20PSCB GT10 20PSGB GT10 20PSCW GT10 20PSGW For GT10 GT05 90PCO GT05 80PCO GT05 70PCO GT05 60PCO GT05 50PCO GT16 50PCO GT10 40PCO GT10 30PCO GT10 20PCO USB environmental protection cover GT16 UCOV GT16 50UCOV GT15 UCOV GT14 50UCOV GT11 50UCOV Protective cover for oil Stand GT15 90STAND GT15 80STAND GT15 70STAND A9GT 50STAND GT05 50STAND GT15 70ATT 98 GT15 70ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 97 GT15 60ATT 96 GT15 60ATT 87 GT15 60ATT 77 Attachment GT15 50ATT 95W GT15 50ATT 85 GT16 90XLTT GT16 80SLTT GT16 70SLTT GT16 70VLTT GT16 70VLTTA GT16 70VLTN Backlight GT16 60SLTT GT16 60VLTT GT16 60VLTN GT15 90XLTT GT15 80SLTT GT15 70SLTT GT15 70VLTT GT15 70VLTN GT15 60VLTT GT15 60VLTN Multi color display board GT15 XHNB GT15 VHNB Connector conversion box GT11H CNB 37S GT16H CNB 42S Emergency stop sw guard cover GT11H 50ESCOV GT16H 60ESCOV Memory loader GT10 LDR Memory board GT10 50FMB Panel mounted USB port extension GT14 C10EXUSB 4S GT10 C10EXUSB 5S Software Abbreviations and generic terms GT Works3 Description Abbreviation of the SW O DNC GTWK3 E and SW O DNC GTWK3 EA GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen simulator GT Simula
46. IN_24VDC gt POWER MAX 00W SERIAL _00007201DP00001 A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN L Date e g 1st 1 to 31 1st to 31st Year e g 2007 The last two digits of the Western calendar year Month e g February 1 to 9 Jan to Sept X Oct Y Nov Z Dec 2 Battery procurement The battery is susceptible to natural discharge Order one when necessary 8 4 Battery 8 4 3 Battery replacement procedure 8 9 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION zZ O a 8 5 Protective Sheet The protective sheet is used to protect the operation surface from damage or dirt when the touch key of GOT display section is operated 8 5 1 Applicable protective sheet The following protective sheets are applicable for GT1100 Product name Model Contents GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB Protective sheet Protective sheet for 5 7 GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW Clear 5 sheets Antiglare 5 sheets Clear Frame White 5 sheets Antiglare Frame White 5 sheets 8 5 2 Installing procedure If the protective sheet has been already attached to the GOT remove the old one from the GOT display section holding the lower right corner If the protective sheet for transportation is attached to the GOT remove it too
47. Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat burst or take fire resulting in injuries or fires Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the unit do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery If any impact has been applied discard the battery and never use it The battery may be damaged by the drop or impact Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body
48. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GO Toog GT11 User s Manual SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Always read these precautions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product In this manual the safety precautions are ranked as WARNING and CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous Z WARNING conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous uN CAUTION conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the caution level may lead to a serious accident according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety ekg Kg Kg Kg Ky w Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS NWARNING Some failures of the GOT or cable may keep the outputs on or off Some failures of a touch panel may cause malfunction of the input objects such as a touch switch An external monitoring circuit should be provided to check for output signals which may lead to a serious accident Not doing so can cau
49. N a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 33 14 2 16 Procedure for batch monitor basic operation 14 2 17 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters The TC monitor is a function to monitor only timers T and counters C This section describes how to operate the TC monitor when the system monitor function is executed 14 2 18 Information displayed on the TC Monitor screen and key functions 1 The information displayed on the TC Monitor screen is described below 1 Displays a network No 2 Displays a station No 3 Displays a CPU No 9 Displays a file name TC_MONITOR 0 aan NAME MAIN 0 No comments displayed 5 Displays a set value Comments displayed 4 Displays a comment 6 Displays a present value 7 Displays a device number 10 Displays contact point and coil on off 8 Displays a device name 11 Monitor display area For further information about items 1 to 11 shown above see the page that follows 2 The following table describes the key functions displayed on the TC Monitor screen Key switch Function Activates the Quick test operation TEST i Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the MENU system monitor fun
50. Please select keys Touch buttons to set for the utility call key GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 16 11 5 1 Utility call key setting function 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation GOT setup Touch Le or displayed on the four corners of the setting screen TA The button repeats x gt every time it is pressed Please select keys Change the part to be set as a key position to The key position can be set to the zero Pressing time is effective point only in case one point When the key position is specified by one point the time to switch to the utility when the key position is kept pressing can be set Touch the time area The keyboard is displayed if the input area is touched Input a setting time from the keyboard 4 Setting contents are defined by touching OK button If X button is touched without touching With do not push OK button EN if you close the screen the changed OK button the dialogue box shown on value will be canceled the left is displ i 2 e left is displayed OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed 0K Cancel button The utility call key setting screen is displayed After finishing
51. S N 540001 BC BC Boot OS version AD oa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION ai 1 MADE IN JAPAN version J 80M1 IND CONT EQ Rating plate HD c US LISTED 2e ae Su ZO Wye ooz zZzeEoQ Sir eTa apn 285 ERZ 25 Zoon 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 9 b GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QTBDQ IN 24VDC POWER MAX 00W __ SERIAL _00007201DP00001 A L DP MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN e BootOS version 16 10 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 5 CoreOS z 2 Install CoreOS only if the GOT is not in its factory shipped condition even if BootOS is installed z Normally installation is not required 5 5 Point P Precautions when installing CoreOS The installation cannot be interrupted z The followings should not be performed during the installation of CoreOS ie ow GOT may not operate 220 Zz e Turning OFF the GOT power Sie e Pressing the reset button of GOT Szy e Turning ON the CF card access switch e Removing the CF card If GOT does not operate please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center Q ZZ LON If GOT does not recover after CoreOS is installed there may be a hardware problem zz Please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center Tmk aon 16 5 1 Installation me
52. This subsection describes the flow until the system monitor function screen is displayed after System 5 z monitor Extended function OS is installed in the GOT Z lt ow 220 Start DuZ 2YE awe l 828 Turn on the power to the GOT T Starting from the special function switch System Monitor set in the Starting from the utility project data Display the utility Touch the special function switch A E e p a3 We D afela After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check gt Refer to the following manual for how to set the special Debug System monitor from the Main Menu function switch ee 9 z For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual of L GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Zza the GOT to be used Manual UEa GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design TET Manual Functions gaS SRE OLN Display the functional change menu screen of the system monitor function Q E zZz lt z S oO a a W l re Point 1 How to display the utility _ For how to display the utility refer to the following lt 3 Section 9 3 Utility Display x W pa oO L Ww N a 0 2 Ifthe project data has not been downloaded The system monitor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not 5 been downloaded to the GOT 59 On z ig oa CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 13 14 2 2 Display 14 2 3 Opera
53. etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste The GOT does not include consumable components that will cause the shorten life However the battery liquid crystal screen and backlight have each life length It is recommended to replace the battery periodically For the replacement of the liquid crystal screen and backlight please consult your nearest sales office or FA center For the battery life refer to the following Section 3 4 Power Supply Specifications For the life of the LCD screen or backlight refer to the following lt gt Section 3 2 Performance Specifications 17 1 17 1 Daily Inspection Daily inspection items Inspection ere No Inspection Item Method Criterion Action 1 GOT mounting status Check for loose Securely mounted Retighten screws within the mounting screws specified torque range Loose terminal screws Retighten SCTEWS Not loose Retighten terminal screws with screwdriver 2 Connection Poximalg solderigas Visual check Proper intervals Correct status terminals Loose connectors Visual check Not loose Retighten connector fixing screws Dirt on protection sheet Visual check Not outstanding Replace with new one sage 7 3 status Foreign material Vis alicheck No foreign matter R move cikan attachment sticking Refer to the following for the
54. gt 4 GO Clear all sequence program Clearing of all programs microcomputer program and SHIFT OTHER gt 3 gt 2 gt 2 gt 4 gt GO T C setting value areas Clear all details of the bit Clearing of all device a device and the word device in SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 gt IGO memories the ACPU Set the PLC No of other stations for access on the gt OTHER gt 3 PLC No settin i MELSECNET II B or ak gt END MELSECNET 10 gt 2 gt PC No gt GO 3 gt Network No gt GO gt Station No gt GO Select the main sub program Main sub program switching displayed on the list edit SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt 3 gt 2 7 Ly N GO screen 4 Operate the run stop status of y Remote run stop P u Pavel SHIFT gt OTHER gt 3 gt 4 gt 1 gt x i GO the ACPU from the GOT Lp 4 Read write of machine language Specify the memory address absolute address of the ACPU Read the memory details and write the machine language to the memory SHIFT gt OTHER
55. lt ne i Zy o Xz wick X lt lt APPENDICES 18 2 2 Error code and reference manual Error source Error code Contents Reference 0 to 99 User s manual of the ACPU Error code of CPU for ACPU Value of D9008 connected with GOT User s manual of the FXCPU to Error code of CPU i which GOT is connected CPU i ia PLC If a third party PLC is connected 100 to 299 gt ching party PEG take actions referring to the error e Temperature controller message OMRON temperature p LF GOT1000 Series controller only Connection Manual Error code of the GOT main unit 300 to 399 i function Error code of the GOT GOT 400 to 499 n Section 18 2 communication function Error code of the GOT main unit 500 to 699 function CPU 1000 to 10000 Error code of CPU User s manual of the QCPU and Value of SDO for QCPU QnACPU QnACPU connected with GOT Servo User s manual of the servo 20016 to 20237 Error code of servo amplifier gi amplifier 2 amplifier connected to GOT 1 The assigned error code for FXPLC is 100 to 109 which displays the status of M8060 to M8069 Example When the error code 100 error occurs correct the error according to the M8060 description 2 The error code displayed on GOT is calculated by changing the error code displayed on the servo amplifier to a decimal number and adding 20000 to it For this reason to refer to the manual of the servo ampli
56. mfa LO Definition of ChNo O None LFA device 8 Barcode 9 PC a O LWW Communication detail settings switching operation K oO If you touch the driver display BOX the screen switches to the Detailed setting screen of the related communication device A L7 Section 10 2 Communication Detail Settings i 3a Ae Zo 582 Se Sez 285 10 1 Communication Setting 10 7 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 1 Communication detail settings functions Function Contents Communication Set various communication parameters of communication devices parameters setting The settable parameters differ according to the communication device Keyword Register For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be set Keyword Delete For the FX series PLCs key word for protecting program in the PLC can be deleted Keyword Clear For the FX series PLCs the program protection status in the PLC can be cancelled Keyword Prois t For the FX series PS with the 2nd keyword in use the cancelled program protection in the PLC can be reactivated 10 2 2 Communication detail settings display operation Touch the driver display BOX of the communication parameter to be set in the Communication setting screen Communication Setting Standard I F Setting Pan 4 MELSEC FX Host PC USB Host PC CH Driver assign Definition of
57. on the usage environmental temperature When the same screen is displayed for a long time an incidental color or partial discoloration is generated on the screen due to heat damage and it may not disappear To prevent the heat damage the screen saver function is effective For details on the screen saver function refer to the following KE Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP Using the GOT Backlight OFF function can prolong the life of the backlight For details on the Backlight OFF function refer to the following KE Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Not compliant when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all user s operation environment In addition the product may not be used in environments under exposition of oil or chemicals for a long period of time or in environments filled with oil mist 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 5 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM amp n Zz lt G my O wW a ip PART NAME STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 3 3 Built in Interface Specifications e GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Specifications Item GT1155 QSBD GT1155 QTBD GT1150 QLBD e RS422 1ch e RS422 1ch Transmission speed
58. other mode 0 ERR STEP 2 5 Error step number is displayed SP UNIT DOWN step number of D9010 ERR CODEs 41 Error message is displayed Error code is displayed error code of D9008 2 Example of display for an error in the AnA or AnNUCPU Mode is displayed other mode Error step number is displayed step number of D9010 Error message is displayed Error code is displayed error code of D9008 Error detail code is displayed error code of D9091 Error history if available is displayed 3 Example of next display for the display of above error history is available Mode is displayed other mode Error history number is displayed history control No of ACPU Error step number is displayed Error message is displayed Error code is displayed Error detail code is displayed Second minute hour date month and year of the error are displayed Displayed if other error history is available Point gt When an error message of the PLC CPU appears refer to the ACPU programming manual Common Command and the user s manual for each CPU for corrective actions 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 81 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww N a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY
59. screen Section 13 4 Alarm Information 17 1 Daily Inspection life span even if battery voltage is not displayed 17 2 as ja lt x WW 8 T 2 W Z lt INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES 17 3 Cleaning Method Use the GOT always in a clean condition To clean the GOT wipe the dirty part with a soft cloth using neutral detergent For the display operation of the Clean screen refer to the following lt gt Chapter 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN Clean Point f Precautions for cleaning Do not use chemicals such as thinner organic solvents and strong acids since they may cause the protective sheet to be deformed or the dissolvable paint on the surface to peel off In addition do not use spray solvents since they may cause the electrical failure of the GOT and peripheral devices 17 3 17 3 Cleaning Method 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement fa z lt uw O Z lt x Z mm 5 Z lt INSPECTION Low battery voltage detection and replacement The battery is used for backing up the clock data alarm history or recipe data It is recommended that you replace battery periodically Refer to the following for the replacement procedure L7 Section 8 4 Battery ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM The battery voltage low detection can be confirmed by the utility screen and system
60. 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 3 GT15 A370COB S1 1 2 3 9 2 5 8 Fig 4 GT15 A370COB 1 2 3 9 2 5 8 Fig 5 GT15 A1SCOB 0 7 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 6 GT15 A1SCONB 0 45 1 5 0 7 2 3 10 5 20 Fig 7 GT15 CLEXSS 1 10 6 34 8 20 6 67 6 30 6 100 Fig 8 Fig 9 GT15 EXCNB 0 5 2 Fig 8 0 7 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 10 33 GT15 COBS PA lenses Fig 9 GT15 J2COB 1 3 Fig 10 41 The GT15 CLJEXSS GT15 CLIBS cable has a grounding wire 1 m The GT15 CLBS cable has a grounding wire For the cable length of 10m or more 1m for the cable length less than 10m 0 5m Be sure to connect the wire to control panels 2 K PLC side HEE FA ep pS a GT15 EXCNB Fig 8 GT15 CL_ BS Fig 9 once wal Cable Approx 10 f iaa f The GT15 CLJEXSS 1 is the set product consisting of GT15 EXCNB GT15 CBS Refer to Fig A Unit mm inch 11 5 0 45 L 32 1 25 70 275 Cable Approx 8 0 50 a vl 58 y Ferrite core Approx 35x 40 Contracted tube color Red a mal 60 L 50 1 96 Cable Approx 17 0 1 96 Le m oN v CA x Ferrite core Approx p32 x 16 Contracted tube color Green 11 5 0 45 32 1 25 L GO
61. 100 C 199 16bit S 500 S 999 C 220 C 255 32bit D 200 D 511 RUN terminal input None Default OK CL lt Keyword The keyword of MELSEC FX is operated setup co Regist Delete Clear Protect List Monitor nad With setting special function switches FX list monitor the list monitor can be started on the monitor screen When the list monitor is started on the monitor screen the list editor cannot be used For how to set special function switches refer to the following manual GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 4 Display 14 89 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa 1S L Ww N a O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 4 5 Operation procedures This section describes the contents of the MELSEC FX list editor and the key functions displayed on the screen Key arrangement and a list of key functions The arrangement and functions of the keys displayed on the MELSEC FX List Editor window are described below Displayed contents a A 2 Not found a ee ai 6 a F so boD 9 OUT T 10 our eve ope s
62. 115 200 57 600 Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800bps 9 600 4 800bps Connecter type D sub 9 pin female Connecter type D sub 9 pin female Use PLC communication Use PLC communication e RS422 485 1ch e RS422 485 1ch Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 PEE 38 400 19 200 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800bps 9 600 4 800bps Connecter type D sub 9 pin female Connecter type D sub 9 pin female Use PLC communication Use PLC communication Terminating resistor Open 110Q 330Q Terminating resistor Open 110Q 330Q Switched by terminating resistor selector Switched by terminating resistor selector Built in switch At factory shipment 3300 switch At factory shipment 330Q Interface Compatibility with the serial multi drop Compatibility with the serial multi drop connection Hardware version C or later connection Hardware version F or later RS232 ich Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800bps RS 232 Connecter type D sub 9 pin male Use PLC communication barcode reader RFID connection PC communication project data upload download OS installation transparent function USB Full Speed 12Mbps device ich USB Connector type Mini B Use PC communication project data upload download OS installation transparent function PCMCIA compact flash slot ich CF card Connector type For TYPE only
63. 2 Device comment display Comments written in the controller are displayed when a controller device is monitored Other stations can be monitored You can monitor other stations in the data link system containing the GOT or GOT connected station network system or CC Link system For further information about the connection forms that can be monitored see the following Subsection 14 210 System configuration 14 4 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 1 Specifications Zz O E oO 5 System configuration This subsection describes the controller names and the connection forms between the GOT and the controller that can be covered by the system monitor function For further information about communication units and cables for each connection form see the following z O L gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Ra Zo re Su Target controller 95i Controller QCPU Q mode Q series motion controller CPU Q QscPu Z o ao QnACPU zsz Q mi ACPU QCPU A mode A series motion controller CPU Doct FXCPU Remote 1 O station MELSECNET H system N 1 The GOT cannot write data to devices in the QSCPU The test operation is not available ONS Eka HEA xiL oak oth al lt z S E D a W l ra x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 5 14 2 1 Specifications Conn
64. 24 Test operation Bey Test example When turning ON MO When changing the present value of DO 8 NetNo O ST _ FF CPUNo 0 5 NetNo O ST FF CPUNo 0 s aR DEV ICE M RST 0 SET 1 0 DEVICE MD vLID Sok Fans Sees Tass Bee Cf lt FAENA MAMANE 6 Enter e E GJ Enter Del aC 1 Testing a bit device A device specified by the user is turned on and off 2 Testing a word device A specified value is written to a device specified by the user 3 Testing a timer counter Specified values are written as the present and set values of a device specified by the user x O w T O WL a m 7 O 0 4 Testing buffer memory A specified value is written to buffer memory specified by the user CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 3 The display format and device comment no comment display can be switched For further information see the following lt 3 Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Test example When the entry monitor is displayed When the entry monitor is displayed comment display hexadecimal display NetNo OJST FF CPUNo 0 NetNo OJST FF CPUNo 0 Tne F ME 5 j 6 1 Switching the display format Word device values are displayed in decimal or hexadecimal numbers on the entry batch TC and BM monitors
65. 5 V S Human sensor detect level setting Display Ss settings el m E O x x x D 6T1595 GT1585 GT1585 N X 5 V S ke T Display of human sensor detect time a a a of x x x Human sensor OFF delay setting E E E GT1595 G11585 GT1585 X 5 v S Invert colors ON OFF setting i i G6T1550 GT1150 Brightness Liquid crystal brightness setting O x O x contrast T adjustment iquid crystal contrast setting x x O x Continued to next page Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 10 App 11 O Applicable x Not Applicable Not required ing i i GT Soft Drawing Setting items Function GT15 EET O GT11 Setting Operation Buzzer volume setting O O O O f Doaa Security level change Security Security s tting password input for each object S 9 a Utility call key Utility call key setting O O O O Key sensitivity Key sensitivity setting O O x Key reaction speed Displaying key response speed O O x Touch panel adjustment Correcting touch position reading error O x x a GT1595 S X H Q QnA ladder monitor Setting of data holding destination for 5 setting MELSEC Q QnA ladder monitor function i Transparent mode Setting of communication target channel setting No when using FA transparent function 9 ns E Video Unit Setting of the video input signal and i F O x O 2 Settings resolution 3 Video Display Setting of the
66. 68 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 16 Adding Inserting commands 14 3 17 Deleting commands The example shown below is used to describe how to delete sequence program commands Before deletion Delete the ANI MO command 7 P ian K5 D20 P K80 Q After deletion Operation example lt Key operation gt D Select the Delete mode Read the 6th step 6 GO 5 LD TO Delete the ANI 7 P K80 K5 D20 MO command lt Display gt 14 D20 14 K2Y0018 19 gt END 20 NOP The key deletes the command at the cursor position The step number is brought forward Q The ANI MO command was deleted 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 17 Deleting commands 14 69 UTILITY FUNCTION INTERFACE COMMUNICATION SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND Ne Oo Ww ae 1S L l Ww op a ie 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 3 18 Using the help function HELP is input to use the Help function Input of HELP displays the Help function menus in each mode Select the corresponding item for execution 1 Reading the command in the sequence program Example of reading the area using the MOV command in the sequence program Operation example lt Key
67. 6T 20m GT09 C300R40304 6T 30m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA CPU port D Sub 9 pin GT09 C30R20301 9P 3m conversion cable RS 232 A 5 GT09 C30R20302 9P 3m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module cable For connecting Connector Conversion Box to YOKOGAWA GT09 C30R20304 9S 3m converter 2 2 Component List 2 10 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 UL cUL Ie OVERVIEW Zz T ea U Zz Q Oo SYSTEM STANDARDS AND PART NAME SPECIFICATIONS EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Connection cables for Allen Bradley PLCs Sold separately Product Model name Cable length name RS 232 GT09 C30R20701 9S 3m cable Connection cables for SIEMENS PLCs Sold separately Product Model name Cable length name RS 232 GT09 C30R20801 9S 3m cable Description For connecting GOT to Allen Bradley PLC Description For connecting GOT to SIEMENS HMI Adapter Connection cables for SHINKO indicating controller PLCs Sold separately Product Model name Cable length name RS 232 GT09 C30R21401 4T 3m cable CF card Sold separately Product name CF card Model name GT05 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB indicating controller Description For connecting Connector Conversion Box to SHINKO Contents GT05 MEM 256MC Flash ROM 256MB GT05 MEM 512MC Flash ROM 512MB GT05 MEM 1GC Flash ROM 1GB GT05 MEM 2GC Flash R
68. AC key Use this key to delete all characters under the cursor Entry is completed by touching the Enter key and the keyboard closes 14 2 System Monitor 14 37 14 2 20 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww N a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 21 BM monitor monitoring buffer memory The BM monitor buffer memory monitor is a function to monitor the buffer memory of special function modules This section describes how to operate the BM monitor when the system monitor function is executed 14 2 22 Information displayed on the BM Monitor screen and key functions 1 The information displayed on the BM Monitor screen is described below 1 Displays a network No 2 Displays a station No 3 Displays a CPU No BM_MONI TOR NetN 4 Displays a word device value 5 Displays a device No 6 Displays a device name 7 Displays the initial I O signal of the module For further information about items 1 to 7 shown above see the page that follows 14 38 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 21 BM monitor monitoring buffer memory 2 The following table describes the key functions displayed on the BM Monitor screen
69. AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 14 Batch monitor The batch monitor is a function to specify the head device of any device range to perform monitoring This section describes how to operate the batch monitor when the system monitor function is executed 14 2 15 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions 1 The information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen is described below 1 Displays a network No 2 Displays a station No 3 Displays a CPU No Display example of bit devices BATCH MONITOR eFC ONIN TES TEN ORM SET Jl NetNo O ST FF CPUNo 0 Ore Sialelale CSCS ial els No comments displayed Comments displayed 4 Displays bit device on off 5 Displays a comment Display example of word devices 16 bit ENCORE OTA TESTES SE E TES TEENOOR SET E NetNo OJST FF CPUNo 0 NetNo OJST FF CPUNo 0 Inventory units No comments displayed Comments displayed 6 Displays a word device value 7 Displays a device number 8 Displays a device name 14 30 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 14 Batch monitor Display example of word devices 32 bit N TES TENOR SET fl BATCH MONITOR S SEC a O NetNo O ST FF CPUNo 0 NetNo OJST FFICPUNo 0 5 D 5 Shipment A 14 Shipment B 6 Shipment C F So No comments displayed Comments displayed 5x2 9 Displays a data range Shr O5 u 10 Monitor display area 020 For further infor
70. CF card z lt gt Section 8 1 CF Card D 2 Q Open Project information and touch the 3 7 drive of the file to be copied to select the 3 drive and then touch the Next button The dialog for selecting a copy destination folder as shown left is displayed Please select a_destination a Se N N Py AND BATTERY 4 Touch the folder display area to select a Copy file name x PROJECTI folder and then touch the Exec button i Copy dest ination The dialog shown left is displayed a A PROJECT2 m Copy now a D oO Zz O 59 SS ZS i5 oa INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 3 Project Information 13 17 13 3 4 Operation of project information Touch tton Same named project data has already O oug Lox bu existed If there is no file of the same name in the Do you want to overwrite copy destination folder starts to copy When there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the dialog mentioned left is displayed without starting the copy If copy in this case the copied file is overwritten to the project data in the copy destination folder If touch OK button starts to copy If touch Cancel button cancels to copy When copying completes the dialog of completion is displayed If touch OK button closes the dialog Copy is completed Property display operation Displays
71. Connector type For TYPE I only Use Data transmission and storage in z ZS te 2 Lu ae 23 qX 325 he DVU Zz O z E Yn Z 9 Z z Zz O a O 3 3 Built in Interface Specifications 3 7 3 4 Power Supply Specifications 3 8 e GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Item Specifications GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Input power supply voltage 24VDC 10 15 ripple voltage 200mV or less Fuse built in not exchangeable 1 0A Power consumption 9 36W 390mA 24VDC or 9 84W 410mA 24VDC or less less At backlight off 4 32W 180mA 24VDC or less Inrush current 15A or less 26 4V 2ms Permissible instantaneous power failure time Within 5ms Noise immunity Noise voltage 1000Vp p Noise width 1 4s by noise simulator of 30 to 100Hz noise frequency Dielectric withstand voltage 500VAC for 1 minute across power supply terminals and earth Insulation resistance 10MQ or larger by insulation resistance tester across power supply terminals and earth Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2 mm_2 Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A Applicable tightening torque Terminal block terminal screw 0 5 to 0 8 N m 3 4 Power Supply Specifications e GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Item Input power supply voltage
72. Create project data 0 Screen Design Manual Refer to GT Designer3 Version1 fa 2 Screen Design Manual Functions D E 4 or Help functions of GT Designer Do Wire for the GOT power supply Refer to Chapter 7 WIRING x Attach the option function board Refer to Chapter 8 OPTION oe Only when necessary E When transferring data via a cable When transferring data via the CF card S Wi v Z rd Connect GOT and PC with a USB cable a or RS 232 cable Insert the CF card in the PC n y y Install and download the OS program Write the OS project data installed ject data installed in the PC to the GOT in the PC in the CF card Penner SE ee ae wane MAG RAR Refer to GT Designer2 Version Lu 1 Install the standard monitor OS 1 Write the standard monitor OS Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual communication driver extended communication driver extended function Refer to GT Designer3 Version zZ functions OS option OS to GOT OS option OS in the CF card Screen Design Manual Fundamentals E 2 Download the project data created 2 Write the project data created Refer to 16 INSTALLATION OF by the PC by the PC in the CF card core OS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS in this manual for the Install the CF card to GOT to install Geico S u and download the standard monitor OS z communication driver extended ig function OS option OS project
73. Current Target Built Version 207H 207H Built Date 02 01 05 02 01 05 Built Time 16 17 46 16 17 46 Author A Downloading continue OK Cance Download is completed Restart now 6 Touch Ok button If there is no project data of the same name in the C drive starts the download If there is a project data of the same name in the C drive the screen shown left is displayed without starting the download If touching OK button an overwrite download is executed to a project data of the same name If touching Cancel button cancels the downloading 6 When the downloading is completed the completion dialog mentioned left is displayed GOT is restarted if OK button is touched 13 3 Project Information 13 21 13 3 4 Operation of project information UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS EAIN HTAA N AND BATTERY st STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF Upload Transfers the project data from the C drive Flash Memory to the A drive Built in CF card Up load Do you want to upload The project data is already existed If upload is done the project data is deleted Do you want to execute Upload is completed 13 22 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project infor
74. D3 D1017 D1018 D1019 D1020 D1021 D1022 D1023 Device name A Unit of monitor display Nothing displayed 3 Changing the T C set values of large size and small size QnACPUs and displaying device comments The T C set values of QNACPUs whose date on the CPU rating plate is after 9707B can be changed and device comments can be displayed lt Information on the rating plate gt MELSEC PROGRAMMBLE CONTROLLER DATE 9707 B Function version Date of manufacture 4 Programs capable of changing timer counter set values e Only the main program can change the timer counter set values of ANNCPUs AnACPUs and AnUCPUS e When executing multiple programs with the QCPU Q mode and QnACPU setting values of timer counter can be changed only to the program scan execution type program set at the lowest number among them in parameter settings of GX Developer whose file name is displayed on the TC Monitor screen Note that a file to be displayed cannot be changed on the GOT 5 Z0 of Q QnACPUs and Z0 and VO of ACPUs ZO of Q QnACPUs and ZO and VO of ACPUs are displayed as Z and V respectively 14 12 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 1 Specifications 14 2 2 Display z O This section describes the operation procedure from turning on the power to the GOT to system monitor 2 display R play Ss F Outline until starting the system monitor
75. F900 series GOT800 Series Abbreviation of GOT 800 series mw Communication unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT15 QBUS GT15 QBUS2 GT15 ABUS GT15 ABUS2 GT15 75QBUSL GT15 75QBUS2L GT15 75ABUSL GT15 75ABUS2L Bus connection unit Serial communication unit GT15 RS2 9P GT15 RS4 9S GT15 RS4 TE RS 422 conversion unit GT15 RS2T4 9P GT15 RS2T4 25P Ethernet communication unit GT15 J71E71 100 MELSECNET H communication unit GT15 J71LP23 25 GT15 J71BR13 MELSECNET 10 communication unit GT15 75J71LP23 Z 1 GT15 75J71BR13 Z 2 CC Link IE Controller Network communication z GT15 J71GP23 SX unit CC Link IE Field Network communication unit GT15 J71GF13 T2 CC Link communication unit GT15 J61BT13 GT15 75J61BT13 Z gt Interface converter unit GT15 751F 900 Serial multi drop connection unit GT01 RS4 M Connection Conversion Adapter GT10 9PT5S RS 232 485 signal conversion adapter GT14 RS2T4 9P 1 AQ9GT QJ71LP23 GT15 75IF900 set 2 AQ9GT QJ71BR13 GT15 751F900 set 3 A8GT J61BT13 GT15 75IF900 set w Option unit Abbreviations and generic terms Description Printer unit GT15 PRN Video input unit GT16M V4 GT15V 75V4 RGB input unit GT16M R2 GT15V 75R1 Video RGB unit Video RGB input unit GT16M V4R1 GT15V 75V4R1 RGB output unit GT16M ROUT GT15V 75ROUT Multimedia unit GT16M MMR CF card unit GT15 CFCD CF card extension unit GT15 CFEX CO8S
76. If touch a folder name of the information of the folder in one higher hierarchy is displayed 4 If touch A V button of the scrollbar the screen scrolls up down by one line If touch A button the screen scrolls up down by one screen 5 If touch a file name the touched file name is selected and inverted Refer to the following for operation of installation upload property data check Installation oo lt gt this section Upload ee lt gt this section E Property oe lt gt this section Data check lt gt this section Touching x button closes the screen Installation operation BootOS and OS which are written in the A drive Built in CF card can be installed in GOT Install the CF card to which the BootOS or OS to install is written to the GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card lt Section 8 1 CF Card a lh Touch A Built in CF Card for drive Program Data 0S information Select drive selection A Built in CF iN Touching C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM OS information screen Storage file folder display screen DIR GISYS Install is completed Restart now dialog shown left is displayed GOT restarts if touch button Install button starts the install When the installation is completed the 13 2 OS Information 13 9 13 2 4 Operation of OS information UTILI
77. Internal SRAM becomes indefinite possibly disabling data 3 writing If the GOT is left in the status without a battery for 30s or longer format the 2 We D drive Internal SRAM On Zs oa CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 5 Memory Card Format 13 29 13 5 1 Format function of memory card 13 5 3 Format operation of memory card Program data Memory card format belect Drive A Built in CF card D Internal SRAM To format the CF card install the CF card to the GOT first For the CF card installation removal method refer to the following LF Section 8 1 CF Card Touch and select the drive to format by Select Drive Program data Memory card format Iftouch button the password input Please input password screen is displayed 4 l 0 BEES Eee Type 1I 1I 11 1 and touch the Enter key Caution If execute format operation all data The dialog box shown on the left will on the CF card will be initialized appear The password is fixed to 1111 Please do not remove CF card while formatting Confirm the contents of the dialog Format the CF card When execute the CF card format touch OK button When cancel the CF card format touch Cancel button OK Cancel If touch OK button by the dialog mentioned left is displayed for reconfirm F
78. OFF or z reset the GOT while the CF card access 5 card is lit 5 Zz O on 50 ZWE 828 After the installation is finished the dialog install te conplet d box shown on the left is displayed Restart now Touch the LOK button to reboot the GOT 5 25a After confirming that GOT restarted zZ normally switch OFF the CF card access bik N switch of GOT Confirm the CF card access LED is D o extinguished remove the CF card from the 2x4 CF card interface of GOT Mera xiL oak oto Q lt z 5 a gt wa TO zz D a O na 7 ng O oO Zz O 59 2S 25 ings 3a a al Sa te Wye ooz zZzeEoQ OOQ EOQ Bae 265 Eaz 258 Zon 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card 16 7 16 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 1 Boot OS installation When the Boot OS is installed the GOT compares the version of the current Boot OS and the version of the Boot OS to be installed When the major version of the Boot OS to be installed is older than that of the current Boot OS the following warning dialogs will appear to prevent an accidental overwriting When installing from drawing software follow the messages that appear on the PC screen a When only the Boot OS is stored on the CF card A message will appear to indicate that the installation cannot be proceeded Boot OS has been al
79. Q bus serial interface GT1150 QLBDA 5 7 320 x 240 dots STN monochrome liquid crystal monochrome black white 16 scales 24VDC memory size 3MB built in battery built in A bus serial interface 2 2 Component List 2 4 2 2 1 GOT GT11 UL cUL Ie OVERVIEW Zz T w iL Z O SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND PART NAME EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 PLC connection cable Sold separately Product name Model name Cable length Contents FXCPU GT01 C10R4 8P 1m direct connection GT01 C30R4 8P 3m bl For connecting FXCPU MINI DIN 8 pins and cable GOT FX GT01 C100R4 8P 10m For connecting FXCPU expansion board MINI expansion DIN 8 pins and GOT board GT01 C200R4 8P 20m connection cable GT01 C300R4 8P 30m ORAIN GT01 C30R4 25P 3m RS 422 FXCPU Cable qe For connecting QnA ACPU Motion controller irec F connection GT01 C100R4 25P 10m CPU A series FXCPU D sub 25 pins and GOT cable I TE For connecting FA CNV O CBL and GOT link i GT01 C200R4 25P 20m For connecting serial communication unit i AJ71QC24 N R4 and GOT connection able GT01 C300R4 25P 30m Computer GT09 C30R4 6C 3m link GT09 C100R4 6C 10m For connecting computer link unit serial connection GTO09 C200R4 6C 20m communication unit and GOT CEH GT09 C300R4 6C 30m QCPU dire
80. STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 7 GOT data package acquisition 13 35 13 7 4 GOT data package acquisition operation Notes on copying operations 1 Copying the OS Project data to the GOT When the OS or project data are copied to the memory card using the GOT data package acquisition function and then to the GOT the utility settings will also be copied After copying the OS and project data to the GOT check the utility settings and reconfigure the settings as necessary 2 Storage of other data on the CF card When using the GOT data package acquisition function do not store any other data to the memory card Other data on the memory card will become unusable 13 36 13 7 GOT data package acquisition 13 7 4 GOT data package acquisition operation 14 GOT SELF CHECK DEBUG amp SELF CHECK Zz The GOT can display the screen for debugging or self checking 2 The following describes the functions available as the debugging and self checking function i 2 Items Contents Reference page ke Debug System monitor A list editor and FX list editor 14 1 2 Self check Memory check Drawing check Font check Touch panel check and I O check 14 112 System alarm GOT errors CPU errors 14 128 display GOT start time Time when the GOT was started 14 130 Su See 2YE 14 1 Debu an p g 020 14 1 1 Debug functions 2 gt The debug function includes functions for the PLC system status check and t
81. Section 6 1 6 5 7 1 8 1 2 8 3 10 1 3 11 2 1 13 1 3 16 4 18 3 Appendix 1 Appendix 2 Partial revisions ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ABOUT MANUALS Appendix 4 Additions Section 2 2 Chapter 3 Section 4 2 Chapter 5 Section 6 1 6 5 7 1 8 1 8 3 8 4 10 1 11 2 1 13 1 14 7 16 4 Appendix 1 Nov 2007 JY997D17501 Jan 2008 JY997D17501 Partial revisions ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ABOUT MANUALS Section 8 3 14 9 Appendix 4 Additions Chapter 2 Section 3 3 4 2 Chapter 5 Section 6 1 7 1 10 1 The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Oct 2008 JY997D17501 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ABOUT Mar 2009 JY997D17501 MANUALS Section 3 1 3 2 3 3 8 8 10 2 Appendix 4 Jul 2009 JY997D17501 Oct 2009 JY997D17501 K ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL Chapter 1 Section 2 2 3 2 4 1 8 3 8 9 Chapter 9 10 11 12 13 14 16 17 18 Appendix 2 Additions Section 14 2 14 3 14 4 N Partial revisions SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL Chapter 2 3 Section 4 2 8 4 17 4 Appendix 1 Appendix 4 Additions Section 8 9 8 10 Apr 2010 JY997D17501 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS Chapter 1 2 3 5 8 14 16 17 Index Oct 2010 JY997D17501 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS HOW TO READ T
82. Start Time Start Time 07 21 2006 FRI 15 35 22 Current Time 07 21 2006 FRI 16 12 09 Operating hours Oh 36m 45s 14 130 14 12 GOT Start Time 14 12 1 GOT start time function 14 12 3 Display of GOT start time Item Start Time self check Start time GOT Start Time Start Time 07 21 2006 FRI 15 35 22 07 21 2006 FRI 16 12 09 Current Time Operating hours Oh 36m 45s Description Displays the time when the GOT was powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change Current Time Displays the current time Operating hours Point Ro a Remark a Displays operating hours of the GOT The displayed operating hours is the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change When powering off or reset restarting the GOT the operating hours is cleared To display correct time Set the clock of GOT gt Section 12 1 Time Setting and Display When the clock has not been set the correct time is not displayed at Start Time and Current Time Time displayed at Operating hours Operating hours is displayed irrespective of Start Time and Current Time When changing the clock of the GOT Operating hours does not match with the difference between Current Time and Start Time Operating hours is not the time calculated from Current Time and Start Time The time displayed at O
83. States and other countries Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated Pentium and Celeron are a registered trademarks of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Co Ltd in the United States MODBUS is a trademark of Schneider Electric SA Other company and product names herein may be either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL GOT1io00 GT11 User s Manual MODEL GT11 U E OnE 09R815 JY997D17501R MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Effective April 2015 Specifications are subject to change without notice
84. System alarm display 30 5 No Error screen Zy lt 18 ERROR MESSAGE AND gzu SYSTEM ALARM Q 25a Debug self check System alarm disp x EO SSS ARE Touch the Reset button to reset system azz W GOT error Reset N alarms n 307 Monitor device not set 15 42 49 CPU error 6 z No Error EEn WEG Li2 Sok oth al Z Point P 1 Before resetting System Alarm display z mo Eliminate each cause before resetting system alarms D Without eliminating causes System Alarm display cannot be reset even when i touching the Reset button x 2 Processings with reset operation The following data in the system information are also reset e GOT error code Write device e GOT error detection signal System Signal 2 1 b13 x W pa oO L Ww N a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 11 System Alarm Display 14 129 14 11 3 Operating the system alarm display 14 12 GOT Start Time 14 12 1 GOT start time function GOT start time is the function to display the following date and time e Start time of GOT e Current time of GOT e Operating hours of GOT 14 12 2 Display operation of GOT start time Main menu Debug amp self check L gt 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Communication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display Ee Program data control SS Touch Debug amp self check GOT start time self check Start time GOT
85. UL cUL OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM amp n Zz lt G my O wW a n STANDARDS AND PART NAME EMC DIRECTIVE INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 PART NAME 4 1 Front Panel No Name 1 Display screen 2 Touch key Specifications Displays the utility screen and the user creation screen For operating the touch switches in the utility screen and the user creation screen 3 USB interface USB environmental protection cover USB interface for connecting a personal computer OS installation project data download transparent Opens Closes when the USB interface is used 5 POWER LED Lit in green Power is correctly supplied Lit in orange Screen saving Blinking in orange green Blown backlight bulb Not lit Power is not supplied For the PC connection refer to the following K7 GT Designer2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 4 1 4 1 Front Panel 4 2 Back Panel A m r Remark Connecting the back panel ce a gt For the connection to the controller PLC microcomputer board bar code reader RFID etc or PC refer to the following C gt GOT 1000 Series Connection Manual 2 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD gt Ww e Hardware version BZ GT1155 QTBD A nO
86. Use Data transmission and storage Option function For mounting the option function board 1ch board 1 1 Necessity of mounting the option function board may offer depending on the hardware version Refer to the following for details lt L 3 Section 8 3 Option Function Board 2 Set the terminating resistor selector switch of the GOT in accordance with the connection type when adopting GOT multidrop connection For details of GOT multidrop connection refer to the following cs Section 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 3 6 3 3 Built in Interface Specifications e GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Specifications i GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA em GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA a GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA i QCPU Q mode motion controller CPU Q 2 series ich B Use PLC communication us QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A 6 series ich ra Use PLC communication fi 2 RS232 1ch 26 Transmission speed 115 200 57 600 38 400 19 200 9 600 4 800bps Built in RS 232 Connecter type D sub 9 pin male 3 Interface Use Barcode reader RFID connection PC communication project A data upload download OS installation transparent function 5 USB Full Speed 12Mbps device 1ch lt TE Connector type Mini B E Use PC communication project data upload download OS im installation transparent function PCMCIA compact flash slot ich CF card
87. V 01 02 01 or before gt When the GOT power in turned OFF the setting may return to the factory shipped default when the GOT power turned on next time If the power is turned off due to power failure or others install the OS or download the project data again W O lt ne we Zy T o Xz wick X lt lt lt When GOT standard monitor OS is V 01 02 02 or later gt Even if the power is turned off during the start up GOT operates in the condition that the OS and project data before the power OFF are stored when turning the GOT power on APPENDICES 18 5 2 Communication from drawing software to the GOT Drawing software cannot communicate with the GOT while Booting is displayed on the GOT screen Booting is displayed on the GOT screen under the following conditions e Right after turning on the power to the GOT e When rebooting after transferring OSs and project data e When rebooting after changing the settings on the utility screen When the communication with GOT is attempted communication errors will occur on drawing software Carry out the communication after Booting project data is displayed on the GOT screen It may take time to start the communication between the GOT and the controller depending on the type of controllers GOT starts the communication with drawing software after the communication with the controller has been established 18 5 Starting GOT 18 11 18 5 1 Power Off APPENDICES
88. When the CPU has detected the error stop running of the operation After resetting the CPU check the command around the error Write the correct command For check of the error step refer to 14 3 27 Command setting error The command set at the time of read write or insert is not correct Set the correct command Memory protect Capacity over When writing in the Write or the Insert Delete mode the memory protect switch in the memory cassette is ON Memory assignment set in the parameter exceeded the capacity of the memory cassette Turn OFF the memory protect switch in the memory cassette Set the parameter within the capacity of the memory cassette No END command There is no END command Write the END command at the last step of the program PLC communication error When the list editor function is started proper communication with the PLC is not made Restart the list editor function If communication is not made properly check the following 1 GOT main unit 2 Connection of the cable 3 CPU main unit if any error has occurred PLC COMM ERROR PLEASE CLOSE When the editor for MELSEC A is started proper communication with the CPU is not made Close and restart the editor for MELSEC A If communication is not made properly check the following 1 GOT main unit 2 Connection of the cable 3 CPU main unit PC write error Correct writing was not made in t
89. a list of instructions that start with the specified character and allows the user to choose from them Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Moves the selected part of the program to a specified part of the program Copies the selected part of the program to a specified part of the program Displays a comment for the specified device Delete D Deletes a program at the specified step Deletes the specified block in the program Deletes all NOP instructions found in program codes described before the END instruction NOPLF instructions will not be deleted Displays a comment for the specified device Parameter P Clears all parameters in the ACPU only Sets or changes various parameters like those for the memory capacity timer counter and latching range Sets or changes a keyword Others O Changes values set to timer counter devices Displays details of an error in the ACPU and the associated step number Checks duplex coils instruction codes and other elements in the program With regard to a special function unit of the specified I O number monitors the contents of the buffer memory at the specified address Monitors the ACPU clock D9025 through D9027 Clears all contents of the ACPU memory and resets it to the initial state Clears the program Main Sub currently selected Clears all device memories exce
90. alarm Refer to the following for details of the battery status display by the utility screen Chapter 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY By using system alarm the message that notifies the battery voltage has decreased can be displayed at the battery voltage low on the screen of the GOT APPENDICES Section 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions System alarm 500 Warning Built in battery voltage is low Refer to the following for details of the system alarm display L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Point f Battery replacement timing When detecting voltage low replace the battery immediately Data can be saved for approximately a month after the battery voltage low detection and cannot be saved after that If it exceeds a month from the voltage low detection to battery replacement the clock data or D drive Internal SRAM data may become indefinite Adjust the clock and format the D drive Internal SRAM 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 17 4 QO Hint Example of alarm output to external device lamp buzzer etc a 2 s The following describes an example of outputting the battery voltage low signal from a FX series PLC to an external device with system information Condition The Write Device is D20 and all data is used the Sele
91. and GO finally SET Lo hER Hisehi khi s hco 14 56 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 6 Operation methods 14 3 7 Display format of the display area The following describes the position and content of each data field in the MELSEC A list editor display area Current mode display Valid key display eee ii ors Us Ges ie ed ies ase ee et es Step number device name and number Program list etc The 4th line displays data program name device name etc entered by the user 1 Mode and valid key display The following describes the mode and valid key display The mode display shows the MELSEC A list editor mode selected by the user The valid key display shows which of the two functions assigned to each key is currently available the function indicated at the upper part of the key or the function indicated at the lower part of the key Current mode display Display Mode Rosts Read mode W cetceeeecawivcks Write mode I eceuseaveseaswaceces Insert mode D ceavvcasceuacuces Delete mode Pianos Parameter mode 0 E Other mode Valid key display This display is not always available With regard to keys framed in dotted lines in the figure i shown at the left the valid key display indicates which SHIFT were petete SET of the two functions assigned to each key is valid B TO D inc F PARAM eter A aele o
92. as shown below xX Displayed position of cursor etNo O ST FF CPUNo 0 7 16b 0 32b 1 0 Keyboard displayed when the cursor is placed on the device name x No O ST FF CPUNo 0 DEVICE D TD 16b 0 32b 1 0 118 9 AT BI 4l5 6 0 SOE SERS Keyboard displayed when the cursor is placed on the device number If necessary enter numbers or characters from the keyboard Del key Used to delete a character of the entered information e AC key Used to delete all characters under the cursor The a w keys without a description do not function Entry is completed by touching the Enter key The keyboard closes by touching the key 14 18 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 6 Key window setting columns and operation procedure 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display E m This subsection describes how to switch the display format and comment no comment display gt The Entry Monitor window is taken here as an example to describe the specification of a monitor station and a monitor device when the system monitor function is executed The procedure for switching the display format DEC HEX and comment display when another item is selected Example of switching when the entry monitor is selected Switching the display format from DEC to HEX Tu Switching no comment display to comment displa
93. be adjusted by 16 levels Contrast settin eee GT1155 QTBQ GT1155 QTBDQ and GT1155 QTBDA excluded 11 2 2 Display operation of brightness contrast Main menu GOT setup Display L Section 9 3 Utility Display creen save time Screen save backlight Brightness contrast Brightness contrast GOT setup Brightness contrast Touch to adjust the brightness Touch to adjust the contrast a Remark Display immediately after the power is turned ON di es N On the Booting window displayed immediately after the power is turned ON the contrast set value set in the factory before shipment is displayed On the Booting project data window and later after that the contrast set value set in the utility is reflected and the value displayed immediately after the power is turned ON changes 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 8 11 2 1 Brightness contrast adjustment function z O e O Z S5 m pa ol gt z e Su 50 Z See zk O5 w 020 m Zz Ser gt 42 Qik Day AON CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 11 2 3 Brightness adjustment operation 11 9 Brightness setting 0 ast setting With do not push OK button if
94. button closes the dialog If the data check fails the target file may be broken Install the target file again For details of installation refer to the following L gt Chapter 16 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 3 Project Information z O e O FA 13 3 1 Function of project information 2 z The project data files stored in each drive A Built in CF card C Flash memory can be displayed by lists gt In addition the files can be downloaded uploaded deleted or copied etc Function Contents Reference page z Information display of files and 2 Displays the kind name data size the creation date and time of the file or folder 13 14 13 15 x folders en 42 Delete Deletes project data 13 16 Zy awe Copy Copies project data Enabled to copy only from the A drive to the A drive 13 17 95i A Displays the project data creation date author name and the version of drawing Property display 13 18 software Data check Data check of the file can be executed 13 19 Q Downloads the project data written in the A drive Built in CF card to C drive Flash zz Download 13 20 qO E memory zsz Uploads the project data written in the C drive Flash memory to the A drive Built in male Upload 13 22 oon CF card n P i 9 z 13 3 2 Display operation of project information Eza HUA Ree na ee Main menu Program Data control gez C g
95. captive area size for each m 3 video channel the color tone contrast O x O Settings j X brightness and color intensity e RGB Display Setting of the RGB clock phase hori gt zontal screen position and vertical O x O Settings J screen position Selecting base clock O O O E Displaying the present time of the clock O O x Time display and setting 4 Setting the present time of the clock O O x Displaying battery status O O x Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function O Applicable x Not Applicable Not required a aw 3 GT Soft Drawing Z Setting items Function GT15 COT 00 GT11 Setting Bo Installing OS O x O x T O Uploading OS O x O x zo OS information Displaying the properties of OS Type O x O x version date System file OS data check O x O x m lt Downloading project file O x O x ae W Uploading project file x O xX on on Deleting project file O x O x Zoe Seas MEE Project information Copying project file A drive A drive O x O x Displaying the properties of project file O x O x Date version screen title Project file data check O x O x i Deleting alarm log file O x O x z Copying alarm log file O x O x a G1A gt CSV conversion Conversion of _ Alarm information O x x x g alarm file from G1A to CSV S G1A TXT conversion Conversion of O x x
96. changed settings 1 When connecting with an external device which does not have clock function 2 3 If set to Adjust or Broadcast for Clock setting while the GOT is connected with external devices PLC or microcomputers which do not have clock function the clock data will not be adjusted Refer to the following for the list of PLC installed with clock function L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual for GT Works3 Mitsubishi Products Non Mitsubishi Products1 Non Mitsubishi Products 2 Microcomputer MODBUS Products Peripherals Clock setting and battery If Broadcast or None is selected for Clock setting the battery status of the GOT is required to be normal Refer to GOT internal battery voltage status to check the battery status Operation setting by drawing software Carry out the setting of clock setting in GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designer2 When using GT Designer3 execute the settings at GOT Setup of GOT Environmental Setting To change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting at the display setting of GOT L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 3 Clock setting operations Clock display Carry out the display and setting of GOT clock data When setting the clock data chan
97. check If the touched part is not filled with yellow color there are the following two possible causes 1 Display part failure 2 Touch panel failure In that case contact your nearest sales office or FA Center 14 9 Touch Panel Check 14 123 14 9 1 Touch panel check function UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Pe FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa 1S L m a a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 9 3 Touch panel check operations Touching Touch panel check of Self check displays the screen explaining the touch panel check operation Touch the OK button to start the touch panel check E Touch a part of the screen E The touched part becomes a yellow filled display If not displayed in yellow even when touched the display part may be faulty In this case contact your nearest sales office or FA Center 41 For a monochrome 16 scale GOT the part is displayed with a subtracted yellow color l Black filled screen If touch the upper left part returns to the Self check screen Upper left touch position Remark Checking the upper left part of the screen Only the upper left part of the screen cannot be filled with yellow If returns to the Self check screen by touching the up
98. commands 9 x A O 14 4 9 i D Subsection Deleting commands xX x x O 5 14 4 11 0 Subsection Sequence program all clear q prog x x x O 14 4 12 6 Subsection PLC diagnostics 1 L5 7 O O a O 14 4 13 On On Subsection z Parameter settin I x i x O 14 4 14 ng oa 1 When the 2nd keyword is set to an FX PLC that supports 2nd keyword it becomes X cannot be used 2 The names within the parentheses are for when a keyword 2nd keyword is set CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 107 14 4 15 Keywords Operation gt Keyword setup gt Select Keyword setup with 4 or v lt Parameter setting Keyword setup List Monitor o AOI x The keyword of MELSEC FX is operated Regist Delete Clear Protect Keyword screen and protection level When Keyword setup is selected with the MELSEC FX list editor the keyword screen is displayed Refer to the following manual for the procedure for keyword operations lt 3 Subsection 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Q Remark Keywords Refer to the following manual for details of keyword lt gt Programming manual for the FX PLC used 14 108 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 15 Keywords 14 4 16 List monitor The status of contacts and coils in a sequence program is displayed Operation gt List Monitor gt
99. delete or edit these folders and files since the GOT uses them If the folders or files are deleted or edited the GOT will not function normally 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 2 Data type and storage location 13 1 3 OS version confirmation Confirm the OS version carefully when install BootOS and Standard monitor OS When OS is installed GOT checks and compares the OS version automatically 1 2 3 When install BootOS When the BootOS to be installed has the older major version GOT displays the installation disapproving message to cancel the installation so that the older version may not be written Even when the version of the BootOS to be installed has the same or later version the version information and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed When installing from the standard CF card the dialog is displayed by the main unit When installing from drawing software via USB or RS 232 the dialog is displayed by the drawing software When install Standard monitor OS communication driver Option OS When Standard monitor OS communication driver or Option OS has already been installed the version information of the OS which has been installed and the dialog for selecting continue not continue will be displayed Moreover when the different versions will coexist among all OSs Standard monitor OS communication driver and Option OS by installing OS the installation disapproving dialog will
100. gt GO gt GO eae Delete a command from the Delete a command from the gt age program program gt 4 gt rly Q Display the program HELP 1 gt 1 gt Specify the 7 Delete the specified range of Specify the range of the in the Delete mode deletion start step amp the program program for deletion L GO gt Specify the deletion gt GO D a end step mM mE Delete the whole NOP in th i Delete the whole NOP elete the whole inthe Display the program gt HELP gt 1 gt 2 4 program in the Delete mode lt O W E uw W 9 O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 75 14 3 24 Operation in insert mode I 14 3 26 Operation in parameter mode P Details Purpose Return the parameters to the Procedures key input sequence
101. is lit in orange NO System Information YES function System Signal 1 is set NO YES GOT POWER LED blinks in orange green NO The possible cause is a GOT hardware fault Turn on the power supply of GOT Backlight OFF during screen saving is set The setting of screen saving can be set in the GOT utility menu 1 The bit of Forced Screen Saver Enable Signal may be ON Confirm the bit status When ON set the bit to OFF 2 Backlight bulb is blown To replace the backlight contact your nearest sales office or FA Center Please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center explaining a detailed description of the problem 1 For utility menu refer to the following lt 3 Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 2 For the details of the forced screen saver enable signal refer to the following is GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 18 4 Troubleshooting for Monitoring 18 5 Starting GOT a ZA lt Lu Sz 18 5 1 Power Off s2 io bu 25 Do not turn the GOT power OFF during the start up right after turning the GOT power on or during the Sz restart up after transferring each OS or project data and changing the setting on the utility screen 1 When Booting or Booting project data is displayed on the screen GOT is in start up mode or restart up mode lt When GOT standard monitor OS is
102. like it has changed Please note that it is due to its characteristic Please note that the response time brightness and color of the liquid crystal display panel may vary depending on the usage environmental temperature e When the same screen is displayed for a long time an incidental color or partial discoloration is generated on the screen due to heat damage and it may not disappear To prevent the heat damage the screen saver function is effective For details on the screen saver function refer to the following KE Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP Using the GOT Backlight OFF function can prolong the life of the backlight For details on the Backlight OFF function refer to the following KE Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP ROM in which new data can be written without deleting the written data Compliant with IP67 when the USB environmental protection cover is attached Not compliant when a USB cable is connected Note that this does not guarantee all user s operation environment In addition the product may not be used in environments under exposition of oil or chemicals for a long period of time or in environments filled with oil mist 3 2 Performance Specifications 3 3 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM oO 7 Z O E q S m O w a 7 PART NAME STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION e GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT
103. main menu For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual of the GOT to be used Touch the special function switch Refer to the following manual for how to set the special function switch GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Functions When no keyword is registered in the connected FX PLC When a keyword is registered in the connected FX PLC Enter the keyword 3 Subsection 14 4 15 Keywords The MELSEC FxX list editor is started Point 1 How to display the utility __ For how to display the utility refer to the following Section 9 3 Utility Display 2 If the project data has not been downloaded The MELSEC FX list editor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the GOT 14 88 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 4 Display Change screens This section describes how to change the screen Start Utility Main Menu or user created monitor screen OWIOMDTIFWM lt lt lt lt Z ONDA WN Error message Detail 1 0 configuration error 1010 PC HPP communication error 6201 Parameter setting Keyword setup List Monitor 5 OUT Y 010 6 OUT Y 020 7 OUT Y 030 8 LDI Y 010 9 MOV K Memory capacity 8K Parameter File reg capacity O block i gt setting Latch range M 500 M1023 C
104. model names of the protection sheet or the replacement procedure L Section 8 5 Protective Sheet 17 2 Periodic Inspection Yearly or half yearly inspection items The following inspection should also be performed when equipment has been moved or modified or the wiring changed No Inspection Item Inspection Method Criterion Action Ambient Display section 0 to 50 C Make measurement F f temperature With thermometer or Other portions 0 to 55 C For use in control panel Surrounding temperature inside control 1 i Ambient hygrometer environment ia F 10 to 90 RH panel is ambient humidit Measure corrosive y gas temperature Atmosphere No corrosive gas 24VDC Measure 2 Power supply voltage check voltage across 20 4 to 26 4VDC Change supply power terminals Looseness Move module Should be mounted firmly Retighten screws See T No dirt forei tt status irt foreign Visual check orein Oreg maner Remove clean matter sticking Loose 7 terminal Retighten SErEWS Wit Not loose Retighten terminal screws screwdriver screws 4 Connection Proximate status solderless Visual check Proper intervals Correct terminals Loose Visual cheek Not io s Retighten connector fixing connectors screws Check the system Replace with new battery alarm error code 500 report on the when the current battery 5 Battery Preventive maintenance has reached the specified Alarm Information
105. monochrome 16 scales the colors are reduced to the 16 scale monochrome ee This section describes with an example using GT1155 256 colors Missing bit Color Check By touching the upper right part of the screen the entire screen color changes in the following order blue black red purple gt green light blue yellow white Check missing bit and color visually Light blue Yellow To 2 Basic figure check screen If touch the upper right part of the screen at the final color white screen the following 2 Basic figure check screen is displayed 2 Basic figure check Check whether there is no shape transformation of basic figure or display losses The basic figure drawn has 4 types 1 Filled circle 2 Line 3 Rectangle 4 Ellipse To a Pattern 1 of Move check among screens 14 118 14 7 Drawing Check 14 7 3 Display and operation of drawing check Move check among screens Zz Q a Pattern 1 Shape transformation color check T The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals 5 If the shape and color white yellow light blue green purple red blue black are displayed E visually in order it is normal For GT1150 monochrome 16 scales each color is subtracted to monochrome 16 scale 6 Zo LZ Bite A Q ZZ og iB eee 8 Pattern 1 Zza DES vee oP b Pattern 2 Shape transformation color check Ze The dr
106. object does not exist or The part file does not exist out of range Create the part file and download to GOT Station No for monitor device is 321 Check the monitor target station No of the project data wrong 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 18 3 ey MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION uw O lt ne we Zy o Xz wc X lt lt APPENDICES Error Error message Action code The monitored device No is set out of the permissible range of the targeted PLC CPU or the data length for a device dedicated to 32 bits is een set other than 32 bits Dedicated device is out of range Sa 322 1 Set the device within the range that can be monitored by the monitored Confirm device range PLC CPU and parameter settings 2 AB L device S7 200 HC device OMPON temperature controller Set the data length of CO C1 and C3 devices to 32 bits Available memory of the memory card is insufficient Insufficient memory media Check the available memory of the memory card on the Drive Information 330 capacity of drawing software Confirm M card capacity lt 3 GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals The memory card is uninstalled or access switch is OFF in drive Memory card not installed or M j 331 1 Install the memory card in the specified drive CARD switched OFF i 2 Tur
107. of the PLC CPU In this case because the faulty module may not be identified use only an END instruction for the sequence program and remove the modules one by one until the error does not occur When the error is eliminated after a specific module has been removed the module may be causing the error 2 An error occurs after a specific operation or several seconds The error may occur in the sequence program Check the error step where the error may occur and the sequence program in that step The sequence program can be diagnosed throughout by merely using an END instruction for the sequence program 3 An error occurs when a specific device operates The mis operation may be caused by noise Check that any signal line such as bus cable is not laid out too close to the operating device If the line is too close to the device separate the line 100 mm or more from the device a Locating the module where an error occurs Based on the PLC CPU error codes and special resister information locate a specific module where an error occurs By the method stated above correct the sequence program or replace the faulty module with a new one and check whether the error occurs If the error continues to occur it may have another cause Referring to 18 3 2 Further locating error positions locate the error position further 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 18 7 18 3 1 Locating error positions m MAINTENANCE AND INSP
108. of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 4 12 1 3 Clock setting operations z O Z 5 ms gt E e 3 z O Su 50 Z See zk e O5 w O20 Q Zz Soe Ss Fe mja Mow AON N ONE rae FEA meo DEA xng Sok oss Omn FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK OK Cance GOT internal battery voltage status Displays battery voltage status Display Normal Low None Touching the OK button reflects the settings and restarts updating the clock display Then the settings are reflected to both clock data on the GOT and controller 4 If touch X button the GOT restarts if the clock settings is changed or the screen closes if clock settings is not changed If touch X button without touching OK button the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed button Status Normal Low voltage When the battery voltage is low replace the battery immediately Refer to the following for battery replacement procedure Section 8 4 Battery 12 5 12 1 Time
109. party PLC connection cable ceeee 2 3 Time setting and display cceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 12 1 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting in bus connection 18 7 U USB environmental protection cover 8 11 Utility function liSt cc2sccieccneeiiiieeiiedieeeetitaaeeeees 9 2 W WINING oietan a a a EE 7 1 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gra
110. project data will be deleted Do you want to install Z A 50 Se 2YE OK Cancel Sein zW Oso lt The GOT screen that appears when the Boot OS was installed from the CF card gt Touching the OK button will start the installation Q Touching the Cancel button will stop the installation 28x asz 2 Standard monitor OS installation Boe Match the version of each OS file when installing Standard monitor OS BOO Standard monitor OS cannot be installed if the version of each OS file does not match When the installation process is discontinued When the installation process is normally executed 2 y Standard monitor OS r 1 O O Standard monitor OS 2 O O a W Communication driver l 2 l O O Communication driver 2 O O BEA n Option OS L24 O O Option OS 2 O O ae t OSs Oxun Please match the number 2 lt z a 2 Sis Point gt Checking method of BootOS Standard monitor OS version ie TO 1 Check the version of BootOS or Standard monitor OS installed in GOT at OS information of the utility Refer to the following for details 5 W a lt Section 13 2 OS Information A al 2 Check the version of BootOS installed in GOT at product shipment on the rating D plate on GOT rear face 3 a GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Zz When the Boot OS version is 2 digits aE GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL only the lower digit is printed og MODEL GT1155 QSBD oY IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX 25 a Example H W version H wis
111. the CF card into the memory card Type Il Install the memory card adaptor to a PC equipped with a PCMCIA interface to write the OS or project data on the CF card from the PC or load alarm history data from the CF card to the PC Refer to the following for the details related to CF card lt Section 8 1 CF Card 8 2 1 Applicable memory card adaptor The following memory card adaptor is applicable Model Contents GT05 MEM ADPC Adaptor converting from CF card to memory card Type II 8 2 2 Installing procedure of the CF card into a memory card adaptor Fit the CF card in the memory card adaptor Lf LL Lf CF card Memory card adaptor 8 4 8 2 Memory Card Adaptor 8 2 1 Applicable memory card adaptor 8 3 Option Function Board GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD 7 To use the optional functions the option function board is necessary i For GT11 with hardware version C or later option function can be used without mounting the option function board Refer to the following for the functions requiring the option function board fe K gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual lt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual o i Point gt Checking method of hardware version Confirm the hardware version with the products rating plate z O GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL 9 MODEL GT1155 QSBD ee IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX SIN 540
112. the cursor to the position to write the command When starting to write a command place the cursor on the command line the line on which the step number is displayed You cannot write a command with the cursor on an operand or set value line Command line Place the cursor on this line Operand set value line Cannot operate on this line 2 Example a Writing ORB command lt READ gt gt Set the lt WRITE WRITE or L INSERT mode With 4 or F move the cursor to the position to overwrite insert the command 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 97 14 4 9 Writing commands UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF b Inputting LD X000 Set the m a lt WRITE gt WRITE or L INSERT mode With 4 or i move the cursor to the position to overwrite insert the command c Inputting OUT T100 K19 lt READ gt en Set the lt WRITE gt WRITE or S INSERT mode m with a or v move the cursor to the position to overwrite insert the command 14 98 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 9 Writing commands Writing applied instructions 1 Operations i For overwr
113. the property of the project data in the selected folder onto 2 Property If touch Property button after selecting the uthor g F Drawing S W version GT Designer Versio project data to display the property the Title Screen property is displayed as shown left B 15 Operation B 16 Display Seraen In property display the following B 32767 Operation information is displayed Item Contents Date Displays the creation date of the file Author Displays the author of the project data Drawing Displays name and version of the drawing S W software by which the project data is version created If touch A button the screen scrolls up down line by line If touch 4 button the screen scrolls up down by one screen If touch X button the property display is closed and returned to the previous screen 13 18 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Data check operation z Carrys out data check of the selected project file S ms gt When dataiis normal Touch the button after Data rriat selecting the file for data check 5 The data check is executed and the result is displayed by the dialog shown left Z O 2 If touch OK button the dialog is closed ae 539 sre A If Data error is displayed the target file may be broken When gataiis erroneous Download the target file again 7 ZZ Dat
114. the same resulting in an unintended operation of the PLC CPU Su E zya SE 2 Sequence program change O20 Stop the FX PLC before changing writing inserting deleting a sequence program or changing parameters Operation is not possible with the FX PLC running 2 gt LON zzz 3 If you press the GO key but the system does not proceed to the next operation for example a ZME search BIO Check the input contents applied instruction number device value etc 8 2 gt 5 4 When using list monitor ERS Only devices to be used for basic instructions can be monitored pRa x The status of devices word bit to be used for application instructions cannot be monitored eae 0f5 Q lt z 5 A 4 T 1 x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 87 14 4 3 Precautions 14 4 4 Display Outline until the start This subsection describes an outline until the MELSEC FX list editor screen is displayed after List editor for MELSEC FX Option OS is installed in the GOT Start l Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from the special function Starting from the switch MELSEC FX list editor utility set in the project data Display the utility a After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check Debug MELSEC FX List editor from the
115. the upper right of the screen starts the font check The character data of the installed font stored in the flash memory can be displayed on the screen one by one to confirm the font drawings visually Before execute font check Upper left touch position jh Upper right touch position Font data mY yy 14 122 14 8 Font Check 14 8 3 Font check operation Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during Font check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen The installed font data is displayed by touching the upper right part of the screen 14 9 Touch Panel Check 14 9 1 Touch panel check function Touch panel check is a function which checks whether there is no dead zone area in touch key minimum unit 16 dots x 16 dots 14 9 2 Display operation of touch panel check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check lt Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Debug amp self check Memory check m Display check Touch panel check Q self check Touch panel check Touch Debug amp Self check Starting the touch panel check Touching Touch panel check in the Self check displays the screen describing the touch panel check operation Touch the button in the description screen to start the touch panel check Point P Notes on Touch panel
116. to control equipment If communication errors happen in synch with the on off signals from certain control equipment referred to as load hereafter such as no fuse breakers electromagnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and induction motors surge noise interference is suspected If this problem happens keep the ground cable and communication cable away from the load If that is not possible an installation of a surge killer will help reduce noise interference Place the surge killer as close to the load as possible Remedy for AC inductive load Keep the ground cable and communication cable away from each other AC Output equipment such as PLC output unit L Load Place the surge killer near the load Remedy for DC inductive load Keep the ground cable and communication cable away from each other L Load DC Output equipment such as PLC output unit Place the surge killer near the load 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 7 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM PART NAME SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL es INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 7 2 4 Wiring the FG wire of the BUS cable To connect the QCPU motion controller CPU Q series and GOT The cable for connection to the QCPU motion controller CPU Q series does not have a FG wire that needs to be grounded To connect QnACPU ACPU
117. to the following manual L gt GT Designer 2 VersionD Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer 3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 When Communication Settings has not been downloaded using drawing software GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD only When Communication Settings has not been downloaded the GOT automatically assigns the installed communication driver as the RS422 interface When multiple communication drivers are installed the GOT automatically assigns the first installed communication driver to the RS422 interface To assign the communication driver to the RS 232 interface or to change the already assigned communication driver change the settings in the Communication Settings of the utility screen or in the Communication Settings of drawing software On the unit that only allows a bus connection the installed bus communication driver is assigned to the bus interface a After automatic assignment If the OK button is clicked to store the settings in the GOT after automatic assignment the automatic assignment will not be executed from the next startup b Priority of Communication Settings of drawing software When Communication Settings is downloaded to the GOT from drawing software after automatic assignment the GOT will operate according to the Communication Settings of drawing software 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 3 Description of communication setting s
118. user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user or third person by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major acciden
119. using CF card 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on When the GOT is turned on all the OS and project data stored in the memory card are transferred to the GOT This installation method is valid for the following cases e When the utility of GOT cannot be displayed e When the standard monitor OS is not installed e To create a GOT with the same configuration as the copy source by using the GOT data package acquisition function 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility By the operation of the utility the OS and project data stored in the memory card are selected and transferred to GOT Point gt Notes on installing the Boot OS and Standard monitor OS 1 Installing both the Boot OS and Standard monitor OS Install the Boot OS first and then install the Standard monitor OS When the Boot OS is installed the built in flash memory on the GOT becomes initialized to the factory setting All OSs and project data will be deleted The Boot OS comes factory installed Installation of the Boot OS is not necessary unless upgrading the Boot OS version 2 Copying the project data using the CF card Download the project data after installing the Boot OS Standard monitor OS and other OSs Make sure that the version of the Standard monitor OS on the GOT and that of the Standard monitor OS that created the project data match 3 When the OS and project data are on the CF card When drawing software is i
120. whether to execute or not the parity check Parity during communication When executing set the Odd Even None lt Default Odd gt type of the parity check Init AT command Modem operation Set the AT command for initialize the modem Touch the Init button to initialize the modem Touch the Cut button to disconnect the line 2 Keyword settings of MELSEC FX On the communication detail setting screen of MELSEC FX registration deletion cancellation or protection of the keyword for FX series PLC can be executed MELSEC FX 10 10 Communication Detail setting MELSEC Fx Transmission Speed Keyword 38400 BPS lt Default AT amp FE0 C0 amp K0 amp DOW2S0 1 gt Regist Delete Clear Protect Default 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings OK Regist Keyword is registered Touching the Regist key displays the selection screen for the registration For a FX PLC that is not compatible with the customer keyword the keyboard for the keyword input of is displayed Select Keyword or Keyword and Customer keyword an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 When the Enter key is touched the selection is completed and the keyboard for the keyword input is displayed Q Registration Selection Keyword Keyword and Customer keyword aE fe lt O Zz 8 qu LZ x
121. with EMC Directive Programmable logic controllers are open type devices that must be installed and used within conductive control boxes Please use the Multi Drop Connection Unit while installed in conductive shielded control boxes Please secure the control box lid to the control box for conduction Installation within a control box greatly affects the safety of the system and aids in shielding noise from the Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 18 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 9 4 Installation 8 10 Connector Conversion Adapter GT10 9PT5S type connector conversion adapter enables an easy crossover wiring for the multi drop conncted GOTs gt For the wiring between the connector conversion adapter and the controller refer to the following manual m O L GOT1000 Series Connection Manual N Zz S Point 5 o 1 GOTs supporting the connector conversion adapter Eig The followings are the GOTs compatible with the connector conversion adapter ons GOT Hardware version GT1155 QTBD Hardware version C or later GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Hardware version F or later 2 2 Checking method of hardware version S Confirm the hardware version with the products rating plate 9 fol N GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX 4 E Pan lt x S N 540001 BC BC 2 Hardware version a MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN 8 10 1 Applicable connector c
122. write protect keyword is set oe protected 3 Subsection 14 4 15 Keywords Ze PLC parameter error An FX PLC parameter is defective Set correct parameters in the FX PLC Check the FX PLC cable and GOT for abnormality a The communication with the FX PLC is A PLC communications error d A Check whether the communication settings are correct lt efective gt or not T D i A writing operation etc has been made ray PLC is running Stop the FX PLC ii while the FX PLC is running we The memory to write to is EPROM Set other than EPROM for the memory to write to 1 x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 Point gt How to erase an error message An error message is not erased even if the cause of the error is eliminated To erase an error message touch a key on the MELSEC FX list editor screen CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 17 Action for an incorrect key input 14 414 14 5 Self Check 14 5 1 Self check function Carries out self check for the GOT hardware or memory etc The items that can be self checked are as follows Items Contents Carries out write read check of the Built in CF card Flash memory and Internal Reference page Memory check SRAM 14 113 Password 5920 fixed Drawing Check Carries out missing bit check color check and drawing check 14 117 Font check Displays the character dat
123. x 12 1 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions ine PE A Set the Clock settings 02 01 2005 12 34 56 THU and Time settings 12 1 3 Clock setting operations Clock setting Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT data and the clock data of PLC CPU connected with GOT Setting Contents Adjust Adjust the time of GOT clock data to the clock data of PLC CPU Same as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 Same as setting in GOT Setup in GOT Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 L7 GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Broadcast Adjust the time of PLC CPU clock data to the clock data of GOT Same as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 Same as setting in GOT Setup in GOT Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 L3 GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Adjust Broadcast Adjust and Broadcast can be used appropriately Same as setting in GOT setup in System Environment of GT Designer2 Same as setting in GOT Setup in GOT Environmental Setting of GT Designer3 GT Desi
124. zuk K 020 Setting contents are defined if OK button 11 is touched 2z With do not push OK button If OK button z touched without touching seg if you close the screen the changed X button the dialogue box shown on the aie Ng will be canceled left is displayed Qo OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen DO is closed 2x4 KWo Cancel Cancel button The operation setting pRa screen is displayed E otb 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens with X button after completing the setting of all items to change GOT z restarts and reflects the setting contents z 5 a gt a Security setting 29 Refer to the following for the security setting operation C gt Section 11 4 Security Level Change 3 D a on O Utility call key 2 Refer to the following for the utility call key operation K oO lt Section 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting Zz fe S 2S 25 ag oa S Sog OQ gag E nosa 28H 11 3 Operation Settings 11 12 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation Key sensitivity setting 11 13 Security setting Utility call key Key sensitivity Max 8 Key reaction speed Standar d 0 ms 11 3 Operation Settings 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation The keyboard is displayed if setting item is touched Enter the numerical value from the keyboard The key reaction speed according to the key sensitivity setting is displayed 4 Setting cont
125. 0 E P a i C i Unit mm inch le 152 5 99 y Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 2 External dimensional diagrams of GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA and GT1150 QLBDA k 167 6 57 e 28 5 110 4 33 1 12 21 0 83 m Va K ai S tS SS om DS SS om ne wal Cc ao N C3 E N mM ite Co bl laei ec Z 4 40UNC gt A ES Inch screw type om cS om k D I perce D ie 3 TE EL 110 4 33 Panel board thickness to be 5 mm 0 2 or less iig i C Fy luni pea App 3 Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensions of memory board A 37 0 1 46 a1 6 1 0 25 Unit mm inch z CI os 28 o 1 olN Za C RS 3 lu External dimensions of stand z GT05 50STAND a x es For angle of 75 zoe eal Wee A Fa o N Jg fo ro gt tf O 5 W Q y lt _193 6 05 5 26000 24 Y e 220 8 67 Unit mm inch A9GT 50STAND For angle of 75 A Lo E gt v a Jg LO N O SA O y 156 6 15 J 262 10 32 i 220 8 67 Unit mm inch Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 4
126. 0 8 10 2 1 Communication detail settings FUNCTIONS icenaren eni aLa AEE 10 8 10 2 2 Communication detail settings display Operation ec ceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeseenaaes 10 8 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SETUP Jirgena l A TO 11 16 11 1 Display eNOS xscticiss case aceasstncecttedespenapeusiatechseca te a a a Aaaa RENE 11 1 TEEI Depay soting CUNS ees e A ESEE E 11 1 11 1 2 Display operation of display Setting seserims niesna aeee e EEEE EEEE 11 3 11 1 3 Display seting OPeCratlOns eecccenensenii iii an 11 4 11 2 Brightness Contrast AQIUSUMNG IM isicccncnsinctsndcnsndeacsaseincsinctnnncdcotesinntiitaacetancielbinsbeene 11 8 11 2 1 Brightness contrast adjustment FUNCTION 0 ec ee cee enter iiine an E 11 8 11 2 2 Display operation of brightness CONtrASE ee cence eeeete eter eeeaee eee eeeaaeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeiaeeeeeeeaas 11 8 11 2 3 Brightness adjustment Operation ccc eee eee eeeecee i a E E 11 9 11 3 Operation Settings 1c 6645 6 55555 Geto acenececaiodesacexaenececate case detecencdeadinigusenedieaetecteniaadiad 11 10 11 3 1 Operation Setting TUNCHIONS assener diaceedbesjaccans ad egaead a A 11 10 11 3 2 Display operation of operation Setting cccceceecceceeceeeeeeeececeeceeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeecencausaeeeeeeeeeeneees 11 11 11 3 3 Setting operation Of operation 2 2 2 0 cccccecceeeeeeceeeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeetesececaecaeceeeeeeseeseesee
127. 0 Q GT1275 GT1275 V Abbreviation of GT1275 VNBA GT1275 VNBD GT1265 GT1265 V Abbreviation of GT1265 VNBA GT1265 VNBD GT12 Abbreviation of GT1275 GT1265 GT1155 Q Abbreviation of GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 Q Abbreviation of GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GT1150 QLBD GT11 Abbreviation of GT1150 GT11 Handy GOT GT1055 Q Abbreviation of GT1055 QSBD ina GT1050 Q Abbreviation of GT1050 QBBD GT1045 Q Abbreviation of GT1045 QSBD a GT1040 Q Abbreviation of GT1040 QBBD Abbreviation of GT1030 LBD GT1030 LBD2 GT1030 LBL GT1030 LBDW GT1030 LBDW2 GT1030 LBLW GT1030 LWD GT1030 LWD2 GT1030 LWL GT1030 LWDW GT1030 LWDW2 GT1030 GT1030 LWLW GT1030 HBD GT1030 HBD2 GT1030 HBL GT1030 HBDW GT1030 HBDW2 GT1030 HBLW GT1030 HWD GT1030 HWD2 GT1030 HWL GT1030 HWDW GT1030 HWDW2 GT1030 HWLW Abbreviation of GT1020 LBD GT1020 LBD2 GT1020 LBL GT1020 LBDW GT1020 LBDW2 GT1020 GT1020 LBLW GT1020 LWD GT1020LWD2 GT1020 LWL GT1020 LWDW GT1020 LWDW2 GT1020 LWLW GT10 Abbreviation of GT1050 GT1040 GT1030 GT1020 Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT16 Handy GT1665HS V_ Abbreviation of GT1665HS VTBD Handy GOT GOT1000 Series GOT GT11 GT1155HS Q Abbreviation of GT1155HS QSBD Handy GOT GT1150HS Q Abbreviation of GT1150HS QLBD GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT1000 GOT900 Series Abbreviation of GOT A900 series GOT
128. 001 BC BC l Hardware version MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN A 80M1 IND CONT EQ C 3 c US LISTED g GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA H The above models of GOTs have built in option functions and do not require the option function board lt 2 ao l para 8 3 1 Applicable option function board 385 lt Sb The table below shows the type of option function board that can be used with GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD Model Contents Z GT11 50FNB Option function board z z e 8 3 2 Part names 2 Groove for reverse installation protection Connector for connecting GOT Lever for removal Groove for reverse installation protection 8 3 Option Function Board 8 5 8 3 1 Applicable option function board 8 3 3 How to install or remove the option function board Installing Dummy cover 1 Turn the GOT power off Rise the lever on the dummy cover with a fingernail as shown in the figure on the right Pinch the lever with fingers and pull up it vertically to remove the dummy cover 4 Install the option function board to the option function board connector on the back panel of the GOT Push down the option function board by approximately 0 5mm with fingers along the groove for reverse installation protection Cross sectional view with option function board installed Push down by J N 3 approx
129. 03 information Paj Alarm infgrmation 5 Memory card Formal Alarm information Program Data Alarm information Belect drive A Built in CF card C Flash Memory Program Data control Alarm information Select a drive and operate alarm log file Internal SRAM 13 4 Alarm Information 13 23 13 4 1 Function of alarm information UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS a Se NaN Py AND BATTERY 89 STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information Alarm information screen Program Data Alarm information A Built in CF card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Number Item 1 Select drive Alarm information Storage file folder display screen Program Data Alarm information Contents The drive of which file or folder is displayed can be selected When the CF card is not installed A Built in CF card is not displayed Indicates whether the displayed name is file or folder Drive size 2 ome In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR Displays the file name or folder name held by the selected drive or folder 3 Name When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding cha
130. 1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Specifications Item GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA a N STN monochrome black Type TFT color liquid crystal Color liquid crystal S white liquid crystal Screen size 5 7 Resolution 320 x 240 dots Display size W115 4 53 x H86 3 39 mm inch Horizontal format Display character 16 dot standard font 20 characters x 15 lines 12 dot standard font 26 characters x 20 lines Horizontal format i Monochrome black white Display Display color 256 colors 4 Left right 70 degrees Top Left right 55 degrees Top Left right 45 degrees Top Display angle 70 degrees Bottom 50 65 degrees Bottom 70 20 degrees Bottom 40 degrees Horizontal format degrees Horizontal format degrees Horizontal format Contrast adjustment 16 level adjustment Intensity of LCD 400 cd m 380 cd m 220 cd m only Adjustable in 8 levels Adjustable in 8 levels Adjustable in 8 levels Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment Life Approx 50 000 h at operating ambient temperature of 25 C Cold cathode fluorescent tube irreplaceable by the user backlight detection function is Backlight included Backlight screen saving time can be set Approx 54 000 hours or longer The time takes to Approx 75 000 hours or longer The time takes to i reduce to
131. 14 2 8 Subsection 14 2 7 4 When the GOT is connected to an FXCPU zZ O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable 2 Function Connection type between GOT and controller 2 Reference 5 Name Description Direct CPU connection GOT multidrop connection 5 Ent Monitori t values by enteri n ry mn oring present val T y entering A Siibeecion14 2 40 a monitor devices to be monitored in advance 5 Batch monitor Monitoring mg present value of n A t Subsection 14 2 14 devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value set value TC monitor contact point and coil of m devices O Subsection 14 2 17 5 from a specified device gE Ow Monitoring the present value of x Zoo BM monitor devices in specified buffer memory of a O Subsection 14 2 21 S42 specified intelligent function module zur zZ Setting Resetting bit devices A o o Changing the present value of word 3 x Data devices and buffer memory A change by test Changing the present value of TC Subsection 14 2 24 operation possible during TC monitoring O oF Changing the set value of TC possible Seg during TC monitoring O ggZ Changing device values by performing our Quick test a quick test A Subsection 14 2 8 oon Displaying device comments x Display switching Displaying word device and buffer Subsection 14 2 7 D memory values in decimal or A O z hexadecimal Zza nee 1 Set value of T C and contact coil
132. 15 13 4 Alarm Information sw cacsssissden diss detec cwmiecaceds Aadadebndanateadacscecadsitel utes dadidenalaliitactnaiascahentcetel 13 23 13 4 1 Function of alarim INPORMALION sssccecsensheccucasedicedcasseecdendenstauanndnnedeccccesddiweancedad bvaanda aa aaia iaai 13 23 13 4 2 The display operation of alarm information c ceceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeececeaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeenaaes 13 23 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information c cecceececcecceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenneaeceeeeeeeeeeeeteesensesaeens 13 24 13 4 4 Alarm information operation iseasi aniisi aaa AEA EEA AEA 13 25 13 5 Memory Card Format accasteecepsetecdecatcectace es Sses es secccecetedebteet ceeceegin ecg ee rreren nnen 13 29 13 5 1 Format function Of MOMOPY Card c cece eeeencceeeeeeeceeeeeeeaceeeeseenaeeeeseenaceeeeeseneseeeneaneeeeeenaaes 13 29 13 5 2 Display operation of memory Card format eeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeees 13 29 13 5 3 Format operation Of memory CAM cece etter terete ee eee ne eee eeeeee EEE 13 30 13 6 Memory UU UN ea Oscars eee ate eee eee 13 31 13 6 1 Memory Information FUNCOM ssena Heese cceed cenedeevs duedaceedetedceccneh A 13 31 13 6 2 Memory information display Operation cece eeeeee eee eenteee eee tienes EEE EES 13 31 13 6 3 Display example of memory information cccce eect ee eeceeee eee eeee eee eneeeeeeteeeeeeetneeeeeee 13 32 13 7 GOT data pa
133. 2 6 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Ie OVERVIEW Zz T ea U Zz Q S SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Product name Model name Cable length Description GT15 C07BS 0 7m GT15 C12BS 1 2m GT15 C30BS 3m Long inter GOT f i GT15 C50BS 5m For interconnecting GOTs connection cable GT15 C100BS 10m GT15 C200BS 20m GT15 C300BS 30m AOJ2HCPU For connecting the power supply unit AOJ2 s GT15 J2C10B 1m connection cable PW to GOT ay Can be used as a GT15 CLEXSS 1 when Buffer circuit cable GT15 EXCNB 0 5m used in combination with GT15 CLBS Connection cables for OMRON PLCs Sold separately Product Ta Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R40101 9P 3m GT09 C100R40101 9P 10m For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC serial communication GT09 C200R40101 9P 20m module serial communication board GT09 C300R40101 9P 30m GT09 C30R40102 9P 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40102 9P 10m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit cable GT09 C200R40102 9P 20m communication board GT09 C300R40102 9P 30m GT09 C30R40103 5T 3m GT09 C100R40103 5T 10m For connecting GOT to serial communication board GT09 C200R40103 5T 20m GT09 C300R40103 5T 30m For connecting GOT to OMRON PLC serial communication GT09 C30R20101 9P 3m Sas os RS 232 module communic
134. 232 Q Built in Q bus piia A Built in A bus Blank Built in RS 422 be OVERVIEW Power type A 100 to 240VAC 24VDC 5VDC Panel color type ra T w iL Z O SYSTEM Black White TFT color High intensity wide angle view TFT color STN color STN monochrome black and white STN monochrome blue and white STN monochrome black and white high contrast Display device type SPECIFICATIONS Resolution 1024 X 768 XGA 800 X 600 SVGA 640 x 480 VCA 320 X 240 QVGA lank less than 320 x 240 o lt ox rorwoz Tso ee Display color type 65535 256 colors 16 colors Monochrome black and white 16 scales PART NAME gt 15 0 12 1 10 4 8 4 6 7 gt 4 7 gt 4 5 3 7 GOT 1000 series GT15 GT11 GT10 1 For GT15 that can display 65536 colors refer to following L3 GT15 User s Manual Screen size type STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL NOURA OONO ONO Ww INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Explanation of the option model name GTt 2 ttet 90 15 0 80 12 1 75 Common for 10 4 8 4 70 Dedicated for 10 4 60 Dedicated for 8 4 50 Dedicated for 5 7 40 Dedicated for 4 7 30 Dedicated for 4 5 20 Dedicated for 3 7 15 Dedicated for GT15 11 Dedicated for GT11 10 Dedicated for GT10 09 05 Common for GT15 GT11 1 01
135. 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 18 Using the help function 14 71 UTILITY FUNCTION INTERFACE COMMUNICATION SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 3 19 PLC memory all clear When input of a keyword is requested all parameters and sequence programs can be cleared together with the keyword registered in the ACPU using the operation below Operation example Display the keyword input request KEYWORD 2 Stop operation of ACPU Set the target ACPU to the stop status Operation of PC memory all clear Input ALLCLR and press the GO key 4 Display of PC memory all clear process When the GOT starts clearing the process the display in the left appears column and the total number of bytes change sequentially ALL CLEAR wan maximum 10 per process is displayed according to the memory capacity to be cleared As the clearing process proceeds each is deleted One shows 10 of memory capacity The memory capacity total number of bytes to be cleared is displayed in kbytes As the clearing process proceeds 1 kbyte is decreased Completion of PC memory all clear process When the GOT completes the clearing process the screen i
136. 3 Was Drawing software for GOT1000 series O indicates the version 6 The is assigned with an integer 2 or more PC connection cable Sold separately Product name Model name Cable length Description For connecting GOT D sub 9 pin female GT01 C30R2 9S 3m and PC D sub 9 pin female Project dat For connecting GOT D sub 9 pin female lea GT01 C30R2 25P 3m ah transfer cable and PC D sub 25 pin male GT01 C20USB 5P 2m For connecting GOT USB mini and PC GT09 C30USB 5P 3m USB 7 Connector shape on the cable is shown in Bar code reader Sold separately Product name Model name Contents Bar code reader Commercially available bar code reader 8 8 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available or contact your local distributor RFID controller Sold separately Product name Contents RFID controller Poe Commercially available RFID controller 9 For connectable RFID controllers and system equipment refer to the following Technical bulletin gt List of valid devices applicable for GOT 1000 series T10 0039 Serial multi drop connection unit Sold separately Product name Contents Serial multi drop i GT01 RS4 M For GOT multi drop connection connection unit Connector conversion adapte
137. 30000 1181 1 GT01 C O00 R4 8P 16 50 1 97 L 40 1 58 013 fo 625 x 33 052 a O 0 99 1 3 3m oo 0 24 EJ gD tech bot ESE Z _ o lt M2 6 Value of OOO Length L mm inch 10 1000 39 37 30 3000 118 11 100 10000 393 7 200 20000 787 4 300 30000 1181 1 Appendix 1 External Dimensions App 6 GT01 C30R2 25P 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 53 2 09 a 501 97 1181 1 2 09 0 63 uuu ae y aaj lt 4 40UNC 35 1 38 O nnannnnnnn J M2 6 gt GT01 C30R2 9S K 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 50 1 97 0 63 yn a DD U E lt 4 40UNC 4 40UNC gt P 35 1 38 35 1 38 GT01 C30R2 6P 50 1 97 30000 1181 1 Je 4001 58 i e 0 52 0000 16 4 35 1 38 lt 4 40UNC App 7 Appendix 1 External Dimensions External dimensions of bus connection cable connector Cable model Cable length m ft External dimensions GT15 QCOB 0 6 2 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 10 33 Fig 1 GT15 QCOBS 15 49 20 66 25 82 30 98 35 120 Fig 1 GT15 CONB 1 2 3 9 3 10 5 20 Fig 2 GT15 ACOB 0 6 2
138. 50 of the Life 2 reduce to 50 of the backlight luminance at the operating backlight luminance at the ambient temperature of 25 C i operating ambient temperature of 25 C Number of touch i kevs 300 keys screen Matrix of 15 lines x 20 columns y Kev si Touch ey Minimum 16 x 16 dots per key Maximum panel simultaneous key Maximum of 2 points presses Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max C drive 3 Flash memory Internal for storing project data 3Mbytes and OS Life Number of n Memory ae 100 000 times write times D drive SRAM internal 512kbytes battery backup Battery GT11 50BAT lithium battery Backup target Clock data alarm history recipe data and time action setting value Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Environmental protective structure 4 Equivalent to IP67f JEM1030 front section when the USB environmental protective cover is attached Horizontal format External dimensions W167 6 58 x H135 5 32 x D65 2 56 mm inch Excluding USB environmental protective cover Horizontal format Panel cutting dimensions W153 6 03 x H121 4 77 mm inch Horizontal format 3 2 Performance Specifications Item Weight Specifications GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA 0 9kg Excluding mounting fixtures Compatible soft
139. 9 C300R40401 7T 30m For connecting GOT to HITACHI PLC intelligent serial port RS 232 GT09 C30R21101 6P 3m module cable GT09 C30R21103 3T 3m For connecting GOT to HITACHI PLC Connection cables for HITACHI PLCs Sold separately Product Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R41301 9S 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R41301 9S 10m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to HITACHI PLC cable GT09 C200R41301 9S 20m GT09 C300R41301 9S 30m RS 232 For connecting Connector Conversion Box to HITACHI GT09 C30R21301 9S 3m fe ae cable communication module Connection cables for FUJI FA PLCs Sold separately Product re Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R41001 9S 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R41001 9S 10m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to FUJI FA RS cable GT09 C200R41001 9S 20m j 232C interface card RS 232C 485 interface capsule GT09 C300R41001 9S 30m general purpose interface module RS 232 GT09 C30R21003 25P 3m cable Connection cables for Panasonic Electric Works PLCs Sold separately Product name RS 232 cable 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Model name Cable length Description For connecting GOT to Panasonic Electric Works RS422 GT09 C30R20901 25P 3m i 232C conversion adapter For connecting GOT to the tool port or RS232C port of GT09 C30R20902 9P 3m Panasonic Electric Works PLC computer communication unit For c
140. AME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 5 3 2 Connection of power and ground wires Ground and power supply wires for the GOT must be connected as described below a Provide an earthing point near the GOT Earth the power supply s FG terminal FG Frame Ground with the thickest and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30cm 11 18inch or shorter The FG terminal function is to pass the noise generated in the GOT to the ground so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured As the wires are used to relieve the noise the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna Note A long conductor will become a more efficient antenna at high frequency 3 Electrical shock prevention In order to such as the operators from electric shocks the control box must have the following functions a The control cabinet must be equipped with a lock so that only skilled or qualified personnel b The control cabinet must be fitted with advice which automatically stops the power supply when the cabinet is opened 4 Dustproof and waterproof features The control box also has the dustproof and waterproof functions Insufficient dustproof and waterproof features lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction The insulation in our GOT is designed to cope with the pollution level 2 so use in an environment with pollut
141. AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 4 10 Changing operands set values Changes the operand section of an applied instruction and OUT T C command set value Operation Read mode 1 For decimal numbers input K then the number For hexadecimal numbers input H then the number Point gt Moving the cursor to the line on which the operand or set value is to be changed When starting to change an operand or a set value place the cursor on the line of the operand or set value to be changed the line on which the step number is not displayed If you place the cursor on the command line the input operation is not possible Command line Cannot operate on this line Operand set value line Place the cursor on this line Example Changing MOV DO D10 to MOV DO D123 Set the lt WRITE gt WRITE S mode Move the cursor to the changed location with 4 Jor 14 100 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 10 Changing operands set values 14 4 11 Deleting commands Zz e Deletes one command at a time from a sequence program 2 ms i Z Operation 2 gt Siig FPLC MODE gt iove tis cursor he commando be dageti DELETE mode z a ant j a Zgo gt When movin
142. ARD RS 232 gt PC and external INPUT device connection O 24vDc cables i i FG PAF A RS 422 F q co EX C e a Ul VF M malt ail i Grounding __ 24VDC 100Q or less _ power supply al E GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA PLC connection cable 1 BUS PC barcode RFID connection cable AA Woe Ce HE i EEE EE E i TI J mm al 24VDC SI Class D grounding power supply A A class 3 grounding 7 2 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 1 1 Wiring example Make sure to carry out the followings for grounding e Carry out the independent grounding if possible e If the independent grounding is impossible carry out the shared grounding as shown in fig 2 below Other Other Other GOT device device device Grounding Gr
143. C HEX or comment no ORM comment display 3 Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display All g Switches the screen to the Device entry screen SET RST Displays the screen for bit device on off operation SET VAL Displays the Set value operation screen for T timers and C counters Displays the Present value operation screen for word devices VALUE 16 Data range 16 bit one word module Displays the Present value operation screen for word devices VALUE 32 Data range 32 bit two word module Displays the Present value operation screen for buffer memory BM VAL 16 Data range 16 bit one word module Displays the Present value operation screen for buffer memory BM VAL 32 Data range 32 bit two word module CANCEL Terminates the test menu screen and displays each monitor screen 14 42 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 26 Information displayed on the test menu screen and key functions 14 2 27 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen The information and set items on the setting key window screen to be used for each test are described below 1 Information displayed on each setting key window screen SET RST Screen for bit device on off operation Set value operation screen for timers and counters VALUE 16 VALUE 32 Pre
144. C300R40601 15P 30m O GT09 C30R40602 15P 3m a RS 422 GT09 C100R40602 15P 10m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC cable GT09 C200R40602 15P 20m GT09 C300R40602 15P 30m GT09 C30R40603 6T 3m m GT09 C100R40603 6T 10m For connecting GOT to SHARP link unit GT09 C200R40603 6T 20m k a GT09 C300R40603 6T 30m RS 232 GT09 C30R20601 15P 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC cable GT09 C30R20602 15P 3m For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC om lt Connection cables for TOSHIBA PLCs Sold separately ag x Og o Product ne ifs Model name Cable length Description ou name GT09 C30R40501 15P 3m GT09 C100R40501 15P 10m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC z GT09 C200R40501 15P 20m 2 lt GT09 C300R40501 15P 30m 2 GT09 C30R40502 6C 3m 2 RS 422 GT09 C100R40502 6C 10m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC cable GT09 C200R40502 6C 20m GT09 C300R40502 6C 30m GT09 C30R40503 15P 3m GT09 C100R40503 15P 10m 9 For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC Z GT09 C200R40503 15P 20m GT09 C300R40503 15P 30m RS 232 GT09 C30R20501 9P 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC cable GT09 C30R20502 15P 3m For connecting GOT to TOSHIBA PLC Zz a 2 2 Component List 2 8 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Connection cables for HITACHI PLCs Sold separately Product ne Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R40401 7T 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R40401 7T 10m For connecting GOT to HITACHI intelligent serial port module cable GT09 C200R40401 7T 20m GT0
145. CF CF card card in GOT Refer to the following for the installation which uses drawing software NS Yo GOT e Installed directly from the drawing software e When GOT is remote installed easily using the CF card Install OS from GOT to GOT using CF card K gt GT Designer2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Refer to the following for the installation which uses GOT Chapter 16 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 9 1 9 1 Utility Execution 9 2 Utility Function List The items in the following list can be set operated on the utility screens Zz QO u gt Item Functions overview Setting of channel number for the communication interface and assignment of communication driver 5 Setting of communication parameter z 5 r oO g D Sequence program protection key word setting When FX series PLC is connected E gt Sequence program protection key word deleting When FX series PLC is zo E D Detail settings q prog p y g SgS G connected ZYE z aan Sequence program protection status cancel When FX series PLC is connected 020 Sequence program protection status reactivate When FX series PLC is connected Setting of opening screen time Setting of screen saving time Be IOn Setti
146. CF card until the CF card eject button snaps Turn the CF card access switch on After the CF card access switch is turned on the CF card can be used CF card eject button 8 2 8 1 CF Card 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card Removing Set the CF card access switch of the GOT to OFF scoses LED Baia Make sure that the CF card access LED turns off When the CF card access LED turns off the CF card can be installed nee or removed even during the GOT power on Re 420 4 w fo aye 2 J SH iO O qo ACCESS OFF ON CF card GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD 2 Push in the CF card eject button of the GOT to eject the CF card and then remove the CF card CF card eject button Point fP Precautions for removing the CF card 1 While the CF card access LED is on do not install remove the CF card or power off the GOT To do so may cause data corruption or malfunction 2 When ejecting the CF card support it by hand since it may pop out Failure to do so may cause a fall of the CF card leading to failure or damage of the card 8 1 CF Card 8 3 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION fee WIRING OPTION 8 2 Memory Card Adaptor The memory card adaptor is used to convert
147. ChNo O None LiFA device 8 Barcode 9 PC The screen switches to the Communication Detail setting screen Set communication parameters from this screen Refer to the following for the setting change operation lt Section 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Communication Detail setting MELSEC FX Transmission Speed 38400 BPS b Communication parameter Keyword Regist Delete Clear Protect Default OK 10 8 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 1 Communication detail settings functions Point f Communication parameter setting using drawing software 1 Select System Environment Communication Settings from GT Designer2 to enter the communication parameters for each communication driver When using GT Designer3 execute the settings at Controller Setting of Common To change the communication parameter setting after downloading project data change the setting at Communication Detail Setting described in this section For Communication Settings using drawing software refer to the following manual L gt GT Designer 2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer 3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Display items or setting items of communication detail settings depend on the type of communication driver installed in the GOT For the setting contents of each driver refer to the following gt G
148. DQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ D 2 GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA 2 r ny a b Point P Please use the GOT whose hardware version is later than that described Confirm the hardware version with the products rating plate Products that the EMC Directive applies to are marked with the CE mark logo 1 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD 3 Zz ra GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL 5 MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX S N 540001 BC BG Hardware version MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN U 80M1 IND CONT EQ Ag L US LISTED Fu lt Ao ow qX aka 8 E nw 2 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ gt GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA z z 2 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QTBDQ ae DP POWER MAX OOW __ Hardware version SERIAL _0000720 DP00001 A f Conformed standard oO z x z O E 5 2 EMC DIRECTIVE 5 4 5 2 2 System Configuration when EMC Directive is Applicable Connection format Connection conditions where the GT11 is applicable to the EMC Directive are shown below 1 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Connection format CPU direct connection RS 422 Point gt If connecting to a PLC not from this company MELSEC FXa2N series refer to the __ _ manual of the connected device PLC microcomputer for information about the applicability of the EMC Directive 2 GT1155 QTBD
149. Directive for Electromagnetic Compatibility 2004 108 EC when used as directed by the appropriate documentation Type Programmable Controller Open Type Equipment Standard Remark EMI Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard EN61131 2 2007 Radiated Emissions Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Equipment requirement and tests EMS ESD RF electromagnetic field EFTB Surge RF conducted disturbances and Power frequency magnetic field Models MELSEC GOT series products identified here manufactured from April 1st 2005 GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD For this product see note under and over the page Models MELSEC GOT series products identified here manufactured from October 1st 2007 GT1155 QTBD For this product see note under and over the page Standard Remark EMI Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard EN61131 2 2007 Radiated Emissions Programmable controllers Compliance with all relevant aspects of the standard Equipment requirement and tests EMS ESD RF electromagnetic field EFTB Surge RF conducted disturbances and Power frequency magnetic field Models MELSEC GOT series products identified here manufactured from January 7th 2008 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA For this product see note under and over the page Control cabinet The GOT is an open type device de
150. E W Ee W n DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS Selection Details When Keyword is selected Only keyword can be registered CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY When Keyword and Customer Keyword is The Customer Keyword can be registered after registration of the keyword selected 1 For details on FX PLC compatible with customer keyword refer to the following Point FILE DISPLAY AND COPY The customer keyword allows the user to clear the protection set by a keyword However the protection cannot be deleted GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 11 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings 2 When the registration is selected or the Regist key is touched on a PLC not compatible with the customer keyword the keyboard for the keyword input is displayed in a pop up window When the keyword is input and the Enter key is touched registration is completed When Keyword and Customer Keyword is selected on the selection screen for the registration the Customer Keyword entry screen of is displayed For the keyword 8 digits from 0 to 9 or A to F must be set Keyword Please input keyword es Registration conclition 2nd M All Protect Settings Target PLC When keyword and 2nd keyword are registered When only keywor
151. ECTION Ww O lt ne aja Zy T o Xz wick X lt lt APPENDICES 18 3 2 Further locating error positions If the function of the PLC cannot be recovered even when the module on which an error occurs is replaced with a new one the error may be caused by the effect from another module Disconnect the extension cables and bus connection cables in order from the modules starting from the module located furthest from the operating position in the system and check for the status of occurrence of the error each time the cables are disconnected until the error does not occur The module or extension cables bus connection cables disconnected immediately before the error does not occur are considered to cause the error Examples of the ways of further locating error positions are shown below When use the extension base unit QnASCPU Example 1 Example 2 Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Turn off the power of the PLC Disconnect the bus connection cable Disconnect the bus connection cable x IN side from the final stage GOT OUT side from the GOT located one E stage before the final stage yo Turn on the power of the PLC v J 4 Turn on the power of the PLC mT Turn on the pow
152. EEA SN 13 1 13 1 1 Drive name allocation sscsiccwrsss aocccesaehadsgeuenied Addiade shakes cata a a A a a a A a e a aaae 13 1 13 1 2 Data type and storage location ccs cnsrreecerrariiiienrnersnintunniiineeeri aruni ein kaen naea akai REA 13 1 131 3 OS version confirmation arsons aaa EEA a E TA RAA 13 3 T tA Display ilace a E EE 13 5 13 2 0S Informatio aaeeea aa ae aa a aa A EA a a aE ES 13 6 13 2 1 Function Of OS MTOMMALION sisses aA aaaea a a aaa Aaa aaia aS 13 6 13 2 2 Display operation of OS information screen cecceeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeenaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeiaes 13 6 13 2 3 Display example of OS information c cccccccceeceeeeeeeeceeccecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecnaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseesenaeees 13 7 132 4 Operation of OS INTOMMALION easain ioccacan cantanaanmangedaacecanesaeecenraadancanss gadegendesatenmeantaes 13 8 MS SCL INOrmMatlON sssri etches sik cass nda eee eae E e E 13 13 13 3 1 Function of project information ccccccecceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeee eee eneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeieeeeeeeniieeeeerseeeenee 13 13 13 3 2 Display operation of project information ccecceececceececeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeteeseesecsaeaaeeeeess 13 13 13 3 3 Display example of project information cccccceeeceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeceaeaaeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteenaees 13 14 13 3 4 Operation of project information ccccccccccceeceee eee eeeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesedceceaneaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeees 13
153. EN Display specifying the step number Sok Oxun 1 Operation gt tinput the step number 1 gt E eee oe z gt 2 Example S Displaying step number 123 2 W T Step number x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 3 MOV CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION p 3 Hint When the specified step number is the operand of an applied instruction If the specified step number is a timer T or counter C set value or the operand of an applied instruction that command section is displayed at the head CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 93 14 4 7 Sequence program display Display scrolling one screen at a time 1 Operation mo Eo Read mode 2 Example Displaying with scrolling one screen at a time lt WRITE gt lt READ gt Set the READ mode Displaying with scrolling one screen at a time 14 94 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 7 Sequence program display 14 4 8 Searching commands and devices Displays a command or device by searching it in sequence program from Step 0 Command search 1 Operation oa es eee 4 bres nl TOE E AEA e 3 MODE Select the command Input the device name and gt gt 1 to search for 1 device number Read mode bee eee ee ee Hee J 4 If the command you want to search for is not o
154. ET External I O unit GT15 DIO GT15 DIOR Sound output unit GT15 SOUT 1 GT15 CFEX GT15 CFEXIF GT15 CO8CF set w Option Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT05 MEM 16MC GT05 MEM 32MC GT05 MEM 64MC GT05 MEM 128MC CF card GT05 MEM 256MC GT05 MEM 512MC GT05 MEM 1GC GT05 MEM 2GC Memory card GT05 MEM 4GC GT05 MEM 8GC GT05 MEM 16GC SD card L1MEM 2GBSD L1MEM 4GBSD Memory card adaptor GT05 MEM ADPC GT16 MESB GT15 FNB GT15 QFNB GT15 QFNB16M Option function board GT15 QFNB32M GT15 QFNB48M GT11 50FNB GT15 MESB48M Battery GT15 BAT GT11 50BAT GT16 90PSCB GT16 90PSGB GT16 90PSCW GT16 90PSGW GT16 80PSCB GT16 80PSGB GT16 80PSCW GT16 80PSGW GT16 70PSCB GT16 70PSGB GT16 70PSCW GT16 70PSGW For GT16 GT16 60PSCB GT16 60PSGB GT16 60PSCW GT16 60PSGW GT16 50PSCB GT16 50PSGB GT16 50PSCW GT16 50PSGW GT16 90PSCB 012 GT16 80PSCB 012 GT16 70PSCB 012 GT16 60PSCB 012 GT16 50PSCB 012 GT16H 60PSC GT15 90PSCB GT15 90PSGB GT15 90PSCW GT15 90PSGW GT15 80PSCB GT15 80PSGB GT15 80PSCW GT15 80PSGW For GT15 GT15 70PSCB GT15 70PSGB GT15 70PSCW GT15 70PSGW GT15 60PSCB GT15 60PSGB GT15 60PSCW GT15 60PSGW GT15 50PSCB GT15 50PSGB GT15 50PSCW GT15 50PSGW Protective Sheet For GT14 GT14 50PSCB GT14 50PSGB GT14 50PSCW GT14 50PSGW For GT12 GT11 70PSCB GT11 65PSCB For GT11 GT11 50PSCB GT11 50PSGB GT11 50PSCW GT11 50PSGW GT11H 50PSC GT10 50PSCB GT10 50PSGB
155. GT1150 QLBD Debug self check 1 0 check Please select check channel 1 RS422 GRU O RS232 Self 14 10 I O Check 14 125 14 10 17 I O check function UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Dey FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa 1S Wwe Ww op fs ie 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 10 3 I O check operation Target confirmation 14 126 Debug self chech Please select check channel 0 RS232 eae CPU communication check Executing now CPU communication check No error o CPU communication check Error The following cause Connection error H W error parameter setting error ok 14 10 I O Check 14 10 3 I O check operation As a preparatory step for the CPU communication check perform the following items e Installing Communication driver Use drawing software to install e Setting Communication settings Use drawing software to enter and download e Connecting connection device Connect a PLC to the communication interface for which the CPU communication check is applied in order to start the communication Check for the power is on or if any error occurred If touch the cPu button the CPU communication check is carried out After the CPU communication
156. GT1155 QSBD A to D GT1150 QLBD A to C n Zz C 1 2 3 4 P 6 3 pr 15 Battery cover opened Sq la eo a m g Ss CF CARD 9 i D 16E 4 Power supply terminal layout INPUT PART NAME 12 13 3 11 10 3 8 9 SF card cover opened Compatibility with the serial multi drop connection GT1155 QTBD C GT1155 QSBD F GT1150 QLBD F STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL Battery cover opened pal 16 T 000000000000 INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 4 2 Back Panel 4 2 Name RS 232 interface Specifications For communicating with controller PLC microcomputer board bar code reader RFID etc or personal computer OS installation project data download transparent D sub 9 pin male 2 RS 422 interface rr e controller PLC microcomputer board etc 2 Hole for unitinstallation ting _ _ HOS fr the inserting instalation ftings acoessory during the GOT 4 Rating plate nameplate 5 CF card access LED Lit CF card accessed Not lit CF card not accessed Switch for prohibiting access to CF card befo
157. GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD fee Specifications GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Type TFT color liquid crystal STN color liquid crystal gd ae Screen size 5 7 Resolution 320 X 240 dots Display size W115 4 53 x H86 3 39 mm inch Horizontal format Display character 16 dot standard font 20 characters X 15 lines Horizontal format 12 dot standard font 26 characters X 20 lines Horizontal format Display color Monochrome white black 16 256 colors scales Left Right 50 degrees Top 50 degrees Bottom 60 degrees Horizontal format Hardware version A B Left Right 55 degrees Left Right 70 degrees Top Left Right 45 degrees Top Displa Top 65 degrees Bottom 70 pee Display angle 70 degrees Bottom 50 degrees 20 degrees Bottom 40 degrees Horizontal format Horizontal format degrees Horizontal format Hardware version C to K Left Right 50 degrees Top 50 degrees Bottom 70 degrees Horizontal format Hardware version L or earlier Contrast adjustment 16 level adjustment 350 cd m 4 Adjustable in 8 levels 3 400 cd m Hardware version A B 220 cd m Intensity of LCD only Adjustable in 8 levels 380 cd m Adjustable in 8 levels Adjustable in 8 levels Hardware version C or later Intensity adjustment 8 level adjustment Lif Approx 50 000h Time for display intensity to become 1 5 at operatin
158. HIS MANUAL Chapter 2 Section 3 2 Chapter 5 Section 7 1 Chapter 8 Section 9 3 Section 11 3 3 Chapter 13 Section 16 4 Appendix 4 Jan 2011 JY997D17501 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL Section 4 2 6 5 9 3 1 11 5 3 Apr 2011 JY997D17501 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL Section 5 2 8 3 Partial additions ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS Section 3 2 6 2 6 5 11 2 Jun 2013 JY997D17501 Section 3 2 Chapter 5 Section 14 4 Apr 2015 JY997D17501 A part of the cover design is changed Section 2 1 3 3 4 2 Chapter 5 Section 8 9 8 10 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum OUTLINE PRECAUTIONS e This manual provides information for the use of the graphic operation terminal The manual has been written to be used by trained and competent personnel The definition of such a person or persons is as follows 1 Any engineer who is responsible for the planning design and construction of automatic equipment using the product associat
159. II The symbol indicates that batteries need to be disposed of separately from other wastes 17 5 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement 2 Exportation precautions The new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC requires the following when marketing or exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states To print the symbol on batteries devices or their packaging e To explain the symbol in the manuals of the products fa z lt Ww 2 2 i Zz lt INSPECTION a Labelling To market or export batteries and or devices with built in batteries which have no symbol to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later print the symbol shown in 1 on the GOT or their packaging b Explaining the symbol in the manuals To export devices incorporating Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal to EU member states on September 26 2008 or later provide the latest manuals that include the explanation of the symbol If no Mitsubishi manuals or any old manuals without the explanation of the symbol are provided separately attach an explanatory note regarding the symbol to each manual of the devices ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES i Remark The requirements apply to batteries and or devices with built in batteries manufactured before the enforcement date of the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detectio
160. ITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 24 From previous page j Xx O1ST FRI UNo 0 DEC NetNo DEVICEL WJ 200 VL Touch T8191 41 8 al 4 5 6 Cd lt i gt a eh ee O Enter Del AC t eo Ne aa aie N eta The device value of W200 is changed from 43 to 100 Point gt Effective number of digits of device values that can be changed If an entered value exceeds the corresponding number of digits specified below the device value cannot be changed Decimal number 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign Hexadecimal number 16 bit one word module Four digits 32 bit two word module Eight digits 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation z O H This subsection takes the entry monitor as an example to describ
161. In the absence of radiated noise or 20 mm 0 79 20 mm 0 79 20 mm 0 79 or more 20 mm 0 79 heat generating equipment nearby or more or more or more or more z O 1 Vertical Format 50 mm 1 97 or more d 2 Vertical Format 80 mm 3 14 or more a D Z al 4 C D E z k gt gt le M lt Panel thickness 2 to 4mm 0 08 to 0 16inch aah ia O 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions 6 4 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle When mounting the main unit to a control panel or similar fixture set the GOT display section as shown below Horizontal installation When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 55 C the mounting angle should be in the range from 60 to 105 degrees GOT back panel GOT display section Control panel etc The GOT will have a longer lifetime if used within the mounting angles shown above Ideally the temperature inside the control panel should not exceed 0 to 40 C Vertical installation When the temperature inside the control panel is 40 to 50 C the mounting angle should be in the range from 60 to 105 degrees GOT back panel GOT display section Control panel etc e The GOT will have a longer lifetime if used within the mounting angles shown above Ideally the temperature inside the control panel should not exceed 0 to 40 C 6 5 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle 6 5 Installation Procedure
162. Key window setting columns and operation Procedure ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeesieeteeeennaes 14 18 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display 0 ee 14 19 14 2 8 Quick test operation of Monitor AEVICES eee ceceeceeececee cee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeseesieaeeneess 14 21 14 2 9 Changing screens COMMON OpeEratiOn ccc eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaaeeeeseeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeaes 14 25 14 2 10 Entry MONON enirintan e irean EE EENE AREE EA EEEE EE EEE 14 26 14 2 11 Information displayed on the entry monitor screen and key functions eeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeee 14 26 14 2 12 Procedure for entry monitor basic operation essseeeessssesesrnnesesirnnnnesnnnenitnnnnnnnnnnnentdannnnnenna 14 28 14 2 13 Deleting emy deviCeS ena OE Ga eee ee 14 29 14 2 14 Batch MOMMOM css isc cpa iraan TEn EE AAEN E EEA AT aa 14 30 14 2 15 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions 14 30 14 2 16 Procedure for batch monitor basic operation ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseessensiaeeees 14 33 14 2 17 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters s s ssesresinssndrsununserenniatninadeseninannanuninietnnna uniana 14 34 14 2 18 Information displayed on the TC Monitor screen and key functions eee eeeeeeee este eeeeeeeeeee 14 34 14 2 19 Procedure for TC monitor basic Operation cccececcecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeec
163. MELSEC A series EX 2 Programmable A controller GOT units 360mm or less 40mm 40mm 360mm or less Jai 7 14 17inch 1 57inch 1 57inch 14 17inch EX 3 Ferrite Core lt ZCAT3035 1330 oe Programmable controller m p I GOT units GOT units Ground wires 60mm or less or less 280mm 11 0 inch 60mm or less 2 36inch _ 36inch i 2 36inch 360mm or less 40mm 40mm 360mm or less j 14 17inch 1 57inch 1 57inch 14 17inch EX 4 Ferrite Core a ZCAT3035 1330 Se Programmable im eal GOT controller Eg Cin 7 qi units 80mm Bomme Cable shield material 80mm 3 15inch Grounding braided wire 3 15inch 40mm or less 200mm 7 87 inch 40mm or less 1 57inch Grounding ate wire 1 57inch 50mm 1 97 inch 5 2 EMC DIRECTIVE 5 6 5 2 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives Fu lt Ao ow qX aka 8 E nw OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS S971 PART NAME INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION Method to connect the power wire and ground wire 1 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD The GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD unit requires an additional ferrite filter to be attached to the 24V DC power supply cables The filter should be attached in a similar manner as shown in the figure o
164. Manual z GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 z m 14 3 3 Precautions 1 The points of precaution when using MELSEC A list editor are described 1 Reading the MELSEC A list editor by specifying a command The MELSEC A list editor cannot be ready by specifying a dedicated command x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 2 Executing the MELSEC A list editor Execute the MELSEC A list editor when the target PLC is not running It cannot be executed when the PLC is running z 3 Changing sequence programs parameters using another peripheral equipment Sg When using the MELSEC A list editor do not change programs or parameters in the PLC CPU 26 from other peripheral equipment 35 oa If you change programs or parameters either reset the GOT main unit or set the PLC No again If you carelessly change the program on one PLC from multiple units of peripheral equipment including GOT the contents of the program in the PLC CPU and the peripheral equipment may not be the same resulting in an unintended operation of the PLC CPU 4 Writing sequence programs Sequence programs cannot be written when the target CPU is operating EEPROM INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 51 14 3 2 Access range 14 3 4 Display Outline until the start This subsection describes an outline until the system monitor screen is displayed after List ed
165. OM 2GB Commercially available CF card 2 2 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT1000 series T10 0039 separately available or contact your local distributor Memory card adaptor Sold separately GT05 MEM ADPC Option function board Sold separately Option function board GT11 50FNB Option function board 3 Necessity of mounting the option function board may offer depending on the hardware version Refer to the following for details lt 3 Section 8 3 Option Function Board Product name Contents Memory card adaptor CF card to memory card Type II conversion adaptor Contents 2 11 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Stand Sold separately Product name Model name Contents GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 Stand AYGT 50STAND Stand for 5 7 Common to A950GOT ey OVERVIEW Battery Sold separately Product name Model name Contents A For storing clock data alarm history recipe data and time action Battery GT11 50BAT i y setting value 4 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main unit zZ T ea U Zz Q S SYSTEM Bus extension connector box sold separately Product name Model name Contents P Zz Bus extension Used for QCPU Q mode motion control
166. P UNIT DOWN message appears on PLC CPU Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Replace the faulty PLC CPU with a new one Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error occurs further not on PLC CPU Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 2 at IN side to further locate the error positions Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error occurs further not on the GOT 2 bus connection unit Turn off the power of the GOT Turn off the power of the PLC Disconnect the bus connection cable from the GOT 1 at OUT side to further locate the error positions Turn on the power of the PLC Turn on the power of the GOT The error will not occur The bus connection cable connecting the GOT 1 to the GOT 2 is judged faulty Replace the faulty bus connection cable with a new one 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 18 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting 18 9 m MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION W 0 lt ne gi Zy o Xz wick X lt lt APPENDICES 18 4 Troubleshooting for Monitoring This section describes the countermeasures when GOT does not display the monitor screen GOT does not display the screen 18 10 YES POWER LED of GOT is off NO YES GOT POWER LED
167. PrOCECUIE cceeeceeeeenece eee eee eee eeeete cee eaaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseasaaaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesesicieeeeeeeeeeeees 8 19 9 UTILITY FUNCTION 1 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseees 927 tO 9 11 9 1 Utility EXec tUOM eneidiaa teeta Rete dae da i ee Eae aeae Eei 9 1 9 2 Utility FUNCHOM LIS bass ee tecoce Seseettentenaicenensediesenacneustegace e O aiie amene OE 9 2 9 3 Utility Display orete eneren Ae RERE E R 9 4 9 3 1 Display Operation of main MENU sass isiansianis ana a aaa a AEA EE 9 6 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration 00 0 cette rinin ennir ee eee e anieri tees ee taeeee ee saaeeeeeenaaeeeeeseeeiaeeeeeeeaaas 9 9 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings CHANGE esscsecscsninrcssrisici E 9 10 10 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING COMMUNICATION SETTING 10 1 to 10 15 10 1 Communication Setting dca ttscsactcSewent a Geb eae Ste ee tds hedeeniet Deaueiedaekcdemenenaneate 10 1 10 1 1 Communication Setting TUNCTONS 2 iihecee tipeeteececneptesesas oevtatuant A at saseetefetesdtncnepedilulaans 10 1 10 1 2 Communication setting display Operation eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaaeeeeseeeteeeeeeeeas 10 1 10 1 3 Description of communication setting SCreen 0 0 ee ceeeeeeeneeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeeeesenaaes 10 2 10 1 4 Operation of communication Setting e sessin nisin a E E 10 5 10 2 Communication Detail Settings assccccsitecccencccrtanidtectetece dace doncsnnebenedecgentaententiiatnbedide 1
168. Q GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA Connection format Bus connection 5 2 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives Connect and wire GOT equipment as instructed below If the GOT equipment is configured in a way that differs from the following instructions then the system will not comply with EMC directives About the cable used 1 Serial connection cable Any device which utilizes a data communication function is susceptible to the wider effects of local EMC noise Therefore when installing any communication cables care should always be taken with the routing and location of those cables The GOT units identified on the previous page are compliant with the EMC requirement when the following communication cables are used GOT Unit Existing Cables User Made Cables GT1155 QTBD Those cables need to be independently tested by ae A the user to demonstrate EMC compatibility when GT1155 QSBD GT01 C30R4 8P modified h EX 1 Q Oe AR they are used with Mitsubishi GOT unit and FX2N GT1150 QLBD Programmable Controllers EX 1 F Ferrite core GIGI Sen ar Ex NEC TOKIN ESD R 17S or similar le 250mm j E 100mm 9 84inch 3 93inch 7 Q Programmable 4 controller e Jz FOF F 5 GOT units 140mm lt 5 51inch gt Comes equipped Added by user Added by user 5 5 5 2 EMC DIRECTIVE 5 2 3 Wiring Preca
169. Q font screen Built in flash memory C G1SYS TrueType numerical font 12 dot standard font 16 dot standard font Extended function OS Option OS Communication driver Project data User created screen data 1 Project Comment data oles 34 information Built in flash memory C PROJECT1 12 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic screen 16 dot HQ fonts Mincho Gothic TrueType Mincho Gothic Alarm Resource i Internal SRAM D or Standard CF card A Advanced alarm log file CSV file information i data mor With drawing software any folder name or file name can be specified 1 The 6 x 8 dot font 12 dot numerical HQ font 16 dot numerical HQ font are displayed as Standard monitor OS 2 The user created screen data comment data and font data are displayed as project data 3 Each folder is created automatically at installation download and upload of each file 4 The folder name and file name can be set at System Setting in System Environment of GT Designer2 When using GT Designer3 execute the settings by GOT Type Setting in Common GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 5 13 1 4 Display file UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS a Se NaN oy AND BATTERY 89 STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION
170. SEC A List Editor 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions Error message Address error Description In machine language writing the address which was tried to be written was at the write protect area Corrective action Set the correct address No corresponding program The specified command was not found Check the program Memory cassette check In communication with the CPU for clearing the keyword or writing the parameter the memory cassette is insufficient or not mounted 1 Mount the memory cassette properly 2 Replace the memory cassette with a new one Step over error The set step number is larger than the maximum step number Set the correct step number Setting error Setting value is not correct Set the correct value Not selectable The function which cannot be executed was selected Select other function Operation error The set device symbol is incorrect Perform the correct key operation Device error The specified command was not found The device number exceeds the range 1 Set the correct device symbol 2 Set the number within the range of CPU device Identical coil The identical coil is found in the sequence program Proceed to the next operation if it does not affect the control Correct the program if it affects the control Command error When the program is read it cannot be converted to the proper command
171. SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF Error using list editor function on the link system When the MELSEC A list editor is used on the link system the PLC communication error may appear In this case check the error details and the corrective actions Error No Error message Corrective action 2 Time out error No response to the request Check the cable wiring Process cancel 4 New process request was given to the list editor function while Perform correct key operations on the GOT the CPU is processing F Sum check error There may be noise interference A sum check error from the link communication has occurred Check the system again 16 PLC No error Check the PLC number setting There is no station corresponding to the PLC number Set the correct number 19 This error may occur when the ACPU is reset during monitoring Perform the monitor setting again Remote error 24 Although remote stop pause is performed from the computer link Perform the remote run stop pause from either unit unit remote run stop is additionally performed 25 Refer to the next page for error messages and actions After confirming the device value explained at the next page with the system monitor function take action Link error 32 While the slave station is monitoring the master station the Perform the monitor setting again master station is reset EEPROM failure i 34 Repl
172. Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 18 1 Error Contents Display This section describes how to identify the error code and system alarm displayed on the monitor screen by the system alarm display function and the reference material 1 Displaying format on monitor screen Displayed in user setting position The system alarm is displayed together with an error code its error message and occurrence time The displayed error code and error message are registered to the GOT in advance and need not to be prepared by the user 335 Memory card battery voltage low Replace battery 16 40 30 104 Parameter error 400 Unable to communicate with CPU Up to 3 lines are displayed 1 line per error Error code Error message Time of occurrence Displayed only for errors related to GOT Display priority The alarm is displayed in the following priority if the displaying range is one or two lines 1 GOT error The error in the GOT is displayed as an alarm 2 CPU error The error in the PLC CPU is displayed as an alarm 3 Network error The error in the network is displayed as an alarm Alarms with smaller priority cannot be displayed if system alarms overflow the displaying range As well the error code error message or time is not displayed if the displayed message overflows each line in the displaying range 18 1 Error Contents Display 18 1 m MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION W O
173. Setting G Zz Ser gt 42 Qi Ooty OOV eee The sensitivity of touch panel when GOT screen is 7 Key sensitivity setting 1t08 2 touched can be set 0 271 1 Relationship between the key sensitivity setting and the key reaction speed fee Ken The relationship between key sensitivity and key reaction speed is shown in the table below eae Decreasing the key sensitivity value will speed up the key reaction speed OZ Increasing the key sensitivity value will slow down the key reaction speed Key reaction speed ms 20 10 Standard 0 10 20 40 80 z KAZAA When the GOT screen recognizes a single touch as two touches decrease the key sensitivity to slow Be down the key reaction speed 26 Point P Operation settings by drawing software Set buzzer volume and window move buzzer volume by GOT setup in System i Environment of GT Designer2 i When using GT Designer3 execute the settings at GOT Setup of GOT D kK Environmental Setting z When change a part of the setting change the setting by the GOT display setting after downloading the project data K gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual i GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals oo gt Za Wo 3a no Or O bgs 5o EQO Se 298 2 SF Zov 11 3 Operation Settings 11 10 11 3 1 Operation setting functions 11 3 2 Display operation of operation setting Main menu GOT setup Section 9 3 U
174. Setting and Display 12 1 3 Clock setting operations The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The time display and setting screen is displayed 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL The display of OS project data or alarm data which is written in the GOT or CF card and the data transmission between GOT and CF card are possible The format of the CF card is also possible 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 1 Drive name allocation For the Built in CF card Flash Memory Internal or Internal SRAM the following drive names A drive C drive and D drive are allocated Drive name Allocation A drive Built in CF card C drive Flash Memory Internal D drive Internal SRAM 13 1 2 Data type and storage location At system startup The data storage location and transferring write read route for each data type are shown below E GOT main unit D drive Internal SRAM Install Download Project data A drive B C drive Flash Memory Internal oO le S Project data Project data O Project data Built in CF card when installed in GOT S Project data 7 oJis v Q O 4 PC GT Designer2 GT Designer3 Project data Write Open a file Project data CLEANING OF Project data Inserting Removing Built in CF card when installed in PC
175. Specifications GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA DC24V 10 15 ripple voltage 200mV or less GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA Fuse built in irreplaceable 1 0A Power consumption 11 16W 465mA 24VDC or less 9 72W 405mA 24VDC or less 7 92W 330mA 24VDC or less With backlight off 5 04W 210mA 24VDC or less Inrush current 26A or less 26 4V 4ms Permissible instantaneous power failure time Within 10ms Noise immunity Noise voltage 500Vp p Noise width 1 us by noise simulator of 25 to 60 Hz noise frequency Dielectric withstand voltage 500VAC for 1 minute across power supply terminals and earth Insulation resistance 10MQ or larger as measured with the 500 VDC insulation resistance tester across power supply terminals and earth Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2 mm2 Applicable solderless terminal Solderless terminal for M3 screw RAV1 25 3 V2 N3A FV2 N3A Applicable tightening torque Terminal block terminal screw EF a Remark Ro 0 5 to 0 8 N m Operation at momentary power failure The GOT continues to operate even when the instantaneous power failure occurs within the permissible instantaneous power failure time The GOT stops operating if there is extended power failure or voltage drop while it automatically resumes operation as soon as the power is restored 3 4 Power Supply Specifications 3 9
176. Step number 7 gt 4 gt SET gt SP gt rly gt Ly 14 3 24 Operation in insert mode I z O 2 Details Purpose Procedures key input sequence T INSERT SET Step number GO Com gt co 2 Insert a command in the Insert a command in the gt mand program program gt 4 rly 6 Display the program gt HELP gt 1 gt 2 gt Specify the movement i in the Insert mode start step on Move the program Move the whole program S29 gt GO gt Specify the movement gt GO gt Specify the movement gt GO zv end step destination step elm Display the program gt HELP gt 1 gt 3 gt Specify the in the Insert mode copy start step Copy the program Copy the program gt GO gt Specify the gt GO gt Specify the copy gt GO a copy end step destination step eon gt Eo lt qZ JEE au 7 afela 14 3 25 Operation in delete mode D n O S aa Details Purpose Procedures key input sequence ee O VETT SHIFT gt DELETE SET gt Step number
177. T Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals This section describes the items that can be set using only the utility screen 1 Detail setting of Host Modem On the communication detail setting screen of the Host Modem communication settings between GOT and modem and model operation can be executed Communication Detai setting x PC connection type Transmission Speed BPS Data Bit BIT Stop Bit BIT Parity Init AT command Modem operation Init Cut Default OK 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 9 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 z E L Z S 8 LO Zz YE Lu Ee Lu Zn DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Item PC connection type Description Select the connection method to the personal computer Setting range Host PC Host Modem lt Default Host PC gt Transmission Speed Set the transmission speed when communicating 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 lt Default 115200 gt Data Bit Set the data bit when communicating 7bit 8bit lt Default 8bit gt Stop Bit Set the stop bit length when communicating 1bit 2bit lt Default 1bit gt Set
178. T sid PLC side Ferrite core Approx p35 x 40 ae Contracted tube color Green 11 5 0 45 32 1 25 ig 110 Cable Approx 8 0 50 4 33 prs 1 96 Pay oy IS li omer Sl CE i Ferrite core Approx p35 x40 Contracted tube color Green 33 1 29 L Cable Approx 8 0 EJ 0 11 5 0 45 ne FE mi 110 4 33 Motion controller ee CPU side Ferrite core Approx 35 x 40 Contracted tube color Green 2 28 49 1 92 A7GT CNB side Appendix 1 External Dimensions 160 6 29 110 Cabl 98 0 able Approx 1433 Ferrite core Approx 935 x 40 Contracted tube color Green App 8 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM APPENDICES Fo 15045 32 1 25 L 60 _ 20 0 78 32 1 25 1000 Powe 75 20 5 0 8 f amy 2 95 Cable Approx 8 0 iret fi ff Sl ak Hy le N 500 19 68 PLC side PLC side A Ferrite core Approx 35 x 40 ATGT CNB side Cable Approx 9 0 Contracted tube color Green 11 5 0 45 T L 1000 39 37 32 1 25 11 5 0 45 FG wire 70 i a 3 93 275 mS i oa al fet 160 110 eo 4 33 Ferrite core Approx p35 x40 GOT side 100 Cable Approx 8 0 6 29 Cable Approx 9 0 Ferrite core Approx 35 x 40 f onitract d tube c lor Green Contracted tube color Blue A0J2 PW si
179. TBA GT1695M XTBD GT1685 GT1685M S Abbreviation of GT1685M STBA GT1685M STBD GT1675M S Abbreviation of GT1675M STBA GT1675M STBD GT1675 GT1675M V Abbreviation of GT1675M VTBA GT1675M VTBD GT1675 VN Abbreviation of GT1675 VNBA GT1675 VNBD GT1672 GT1672 VN Abbreviation of GT1672 VNBA GT1672 VNBD GT1665M S Abbreviation of GT1665M STBA GT1665M STBD ee GT1665M V Abbreviation of GT1665M VTBA GT1665M VTBD GT1662 GT1662 VN Abbreviation of GT1662 VNBA GT1662 VNBD GT1655 GT1655 V Abbreviation of GT1655 VTBD GT16 Abbreviation of GT1695 GT1685 GT1675 GT1672 GT1665 GT1662 GT1655 GT16 Handy GOT GT1595 GT1595 X Abbreviation of GT1595 XTBA GT1595 XTBD GT1585V S Abbreviation of GT1585V STBA GT1585V STBD ie GT1585 S Abbreviation of GT1585 STBA GT1585 STBD GT1575V S Abbreviation of GT1575V STBA GT1575V STBD GT1575 S Abbreviation of GT1575 STBA GT1575 STBD GT157 GT1575 V Abbreviation of GT1575 VTBA GT1575 VTBD GT1575 VN Abbreviation of GT1575 VNBA GT1575 VNBD GT1572 VN Abbreviation of GT1572 VNBA GT1572 VNBD KS GT1565 V Abbreviation of GT1565 VTBA GT1565 VTBD oes GT1562 VN Abbreviation of GT1562 VNBA GT1562 VNBD GT1555 V Abbreviation of GT1555 VTBD GT1550 GT1555 Q Abbreviation of GT1555 QTBD GT1555 QSBD GT1550 Q Abbreviation of GT1550 QLBD GT15 Abbreviation of GT1595 GT1585 GT157 O GT156 0 GT1550 GT1455 Q Abbreviation of GT1455 QTBDE GT1455 QTBD CTIS GT1450 Q Abbreviation of GT1450 QLBDE GT1450 QLBD GT14 Abbreviation of GT1455 Q GT145
180. TION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 3 1 Specifications System configuration This subsection describes the PLC CPU series names and the connection forms between the GOT and the PLC for which the MELSEC A list editor is available For further information about communication units and cables for each connection form see the following GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Targeted PLC PLC ACPU QCPU A mode t 1 Motion controller CPUs cannot be connected The message MOTION CONTROLLER NOT SUPPORTED will be displayed when the MELSEC A list editor function is activated 2 When the PLC is A2USH S1 it operates within the range of A3U when the PLC is the A2SH S1 A2SH A1SH or A1SJH it operates within the range of A3N Connection forms When the GOT is connected to an ACPU QCPU A mode O Available x Unavailable Connection form between GOT and PLC CC Link Function name Direct CPU connection Computer link ea 2 GOT multidrop connection connection G44 Bus connection MELSEC A list editor 1 When the PLC is the A2SH S1 A2SH A1SH A1SJH use a CPU of version E or a later version Programs cannot be written to CPUs of version D or an earlier version 2 When the PLC is A3N A2N S1 A2N or A1N it can not be used 3 When the PLC is QCPU A mode it cannot be used 4 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 14 50 14 3 MELSEC A Li
181. TION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 21 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices 1 Quick test of bit devices Operation example Change the status of bit device X001 from off O to on DEVICE MONITOR Touch the bit device you want to switch its status to on or off The device name and number of the selected bit device are highlighted R NetNo O ST FF er 3 Touch Ss The status of the selected bit device is switched from off to on 14 22 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices 2 Quick test of word devices Operation example Change the device value of word device W200 from 43 to 100 Conditions Data range 16 bits device value display format decimal number DEVICE MONITOR Touch the device you want to change the device value No OJ ST Dey ICEL Wi t 200 00 Enter a new device value by operating 8 EE Al BI ra the key window v In this example enter 100 For the operation of the key window 4 5 6 E D 4 gt see the following Subsection 3 F F 4 gt Subsection 14 2 6 Key window setting columns and operation 0 Enter Del ACL Pee x No O ST at 0 DEC DEVICEL Wit 200 vL DIT 118 9 Al Bl aly 4 5 6 Cl Dl lp AV 2 3 EI Fl lt gt Oe ters t DEVICE ENTRY Continued to next page 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices UTIL
182. TY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS a Se NaN Py AND BATTERY st STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Upload operation BootOS and OS in the C drive Flash memory can be uploaded to the A drive Built in CF card Install the CF card used as the uploading destination to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card Section 8 1 CF Card OS information screen Touch A Built in CF Card of Select drive cy Touching Upload starts the uploading C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM OS information screen Storage file folder display screen 4 When the upload is completed the dialog shown left is displayed Touching OK closes the dialog Upload is completed 13 10 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Property display operation Displays the property of the file stored in the selected folder S ms Program Data_control Property If touch button after selecting the Date Time property displaying target folder the 3 Version Size Property screen shown left is displayed GIOSMONT OUT 06 10 04 14 21 Mi the Fropeny screen the following B Standard monitor OS information is displayed for each file e Basic 02 01 50 1015K selected b
183. The GOT is designed to be embedded into a panel z Mount the GOT by following the procedure below S O Point P Cautions on the installation panel Refer to Section 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions for the panel cutting dimensions 5 and panel thickness lt aie Make sure that the panel surface is free from warpage flaws and irregularities oZ Warpage flaws and irregularities may disable the waterproof effect ae Select proper panel thickness under consideration of the panel strength For example the panel strength may be insufficient depending on the panel A material and dimensions even if the panel thickness is acceptable Insufficient panel strength may cause warpage depending on the installation positions of the GOT and 5 other equipment 5 Installing the packing Packing 1 GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD a Install packing to the packing installation groove on S S the back panel of the GOT 7 sp a While referring to the cross sectional view of the tao packing shown right push the thinner side into the pore packing groove B w Right drawing is the example of lateral format OE Packing installation groove A S 2 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ 286 GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA Packing cross sectional view Be 2 and GT1150 QLBDA RME ez Units are shipped with the packing attached J Inserting direction Inserting into the panel face Insert the GOT from the front side of the panel Zz z
184. USB connector Shi Cone 6 lt Position the POWER LED frame of the cover to the POWER LED onthe got 7 GOT front face and the direction of the cover is decided z Protective Cover For oil 8 8 Protective cover for oil 8 13 8 8 1 Applicable protective cover for oil amp One corner of the cover is pulled outside and it hangs it The oil cover was hung and the edge of the oil cover is on the corner of the front panel of GOT The corner is hung Please do not pull the oil cover more than the necessity and do not bend it extremely The seat part and the rubber part in the display part might flake off Protective Cover For oil The corner on the left is hung and the oil cover is hung sequentially obtained and obtain the oil cover to cover from A side to D side on the starting point sequentially rubber packing parts in the back of GOT of the front panel It is the order of the arrow from A side to D side Please confirm all surroundings Check whether the rubber packing is fitted correctly into the groove on the under side of the GOT front panel and then whether the protective cover for oil securely covers the rubber packing part to prevent invasion of liquids into the board O Mount the GOT onto the control panel 8 14 When the control panel is dirty clean the control panel The panel cutting dimensions and mounting screw tightening torque with the protective cover for oil are the same as those
185. UT TO K10 x000 x091 ord j Yo10 Change the timer setting Q value from K10 to K100 Sw 42 LZ After change F Sl 820 3 OUT Y010 4 OUT TO K100 Change the timer setting value from K10 to K100 Q Zz 8g e See Qik Operation example Doty aon 8 lt Key operation gt lt Display gt ZR al D Select the Write mode DES T x SHIFT WRITE TE Soe Oqo Read the 4th step that changes the setting value z z a Move the cursor to setting Q value K10 of TO if 7 T v Ne Oo Ww ae 1S L m op i e i The setting value of timer TO was changed from K10 to K100 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 67 14 3 15 Changing Overwriting commands 14 3 16 Adding Inserting commands The example shown below is used to describe how to add sequence program commands Before addition f 7 P K80 K5 D20 14 END Q Add the MOV command After addition i Mov D20 k2v018 f 7 P_K80 K5 D20 command Operation example lt Key operation gt lt Display gt Select the Insert mode 4 OUT TO 4 K100 INSERT ae ana 6 ANI M0 Read the 14th step to insert the command SET 1 4 Input the MOV D20 K2Y0018 14 D20 14 K2Y0018 19 gt END 20 NOP Q The command of MOV D20 K2Y0018 was added to Step 14 14
186. a error LOR ase m 28 FEA 0K WEB xas Eok O lt EAIN HTAA N AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 3 Project Information 13 19 13 3 4 Operation of project information 6 Download Transfers the project data from the A drive Built in CF card to the C drive Flash Memory Communicate with Memory Card Transfer the project data to be downloaded P R a to the GOT to the CF card using drawing H Untitled Project1 software or another GOT H Base Screen Common settings 0 Standard monitor OS C Communication driver DJ Extended function OS 0 Option OS lt Me Attention Project data is only valid for the supporting OS therefore itis recommend to write the correct version of the OS GOT type aTi 1 Q 320 240 ina Boot Drive E Available size 6650339328 byte Project Data f byte Memory card E SA Install the CF card mentioned by to GOT Refer to the following for inserting removing method of CF card lt s Section 8 1 CF Card Touch A Built in CF card in Select drive If touchi tton th EE ole ing Download button the screen mentioned left is displayed If touching OK button the download is executed 13 20 13 3 Project Information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Same named project data has already down loaded
187. a on the screen to check visually 14 121 Checks whether there are no dead zone area in the Touch key minimum unit Touch panel Check 14 123 16 dots x 16 dots Carries out RS 422 and RS 232 connecting target confirmation CPU I O check communication check and the RS 232 self loopback check hardware check of 14 125 the RS 232 interface 14 112 14 5 Self Check 14 5 1 Self check function 14 6 Memory Check Z Q O Zz 14 6 1 Memory check function 2 The memory check function carries out the write read check of the Standard CF card Flash memory and 5 Internal SRAM Function Contents z Checks whether the memory Standard CF card of the A drive can be read written A drive memory check Sw normally Zo DuZ C drive memory check Checks whether the memory Flash memory of the C drive can be read written normally SmE zW D drive memory check Checks whether the memory Internal SRAM of the D drive can be read written normally bee 14 6 2 Display operation of memory check So Edern Main menu Debug amp self check Self check zZ L gt Section 9 3 Utility Display TuE Main Menu Debug amp self check aon Communication setting GOT setup Sy Time setting amp display E Touch a Ss ca Program data control f Imemory check ra rE Debug amp self check Mere Meo 2 Che Touch Debug amp self check Ooz OE7 Memory check z 7 z gt Debug self check Memory check s belect Drive g
188. aaachaendensdilanetmaatdae 14 130 14 12 GOP Start time MUM Ctlon suisia a a a ARA aa aaa E 14 130 14 12 2 Display operation of GOT start time 2 eeeeeeeceeeceecee cece eee eeeeeeeeeecaaaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeetensissaneaeeees 14 130 14 123 Display Of GOT Start UMO istsceccvespicetecs na phaceel E deed a ndeds aaeiidedcewens 14 131 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN 15 1 191 Clea M eiieeii e ae ee ee ne ee ree eer 15 1 15 1 1 Display operation Of ClOAN ccecececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeesececaaacaeeeeeeeeeeeeeetesesesacaeeaeeeeees 15 1 15 1 2 Operation Of Clea Msoi a di devsludoareat waned eet aaa a aA a aa 15 1 16 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 16 1 to 16 13 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation 00 ee 16 2 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS n 16 3 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card ee 16 4 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned ONL cece eect ee eee ener eee eeeaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaneeeeseaaes 16 5 16 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility 2 0 eee eeeteeeeeeeenaes 16 6 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS 16 8 SRG Sic S e ee eee err eee eer ee eee ee een A eee 16 11 16 5 1 Installation method of Core S esise AR 16 11 16 5 2 When CoreOS can
189. ace the EEPROM with a new one The EEPROM cannot be written due to EEPROM failure Detailed description of error No 25 If error number 25 appears the following causes are possible Check the details and the corrective actions 1 14 82 When connected to the master station Device Se Description Details number The control depends on whether there is an error at the Link card error OFF Normal M9210 n hardware of the link card The link card in the CPU link unit for master station ON Error wA is judged at the CPU Replace the link unit OFF Online PES i The control depends on whether the master station itself is ON Offline station to i j M9224 Link status online or offline or in the station to station mode or the self station test or self loopback mode Check the mode switch loopback test OFF Not executed ON Forward loop test nS The control depends on whether the master station itself is M9227 Loop test status and reverse loop i i executing the forward loop test or the reverse loop test test are being executed 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions 2 When connected to the local station Device te Description Details number The control depends on whether there is an error at the Link card error OFF Normal j M9211 i hardware of the link card The link card in the CPU
190. age is switched from the GOT utility screen 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu The following four types of operation can display the main menu Display the main menu after installing the Standard monitor OS from drawing software to the GOT Flash memory Internal 1 When project data is undownloaded After the GOT is turned on a dialog box for notifying of absence of project data is displayed After the dialog box is displayed touch the OK button to display the main menu GOT power on p Ix S Communication setting re GOT setup Time setting amp display E Program data control A Debug amp self check T Touch the OK button Language 2 When touching menu call key If you touch the menu call key while user created screen is displayed the main menu is displayed The menu call key can be set by the GOT utility or drawing software At factory shipment the GOT is set to Simultaneous 2 point presses on GOT screen upper right and upper left corners Menu call key Simultaneous 2 point touch Horizontal format Vertical format 5 Communication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display B Program data control A Debug amp self check m x u Language The utility screen is a factory installed horizontal format screen that cannot be edited Point f When the utility call key is set to the zero point
191. ahpemesugubiass 6 6 T VV Giese sce teenie eee eerie 2 LO 7 0 1 1 Power Supply WVU arse asta anaana aeai ohn eed aes EE eie 7 2 LAV WVIPUNG COXA lenp e E E E ET 7 2 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy sesssseeesssessesernnseesnnnesesnnnnnnnnnnnantnennnnnnnnnnesidann 7 4 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the PANS lai ncssnnctcessccctccpiniatetcandtndeabesadencetiecceet sete diaadadamsibanes 7 6 A220 WVIING SIE aa A Godda aetes 7 6 2 2 OUSIDE INE PAM les csevieneees cledtene shveneenenen Hlamectdaaevened deceeebene dewvdubuabermeyeuunnaeiydantadeteueeceealenenedacidetaenonde 7 6 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to Control equipment eect eee cette eee ettte eee e et ae eter etaeee eee taaeeeeeeeaeeees 7 7 7 2 4 Wiring the FG wire of the BUS Cable oo ec ccceeee e aE ee eset taaeee EE RREA 7 8 8 OPTION es to 8 19 PE E E Be o eee nn eT Or ee nS E E 8 1 8 1 Applicable CF Card sciceccas ataapa aa EEA EE A aaa p aa aa a 8 1 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card ccccceeeeeeeeeeneeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceenccacaeeeeeeeeeeneees 8 2 8 2 M m ry Card GAIN ie creep cst acs ce east ceases oceeedee waned ec eeceead eas 8 4 8 2 1 Applicable memory Card adaptor ccc cece eee eeeee ee ene ee ce eee ee ee eee ea eeaeaaeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseenaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeees 8 4 8 2 2 Installing procedure of the CF card into a memory Card adaptor ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeneees 8 4 8 3 O
192. all the settings for items to be changed on the operation screen closing Operation and GOT setup screens with XI button restarts GOT and reflects the setting contents 11 17 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation Point n 2 3 Setting another key position when there are two _ Make the setting after changing either one of the key positions from to Three of e cannot be set at the same time Example When changing the two positions from the upper left and upper right corners to the upper left and lower left corners gt gt h e Change the upper right L to Change the lower left to _ When the utility call key is set to the zero point Refer to the following for the utility screen displaying method e Pressing the special function switch set on the user created screen e Powering ON the GOT while touching the upper left corner of the screen KL Section 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu When limiting the display and operation of the utility When limiting the display and operating users set a password to the GOT using the drawing software If a user tries to display the main menu of the utility the password is displayed Refer to the following for details on setting passwords gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT D
193. amentals GOT Type GT117 0 320x240 Boot OS Version Transfer size 18418 byte Memory card z zl Empty area size 1546144 byte Install Close D Check that the power of GOT main unit is OFF and then mount the CF card to GOT After mounting it turn ON the CF card access switch Turn ON the GOT power Core0S Install Ver 02 01 00 E After the power is turned on CoreOS ier ini installation execution screen is Aba Je Riel oTt i i i Kaken T a pee ena displayed after a brief gt interval AS OFFS F EER E STREN Oe Remo Do you execute the Cores installation The internal memory is initialized and return to the state before factory shipment Turn off the memory card access switch before installation If you do not install the Core0S turn off the GOT and remove a CF card 4 After the CF card access switch is turned Core0S Install Ver 02 01 00 E off the installation of CoreOS is started its Fee HR TLES Warnin Py hRSVERERUIT CEE 5 Do t turn off the power supply Don t push the reset button CorelS 1 YAK JOB RPC Installing CoreOS Phase E Progress 16 12 16 5 CoreOS 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS Core0S Install Ver 02 01 00 E TLELIRS EA U Fh FEIROT SEES Installation is completed Turn OFF GOT and remove CF card Phase E Progress BROS 1 VAK IVL TK RAW Please install the Standard OS BootO0S Version 02 01 00 E 16 5 2 When the insta
194. andard monitor OS in the GOT from drawing software the utility screen 25 is displayed E lt t The utility screen has options for Brightness contrast Memory check etc and the format is ie 2 horizontal only RENE For details refer to the following LS Chapter 9 to Chapter 15 S z Z oO Z a Zz O E O About Manual The following manuals related to GOT 1000 series are available Refer to each manual in accordance with the intended use 1 Installation of the software programs Drawing Data transfer For operations from creating project data to transferring data to GOT refer to the following manuals GT Designer2 Version Basic Operation Data Transfer GT Designer2 Version ETE i Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Screen Design Manual Functions Fundamentals Purpose Installing product on PC Detailed Creating projects Detailed Creating screens Drawing figures Detailed aaa Making Common Settings Detailed Placing Setting objects lt n Detailed Transferring data to GOT Detailed 1 Stored in the GT Works 2 GT Designer2 GT Works 3 GT Designer3 in PDF format 2 Installing a GOT connection to a PLC For the operations from installing a GOT to communicating with a PLC CPU refer to the following manuals if ae wi gt GT15 Genera
195. ange The present status is retained 2 Changing an index qualifier Only the constant part of a T C set value with a qualifier can be changed The index qualifier cannot be changed Example Change the set value of T5 from 300 to 200 NetNo anii DEVICE Change the set value of T5 from K300 to K200 Program before change Program after change Constant part The index qualifier cannot be changed 3 Operation when a password is entered for the controller When the target controller is a QCPU the Keyword Release screen appears Enter the password 1 m D Enter the password entered in the sequence program ee at 1 KEY WOR TCL ae terete Cee sisee a z key Touch this key to enter alphabetic Af2 3 jAfaz e Saunt yee ves 0l We el Enter l 9 key Touch this key to enter numbers 1 to 9 Del key Use this key to delete an entered character e AC key Use this key to delete all characters under the cursor Entry is completed by touching the Enter key and the keyboard closes 14 46 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 28 Test operation procedure 14 2 29 Test operation basic procedure UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY
196. at the following occurs on the GOT when the backlight goes out The POWER LED flickers green orange and the monitor screen appears blank CAUTION Do not bundle the control and communication cables with main circuit power or other wiring Run the above cables separately from such wiring and keep them a minimum of 100mm 3 94in apart Not doing so noise can cause a malfunction Do not press the GOT display section with a pointed material as a pen or driver Doing so can result in a damage or failure of the display section MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS WARNING Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to from the panel Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before mounting or removing the option function board on to from the GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction When installing the option function board or battery or operating the reset switch wear an earth band etc to avoid the static electricity The static electricity can cause the unit to fail or malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control
197. ation board serial communication board cable GT09 C30R20102 25P 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON connection cable GT09 C30R20103 25P 3m For connecting GOT to OMRON rack type host link unit Connection cables for KEYENCE PLCs Sold separately Product a Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R41101 5T 3m RS 422 GT09 C100R41101 5T 10m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit cable GT09 C200R41101 5T 20m GT09 C300R41101 5T 30m GT09 C30R21101 6P 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE PLC RS 232 bl GT09 C30R21102 9S 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit cable GT09 C30R21103 3T 3m For connecting GOT to KEYENCE multi communication unit 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Connection cables for JTEKT PLCs Sold separately Product en Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R41201 6C 3m lu RS 422 GT09 C100R41201 6C 10m For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC Ww cable GT09 C200R41201 6C 20m E GT09 C300R41201 6C 30 m 2 RS 232 GT09 C30R21201 25P 3m For connecting GOT to JTEKT PLC cable z Connection cables for SHARP PLCs Sold separately a2 Product T YE Model name Cable length Description Be name GT09 C30R40601 15P 3m GT09 C100R40601 15P 10m A e For connecting GOT to SHARP PLC GT09 C200R40601 15P 20m F GT09
198. ation of BootOS by rating plate 13 4 Confirm the version of BootOS installed in the GOT at product shipment by rating plate of GOT rear face a GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD When the Boot OS version is 2 digits only the lower digit is printed GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX a n Example H W version H S N 540001 BC BC Boot OS version AD BootOS MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION i MADE IN JAPAN version J 80M1 IND CONT EQ Rating plate HD c US LISTED b GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QTBDQ IN_24VDC POWER MAX 00W _ SERIAL _00007201DP00001 A o arms DP MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN E BootOS J version 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 1 3 OS version confirmation 13 1 4 Display file The files that can be displayed in each screen are as follows Display Storage location Contents screen Drive name folder name BootOS Built in flash memory C G1BOOTV Standard monitor OS system screen data Standard monitor OS system screen management information file Standard monitor OS monitor function Standard 6 x 8 dot font ASCII characters os monitor OS R i 12 dot numerical HQ font information 2 16 dot numerical H
199. ations and devices From previous page f DEVICE ENTRY f NetNo 0JST _ FF CPUNo 0 DEV ICE I 16b 0 32b 1 0 AL YI WIL S a BIEL DI WIR 4 gt P EJ G Enter Del AC f Eae TA EST eee SE NetNo OJST FFICPUNo 0 Point P 1 Retaining entered information 2 Entry unit of monitor devices Each monitor device is entered in a combination of a network number and a CPU station number If the CPU station number is changed the entered monitor device will become invalid 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices If the system monitor function is reactivated without turning off the power to the GOT the last displayed information will be retained If the power to the GOT is turned on again and the system monitor function is reactivated the last displayed information will be deleted 14 17 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 6 Key window setting columns and operation procedure Operating the key window Using the lt and gt keys move the cursor to the item you want to set The displayed keyboard depends on the position of the cursor
200. awn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color white yellow light blue green purple red blue black are displayed visually in order it is normal A lt For GT1150 monochrome 16 scales each color is subtracted to monochrome 16 scale z A W To Fanem x W pa oO L Ww N a 0 z O nin On d Z5 Z gt z5 to Pattern 2 Wop oa CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 7 Drawing Check 14 119 14 7 3 Display and operation of drawing check c Pattern 3 Shape transformation color check The overlapped shapes of pattern 1 and pattern 2 are displayed If the shape and color white yellow light blue green purple red blue black are displayed visually in order it is normal For GT1150 monochrome 16 scales each color is subtracted to monochrome 16 scale d Pattern 4 Shape Check The drawn figures are displayed in order and at regular intervals If the shape and color are displayed visually in order it is normal If touch the upper right part of the screen returns to Display check screen To Display check 14 120 14 7 Drawing Check 14 7 3 Display and operation of drawing check 14 8 Font Check 14 8 1 Font check function The font check is a function which confirms fonts installed in GOT The character data of the font is displayed on the upper left part of the screen one by
201. ayed depends on the position of the cursor as shown below om asz ZWE Se ee ees X Szy The position of the cursor displayed O ST FF CPUNo 0 vLID Keyboard displayed when the cursor is v placed in the device name box j Zz amp 4 gt aa rel i AON Cf NetNo OJST FF CPUNo 0 WEG DEVICE T MEE VLID Lae OBE Q Keyboard displayed when the cursor is i 8 Q A B v aZ placed in the device number box 4 i i i gt ie z 3 Dell AC 5 A 5 T 1 If necessary enter numbers or characters on the keyboard e Del key Use the Del key to delete an entered character e AC key Use the AC key to delete all characters under the cursor e The a v and the keys on which nothing is displayed are not available e For further information about the setting ranges see the following L gt Subsection 14 2 27 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen x W pa oO L Ww N a 0 4 Entry is completed by touching the Enter key 5 inl oo The keyboard closes by touching the key oo oa INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 2 System Monitor 14 45 14 2 28 Test operation procedure Point f Operating the set values of timers and counters 1 Time up Count up status Even if a set value or present value is changed after a timer or counter is up the time up or count up status does not ch
202. bbreviation of SW O RNC GSV type integrated start up support software for motion controller Q series MR Configurator2 Abbreviation of SW O DNC MRC2 E type Servo Configuration Software MR Configurator Abbreviation of MRZJW O SETUP O E type Servo Configuration Software FR Configurator Abbreviation of Inverter Setup Software FR SW O SETUP WE NC Configurator Abbreviation of CNC parameter setting support tool NC Configurator FX Configurator FP Abbreviation of parameter setting monitoring and testing software packages for FX3U 20SSC H SWO D5C FXSSC E FX3U ENET L Configuration tool Abbreviation of FX3U ENET L type Ethernet module setting software SW1D5 FXENETL E RT ToolBox2 Abbreviation of robot program creation software 3D 11C WINE MX Component Abbreviation of MX Component Version O SWO D5C ACT E SWO D5C ACT EA MX Sheet Abbreviation of MX Sheet Version O SWO DS5C SHEET E SWO D5C SHEET EA QnUDVCPU amp LCPU Logging Configuration Tool E License key for GT SoftGOT 1000 Abbreviations and generic terms License Abbreviation of QQNUDVCPU amp LCPU Logging Configuration Tool SW1DNN LLUTL E Description GT15 SGTKEY U GT15 SGTKEY P w Others Abbreviations and generic terms Description IAI Abbreviation of IAI Corporation AZBIL Abbreviation of Azb
203. be displayed and the installation process is canceled When download project data GOT automatically compares the version between the project data to be downloaded and the installed OS When the versions are different the dialog confirming whether to install the OS together is displayed When downloading the project data from the CF card storing the project data and OS beforehand is recommended The version of each OS can be confirmed by Property of OS information screen Program Data control Property GIOSMONT OUT 0 Basic 01 02 01 896K GIF 16STG FON 02 01 05 12 40 A Explanation of OS version Basic 01 02 01 500K 01 00 00A GIF 12STG FON 02 01 05 12 41 BootOS version Basic 01 02 01 406K Appears only when the property GIOSMONT G1D 02 01 05 12 41 of the BootOS is displayed Basic 01 02 01 1K Minor version GIOSMONT G1 02 01 05 12 41 L Major version Basic 01 02 01 230K GIFTTNMG FON 02 01 05 12 42 Basic 01 02 01 Aik Refer to the following for details of the screen display operation lt Section 13 2 OS Information 13 1 Data Storage Location 13 3 13 1 3 OS version confirmation UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS a Se N N Py AND BATTERY 89 STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF Point gt Version confirm
204. be performed during RUN of PLC CPU 410 because of PLC run mode was performed stop the PLC Stop the PLC CPU Memory cassette is write The memory cassette installed in PLC CPU is in the state protected with 411 protected EPROM or E2PROM Check the memory cassette Confirm the memory cassette installed in PLC CPU Cannot read write device The key word is set in PLC CPU 412 protected by keyword Cancel the key word Remove key word The file register of QnACPU and the device beyond the outside range of PLC cannot handle as requested p 448 buffer memory was specified Correct devices Correct the monitor device by setting file register of PLC CPU 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 18 5 m MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION W 0 lt ne a Zy xe o rz wc X lt lt APPENDICES Error Error message Action code nn One or more channel for PLC and host microcomputer connection Ch 1 Communication channel not set i B 480 e to 5 is not allocated by drawing software or utility Set channel number on Utility a Set the channel by drawing software or utility 500 Warning Built in battery voltage The voltage of the GOT built in battery is decreased is low Replace the GOT built in battery The value that is input as clock data is out of the input enabled range In this case the input value is not accepted 919 lee data input outor range C
205. cannot be monitored ao A 7 A lt a 2 Set value of T C contact coil and actual value cannot be monitored Use the TC monitor 3 V Z and A cannot be monitored or their present values cannot be changed Bea Q Z lt z S a a A w re lt O W E uw W 9 O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 9 14 2 1 Specifications 5 When the GOT is connected to a remote I O station of MELSECNET H system O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection type between GOT and controller Name Entry monitor Description Monitoring present values by entering devices to be monitored in advance Batch monitor Monitoring the present value of n devices from a specified device TC monitor Monitoring the present value set value contact point and coil of m devices from a specified device BM monitor Monitoring the present value of x devices in specified buffer memory of a specified intelligent function module Data change by test operation Setting Resetting bit devices Changing the present value of word devices and buffer memory Changing the present value of TC possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC monitoring Quick test Changing device values by performing a quick test Display switc
206. ce data and the destination data Ex 1 When FMOV K2 DO K5 is input w 115 M 5 2 120 L D M3 121 gt NOP 122 NOP F Hl mov Hi k be 2 sph a bt o H sph k Hi s5 H co w 121 D0 434 K 5 13 0 gt NOP 131 NOP Ex 2 When OUT T1 K10 is input w 112 K123 2 113 LD x0000 114 gt NOP 115 NOP amoena Ww 114 OUT T 1 2 114 K 10 115 gt NOP 116 NOP 14 62 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 10 Command input procedures Ex 3 When MC N3 M5 is input NOILONN4 ALILA ONILLAS SONILLAS AV1dSIC SNLVLS MOSHO 4145S LOD NOILOAS AV1dSIG SO HOLINOW GYVONVLS SOVSYSLNI NOILVuadO AY aLLva ANY ANY AV1dSIG A714 ye AO SNINVAT19 ANY SOLOO4 0809 NOILVOINNWNOD ANY AV1dSIG SONILLAS X90179 30 NOILVTIVLSNI 3 g D E 2 a QO G D l Q N T 2 gt 7 S p EL Q o a O E e rY X O 5 2 A e a a O O 0 E 2 9 2 a 12 oO o T mo E y Q A E g ii 5 O O 4 2 o A i Goaan oO ToT cn Ea E a c 2 ite a O Ea E D T 5 fe 5 Oo Q jn ai D EJ foo 2 S i is Cc b z b A no 2 E a E ra Q oO oO 1 r ro yn F 2 E3 A t 3 a Go F S x LL v 8 z 2 D g o F o o A lra oo a a oo 2 2 o Rroo ooo rroo i W lt roa a a onaa o o Dxoo OZ0o O gt xo0o0 L T 0 06 90 i IOo Jo a o zz E zz Slo zz y zz 4 zz T A 2 A x A o a A 2 A DN oa toO ono
207. ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeececeaeaeeceeeeeeeeeeesecescncnceeaeeeeeeeeees 18 9 18 4 Troubleshooting for Monitoring si2cc 2ccnccceeectsnnizensasudencccacenar nd pendecmcenedeestaaderateetevette 18 10 18 5 Starting Oi Meme nese sea tee see eter eerie eee ee te ere sch or oan ee nee ee eee eee 18 11 1879 1 POWOIOT ccc copie dackecientendeaetelnccep E ines 18 11 18 5 2 Communication from drawing software to the GOT 0 eeececeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenenaes 18 11 APPENDICES cnan anai App 1 to App 17 Appendix 1 External Dimensions ccs tcsais sis eeedencedavedoude eeucedes texte nadacasvesencecedeeecsadsene App 1 Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes App 10 Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions i ii2scst casecsdcasacicediasctcantecdiedidassladadactediencidcnes App 16 Appendix 3 1 Relevant models csse iaai adrie a ea aaa daaa daai aai App 16 Appendix 3 2 Transport guideliNe Smirin aaa aoad iea aa inaa App 16 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 SEri sS sssaaa rS KEE SEE App 17 INDE X erie E Index 1 to Index 2 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS gw GOT Abbreviations and generic terms GOT1000 Series Description GT1695 GT1695M X Abbreviation of GT1695M X
208. ceeeseeeeesecereeeeees 2 13 Performance specifications cceceeees 3 2 Periodic inSpection ccccceeceeeeeeeeeesenenteteees 17 2 Power supply specifications 0 ceeeeeees 3 8 Program data Control sssrini 13 1 Project data storage location 13 1 13 5 Protective cover for Oil cccesseeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 8 13 Protective Sheet cccceceeseeceeeceeeeeeees 2 1 8 10 17 2 R Required device cccccecceceeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeaeees 2 1 REID ere a a A ie dgecosianntueeesodaets 2 1 2 13 Rough pre operation procedure 0 00 1 5 S Screen data transfer Cable ccceeeeeeeeeee 2 13 Security level change 11 10 11 14 SET CHECK oeiras e aanas 14 112 Serial multi drop connection unit 2 1 8 16 Set UP esai a a aa aaa 11 1 Specificato S sisi ndereddincsadaleeaetssatdeaccnshnadceanastanaseetnane 3 1 General specifications ecceeceeeeeeeeteees 3 1 Performance specifications c cccceeeeeeees 3 2 Power supply specifications 0 cccceeeeeees 3 8 SLAIN aesa atantend wuldievenaaae 2 1 8 12 Standard monitor OS c cc eeeeeeeeees 9 1 13 2 16 2 EPE I E A PE E E 14 128 System Alar ccecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 17 4 18 1 System Alarm Display ccseeeeesteeeeeeeees 14 128 System configuralo sessrneisiereda 2 1 Systemi MONO eeen 14 2 Index 1 T Third
209. ces is the same even if other items than the entry monitor 5 Example Entering a monitor device when the entry monitor is used Z O E Functional change menu screen Su Zo Osu poe a ozu BAT MON a Hiiti a a ZZ Sbe E n m When no device When devices are ator is entered already entered TES TEMENO ORM ee NetNo OJST FFICPUNo QM Zp 15 9147 A Du Touch SET Mare 5 OW DRA x5 Sok 0f5 Q lt z S oO D A W l m NetNo O ST FF CPUNo 0 DELETE ALL CLR a ii inini _ ____ _ j Touch i ENTRY pa HHA HEHEHEH x W pa oO L Ww N a 0 eeaseersereeseeseeseeeseeeeesossnszonstts dunn hhh CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION Continued to next page CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 15 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices From previous page Device entry screen when the entry monitor Device entry screen when the batch monitor or TC monitor is selected BM monitor is selected X FF CPUNo 0 HEX 16b 0 32b 1 0 Set 1 to 8 as shown in the table below and then touch the Enter key For the operation of key windows see the following L 3 Subsection 14 2 6 Key window setting columns and operation procedure Description of setting No Item Direct CPU Computer link CC Link connection Bus connection connection connection
210. ching the X button restarts the GOT and the language on the utility is switched to the selected one 4 Only selectable languages are displayed The selectable languages differ depending on the fonts installed in the GOT For details of the fonts refer to the following manual lt 3 GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 9 3 Utility Display 9 4 COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY INSTALLATION OF Zz S 2 u gt gt STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 9 5 Point gt Switching the display language of the utility 1 When starting the GOT without selecting any language or the selected language and the installed fonts are not matched The following screen will be displayed Touching the button of a desired language restarts the GOT and the language is switched to the selected one Select Language Ew 2 Switching the display language of the utility by devices Any device can be used for switching the display language of the utility For details refer to the following lt GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals When using devices to switch the display language of the utility it does not change even if the display langu
211. ckage acquisition askin eascaeansiaaseaiiecestacd ceaihesdases nearer elesatdansndeunie 13 33 13 7 1 The function of GOT data package acquisition ceccceeecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeectaeaeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeneees 13 33 13 7 2 Operating the GOT data package acquisition FUNCTION 2 0 0 0 cece eee eeeeeeeeeeecteceeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeneees 13 33 13 7 3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition ceccececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeaeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneees 13 34 13 7 4 GOT data package acquisition Operation cccceecceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeesensaaeeees 13 35 sein ascension E E A E E A ates 14 1 to 14 131 MIG s oneee A E S E E E E 14 1 14 1 7 Debug TUNCHONS nene E AA 14 1 14 1 2 Display operation Of debug essare OE 14 1 14 2 System WIN serenor icerir sce diesel treme deck ieee chia deeds Raat enian aanren 14 2 14 21 SPOCIICATIONS sii cic cies sundinaned ccceducaresdadachsuatucedccedal deaacunelancadaananscdcadacdanecauescsiddacansaatecacusnecncltataddevecss 14 5 TA 272 DISPIAY a EE E Mehta sh daldeada yh slaenecs OET daldeeeahl ied 14 13 14 2 3 Operation procedure common to the system monitor SCrEENS cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetnteeeeeees 14 14 14 2 4 Functional change mMenu SCIGN c cccceecceceeeeeeeceeeeteeeeceeeesseecaeeeenaaaceeeesnsaeceeeeesenaaeeeeenenaaees 14 14 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices eeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeenaes 14 15 14 2 6
212. comprises four monitors entry monitor batch monitor TC monitor and BM monitor and you can monitor any device according to the application Entry monitor Batch monitor NetNo O ST FF CPUNo 0 OJST FF CPUNo The entry monitor function monitors up to 8 controller devices The batch monitor function monitors up to 16 controller entered by the user in a single window devices from the device number specified by the user in a lt gt Subsection 14 2 10 Entry monitor single window Subsection 14 2 14 Batch monitor TC monitor BM monitor monitoring Buffer memory No O ST FF CPUNo NetNo O ST FF CPUNo QPG 0 ELE Emai The TC monitor function monitors the present value set The BM monitor function monitors up to 16 devices from the value contact point and coil of up to 8 controller timers T initial device number in the buffer memory of the intelligent counters C from the device number specified by the user in function module specified by the user in a single window a single window L Subsection 14 2 21 BM monitor monitoring buffer Subsection 14 2 17 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers memory and Counters 14 2 14 2 System Monitor Point gt Displaying the system monitor screen 6 The GOT can display one of the four monitor screens as a full screen 6 Su 828 Data can be changed by test operation 28 For further information see the following ae Subsection 14 2
213. creen 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting Channel and driver assignment operation The operation method for the channel and communication driver assignment is described here In this section the case for changing the computer link connection Communication driver AJ71QC24 MELDAS C6 to CPU direct connection Communication driver A QnA QCPU QJ71C24 is described In the present example Communication Settings is not downloaded Point gt Before starting operation 1 Restarting the GOT After Communication Setting is executed the GOT automatically restarts If the project data is downloaded GOT starts monitoring the communication device after restarting Before starting the operation check for safe conditions 2 Setting retention Once being established Channel Driver assign is retained until Communication Settings is updated He DMCS Loin eae xi D Install communication driver A QnA ae ns QCPU QJ71C24 to the GOT 1 AJ710C24 MELDAS CO Communication Settings with eee AJ71QC24 MELDAS C Cho USB Communication Settings is not 9 Host PC downloaded from drawing software CH Driver assign IE 10 After installing the communication driver touch the CH Driver assign button in Definition of ChNo O None herr F LFA device 8 Barcode 9 PC Communication Settings EITT z The screen shown on the left is 1 AJ710024 MELDAS cox Change
214. ct refer to the function operations from subsection 14 4 7 onward How to change modes Touch the MODE button Each time you touch this button the mode changes Touch the ovel button The current mode is displayed OOD STDIN WM In the case the mode cannot be changed In the following cases only READ mode is allowed If you try to change to other than READ mode an error message is displayed To change to other than READ mode take the action below Error Message Description Corrective action PLC is running The FX PLC is in the RUN status Stop the FX PLC The protect switch of the EEPROM memory Switch off the protect switch of the EEPROM cassette is on memory cassette Can not write Set a memory other than EPROM as the memory The EPROM memory cassette is enabled i itet o write to 14 92 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 6 Selection and operation of modes 14 4 7 Sequence program display Zz Q Sequence programs are read from the FX PLC to the GOT and displayed o There are two displaying methods specifying the step number and scrolling one screen at a time z Display using cursor keys 5 1 Operation Scroll with 4 or 7 z on Zlo 2 Example asz z Sut Scroll one line upward or downward em 128 MPP 129 DIV D56 K200 a E E Zz Scrolling one line upward 4 v Scrolling one line downward ae aon 128 MPP 128 MPP 129 DIV 129 DIV 6 gt 2 gt 4 Ree
215. ct All button is clicked on the setting screen of drawing software for the system information assignment D36 b12 Battery voltage low System Signal 2 2 Turned on upon a battery voltage drop Used as shown below in the sequence program RUN monitor M8000 D36 Battery voltage low M32 Output to external device of PLC m Activated the output upon battery voltage low detection indicates the output number at which the external device is connected For details of system information refer to the following L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Handling of Batteries and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States This section describes the precautions for disposing of waste batteries in EU member states and exporting batteries and or devices with built in batteries to EU member states 1 Disposal precautions In EU member states there is a separate collection system for waste batteries Dispose of batteries properly at the local community waste collection recycling center The following symbol is printed on the batteries and packaging of batteries and devices with built in batteries used for Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal GOT Symbol Point gt This symbol is for EU member states only The symbol is specified in the new EU Battery Directive 2006 66 EC Article 20 Information for end users and Annex
216. ct For connecting QCPU Motion controller CPU Q A GT01 C30R2 6P 3m connection series and GOT cable FX expansion keere For connecting FXCPU expansion board D sub connediien 9pins special adapter D sub 9 pins and GOT FX special GT01 C30R2 9S 3m For connecting personal computer GT adaptor 2 RS 232 P 3 Designer2 D sub 9 pins female and GOT Gani connection eee le data D sub 9 pins female transfer cable FX special p For connecting FXCPU special adaptor D sub adaptor GT01 C30R2 25P 3m 3 25 pins and GOT connection t Computer ST09 C30R2 9P 3m l ESEO link For connecting computer link unit serial connection communication unit and GOT f GT09 C30R2 25P 3m cable 4 Description in parentheses indicates the cable side connector shape 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Bus cable for connection to QCPU Q mode Sold separately Product name Model name Cable length Description GT15 QC06B 0 6m Q add on cable GT15 QC12B 1 2m For connecting QCPU and GOT Inter GOT connection GT15 QC30B 3m A For interconnecting GOTs cable GT15 QC50B 5m GT15 QC100B 10m u Q fi G119 QG150BS Tom For connecting QCPU and GOT over a on connection a GT15 QC200BS 20m distance of 13 2 m or farther Requires A9GT cable GT15 QC250BS 25m QCNB Long inter GOT For int ting GOT dist f or interconnectin s over a distance o connection cable GT15 QC300BS 30m 139 tar
217. cted line When a program list is displayed the line currently selected for editing is indicated by P gt appearing immediately after the step number The 3rd line in the display area is selected for editing You can use the f and _ keys to move P gt up and down Step number display A step number is displayed as a decimal number On the 1st and 2nd lines in the display area significant digits in the lower four digits of a step number are displayed On the 3rd and 4th lines in the display area up to five significant digits in a step number are displayed Displays significant digits in the lower four digits of a step number Displays up to five significant digits in a step number Step number Device display Two or more device specifications attached to a basic or application instruction are displayed using the same step number For information on the step numbers see Paragraph 4 above Display of data input from the keys Data input from the keys will appear at the cursor position As more characters are input the cursor moves to the right The cursor appears as W Example The user enters _SET gt 1 Hlo R OrPLOD X0000 2 1 OR M10 2 0o UT M100 3 L D M100 gt GHE R OPrPLOD X0000 x 1 OR M10 2 OUT M100 1058 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 7 Display format of the display area 7 8 Shifting of data to the left during the input of a progra
218. ction lt 3 Subsection 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation Switches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX on the FORM TC Monitor screen or comment no comment display Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Switches the screen to the Device entry screen to enter or test monitor devices Entering monitor devices lt 3 Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and SET devices Test operation Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation Canceling keywords _ gt Subsection 14 2 20 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords Scroll displayed information upward or downward by a line to display the preceding or next monitor device that is not currently displayed When five or more monitor devices are entered these switches are available when their comments are displayed A v play A Scrolls information upward by a line Y Scrolls information downward by a line 14 34 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 17 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters 3 The following table below describes the range of display of items 1 to 11 displayed 1 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 zZ O Description of setting 5 Z N i CC Link T o tem Direct CPU Com
219. ction 14 3 10 14 3 6 Operation methods 14 55 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa 1S L m a a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 2 How to express keys and key operation descriptions The keys for the MELSEC A list editor and operation procedures are described in text in a simplified manner as shown below a Some keys such as 5 and Q are available for two different purposes Operate such keys with either the upper or lower function indicated on them valid according to the operation In descriptions only the necessary functions are indicated on keys Example of description When entering the character M the key is indicated as in the description Make upper or lower functions valid by using the key or the SET key For further information about the procedure for making upper or lower functions valid see the following gt Subsection 14 3 8 Switching valid keys upper lower functions in b The expression Key1 gt Key2 gt keyn means touching keys from Key 1 to Keyn order Example of description The example of description shown below indicates that SET must be touched first F second 0 third
220. ction after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit Insert the bus cables for QnA ACPU and motion controller A series into the GOT s bus interface connectors until they click into the place Check for proper insertion to avoid malfunctions TEST OPERATION PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before performing the test operations of the user creation monitor screen such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method During test ope
221. ction command Gol K 1 Input the capital gt Input the corresponding gt Go Wee function ar Ly specification 4 letter of the command command number Foa see Display the E Display of ai Perform program display operation gt HELP gt 2 1 Comment comment stored In in the Write Read Insert Delete mode 2 the ACPU a Z Input the lt Command code gt command code Command gt GO T only a only 2 Input the a Command code i E command code Command gt SP gt Device Device No gt GO and 1 device and 1 device 1 Command Input the x input Other than above O i command other a8 W operation command key f Input the SP between the device the source data and the destination T than above with input c the command key m Input the 9 Other than above command other g j Input the SP between the command the device the source data and the destination device key input than above without the command key 2 2 we On On Z gt ZS go ae oa CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 73 14 3 20 List of operation procedures 14 3 22 Operation in write mode W Details Purpose Set the specified range in the Procedures key input sequence Program display gt HELP gt 1 gt 2 in the Write mode
222. d During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident You can specify and test any station and device that can be monitored during monitoring by the system monitor function This section describes how to test the bit or word devices of the controller or the buffer memory of the intelligent function unit 14 2 25 Procedure for displaying the test menu screen and the setting key window screen This subsection describes how to display the test menu screen and the setting key window screen oy Touch When performing test operation from the Entry Monitor screen EEA TESTOMENU OR NetNo O ST FF CPUNo 15 21 J NetNo OlST FETTES Touch TEST y Test menu screen aia We Maram SIZ y SEDI The test menu screen appears NetNo O ST FFICPUNo 0 pp Touch SET RST SET VAL VALUE 16 VALUE 32 BM VAL 16 OF BM VAL 32 Operation example touch SET VAL For a detailed description of each key function see the following lt L 3 Subsection 14 2 26 Information displayed on the test menu screen and key functions
223. d is registered FX PLC compatible with 2nd 4 Registration options can be selected keyword Registration options cannot be selected FX PLC not compatible with 2nd keyword 1 Refer to the manual for the PLC in use for the models that are compatible with the 2nd keyword 2 Registration options Options can be selected among Read Write Protect Write Protect or All Protect For access restrictions of each setting refer to the manual of the PLC to be used 10 12 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings Point gt 1 Selection of keyword protection level For the devices which can perform the online operation of FX PLC 3 levels of protection can be set When the monitoring or setting change by online devices is needed set the keyword taking the following into consideration a When only keyword is registered an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 Protection level is selected by the head character of keyword All operation prohibition Set the keyword starting with one of A D to F or 0 to 9 Read incorrect write protection Set the keyword starting with B Erroneous write prohibition Set the keyword starting with C b When keyword and 2nd keyword are registered Zz Q q Zz Q O qe LZ xE W Ee W n Protection level is selected by Registration options 2 Ap
224. data E amp x to the built in flash memory J ae S lt Hes DOW AA Check the communication settings AA Connect the cable to GOT and the destination Refer to GOT1000 Series Connection Manual zZ connector O 4 i Turn on the GOT power and the system of the connection destination 2 v Start the monitor Display each screen y C End D oO z a Ss Z O fol 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure 1 5 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 Overall Configuration The overall configuration of GOT is as follows For the connection methods applicable to GOT1000 series and cable refer to the following lt gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Option function board Protective sheet Connector conversion adapter Serial multi drop connection unit Protective cover for oil Bar code reader RFID So lt gt FE Commercially available Personal computer Memory card LI LHL CF card Memory card adaptor Commercially available GT1 00 does not connect a printer 2 1 2 1 Overall Configuration 2 2 Component List 1 Explanation of the GOT model name GT1155 xx xx x ve Gandicaion E Built in RS
225. de App 9 Appendix 1 External Dimensions Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function a ZA lt The function which can be used differs according to the GOT type 26 Moreover there are the function which can be set with drawing software and the function which Eg oO cannot be set 29 O Applicable x Not Applicable Not required or ae a GT Soft Drawing Setting items Function GT15 GOT 1000 GT11 Setting S Channel No setting and communication driver De A a O x O O 35 assignment to communication interface rs O D Communication parameter setting O x O O ESS Sequence program protection key word setting a P O x O x c When connecting FX series PLC 2 Connection 3 detail settings Sequence program protection key word deleting 5 y 5 S When connecting FX series PLC P S o Sequence program protection status cancel When a i O x O x iu connecting FX series PLC m lt Opening screen time setting O O O O Screen save time setting O x O O Screen save backlight ON OFF setting O O O Message language switching Japanese English Chinese Simplified Chinese Traditional Korean O O 0 2 O German Battery alarm display ON OFF setting O O O Screen saving human sensor enable disable setting GT1595 GT1585 GT1585 X
226. ding Inserting commands ec cerusrnncisnia na EE 14 68 14 3517 Deleting command S snra T E 14 69 143 18 Using the help fUNCHION ersreiriiririnressnrinii aininn rent akiken enkante aranira CAESARA EEEn KARER ERATE EER 14 70 14219 PEC Memory dl cled eeen 14 72 14 3 20 List of operation procedures ssssissnercii i e a E ERRET 14 73 14 39 21 CommMon operati eines a aa aaa dA aa a a 14 73 14 3 22 Operation in write mode W c cece ee eette eee ee eect eect eee eee eeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeaaeeeeeesiaeeeeeeeeaas 14 74 14 3 23 Operation in read mode R cccccecccccceeeeeecccceeeeseeceeeeeseeaaeeeeenecececeesseeaaeeeeeneaaeeeeensnsaaeeeeeeneaaes 14 74 14 3 24 Operation in insert mode I o s secede eeeertess beeen acted it cia E 14 75 14 3 25 Operation in delete Mode D ccceccccceeeeecceceetesecceeeeeeaceeeeeeseaceeeesaaaaeeesnaeeeeeenseedeeeetaaes 14 75 14 3 26 Operation in parameter mode P eeeeeeeeeee scene cece etcee eects eaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeseeeaeeeeseeiaeeeeeneaes 14 76 14 3 27 Operation in other Mode QO sssaaa Ea E 14 77 14 3 28 Error messages and Corrective ACtIONS cecceceeeeeneeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeitaeeeeeseaas 14 78 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor geen ere ee eee ee 14 84 144 1 Specifications esnea i eaa a E codaceaa lan sie cnawnadasqctdeluadiucdacsadesadaacdeecyandundudennanse 14 85 14 4 2 ACCESS TINO nern E E EE EEE EEE E E 14 86 TA AS Precautions A aiena aia eaaa EA ee aaa a
227. e e Installation of communication driver e Assignment of channel No and communication driver 2 The following display and operations are not allowed with the GT11 e Chinese Traditional cannot be displayed e Japanese and Chinese Simplified cannot be selected on the GOT screen Japanese and Chinese Simplified fonts cannot be installed at the same time 3 It is necessary to set the security level by drawing software 4 Mount a battery as necessary 5 Itis necessary to mount a RS 232 connector for test KE Section 14 10 I O Check 6 GT11 will display only the GOT error and CPU error 7 Itis necessary to mount the option function board and battery App 15 Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions a ZA lt When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations 26 Zo Appendix 3 1 Relevant models 39 The battery for the GOT1000 Series is classified as shown in the table below lu Yn Battery for GOT1000 Series GT11 50BAT Lithium coin battery Non dangerous goods we ers n roe uct Appendix 3 2 Transport guidelines Products are packed properly in compliance with the transportation regulations prior to shipment When repacking any of the unpacked products to transport it to another location make sure to observe the IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG Code and other local transportation regulations For details pl
228. e QCPUs It is not necessary when A o 2 the system is connected to another CPU a l Displays a comment maximum number of characters 16 one byte characters ob 4 Comment A comment is displayed when DISPLAY is selected for comment display on the display format switching 14 screen DW Indicates that the device value is a 32 bit two word module 5 Data range f i Nothing displayed Indicates that the device value is a 16 bit one word module Decimal number 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 12345 gt s O W E Oo uw W 9 O 0 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 123456789 6 Word device value Hexadecimal number 16 bit one word module Four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 32 bit two word module Eight digits are displayed Display example H ABCDE123 5 we ON o9 7 Bit device ON OFF On O OFF Sz lt 8 Device No Up to eight devices can be monitored with regard to each CPU station number ug a For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered g 9 Device name LGT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer 3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 10 Monitor display When no comments are displayed Up to eight devices can be displayed area When comments are dis
229. e displayed a When the CPU is an ACPU or FXCPU MAIN PROGRAM will always be 4 displayed ma 4 0N 1 10 Contact point and coil on off 4 O 4 OFF X When the CPU is an FXCPU contact points and coils cannot be monitored D When no comments are displayed Up to eight devices can be displayed at a time 5 11 Monitor display area i fi When comments are displayed Up to four devices can be displayed at a time D k 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 35 14 2 18 Information displayed on the TC Monitor screen and key functions 14 2 19 Procedure for TC monitor basic operation MENU Touch When no devices are entered x EETEE FES SSEEESETES SUEDE SUEESSUS SDE dE EST ET EEUCESSES UTES EoTUS EE PSESET PEUSE Sg Ey PETES FSEPSOREUSEESPESTEECTET OEOTOSETTOIOUESTS lt q A TC MON Display example when devices NetNo FILE NANE MA IN ee l are already entered TES TEMENO ORME SET JE OIST _ FF CPUNo 0 _ 0P6 TEST Touch A FORM Touch If necessary perform Quick test operation Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test 14 36 operation of monitor devices 14 2 System Monitor If necessary switch the screen display Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no com
230. e first folder of the touched pelect drive drive is displayed z A Built in CF card 2 If touch a folder name the information of Su the touched folder is displayed aiz C Flash Memory Seu D SRAM If touch a folder of the information of eee the folder of the one upper hierarchy is displayed Q 4 If touch A button of the scrollbar the Z n gt O screen scrolls up down by one line nee If touch 4 button the screen scrolls Doct up down by one screen If touch a file name the touched file name 2 z is selected and inverted Fea eo Refer to the following for delete copy 503 Ss operations azi Delete n ICF this section 13 COPY n LCF this section z gt If touch Xx button the screen is closed z a T GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 4 Alarm Information 13 25 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Deletion operation Deletes selected files Delete file name ALARMHST CSV Delete now Delete is completed 13 26 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Touch and select the file to delete If touch Del button the dialog mentioned left is displayed Confirm deletion targeted file is specified correctly If touch If touch OK button the file is deleted Cancel button the deletion is canceled When the deletion is compl
231. e following CF cards are applicable for GT11010 n Zz Model Description 2 q GT05 MEM 128MC Flash ROM 128MB O GT05 MEM 256MC Flash ROM 256MB a GT05 MEM 512MC Flash ROM 512MB GT05 MEM 1GC Flash ROM 1GB GT05 MEM 2GC Flash ROM 2GB Lu Commercially available CF card a 1 Some models with the operations checked by our company are usable lt For the operation checked models refer to List of valid devices applicable for GOT 1000 series T10 0039 separately available am lt ee ae 9 i aan Point gt The flash PC card of the GOT A900 series Bee In the GT1100 the flash PC card for GOT A900 series cannot be used HE Use the CF card which is described in the above rA O z lt 2 zZ a OPTION 8 1 CF Card 8 1 8 1 1 Applicable CF card 8 1 2 Installing and removing procedures of the CF card Install remove the CF card with the power supply of GOT is OFF or CF card access switch is OFF Installing 1 Set the CF card access switch of the GOT to OFF and make sure CF card CF card access that the CF card access LED turns off When the CF card access LED access LED switch turns off the CF card can be installed even during the GOT power on CF card GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD CF card front face To install the CF card to the GOT insert the CF card into the CF card interface with its front side outside Push in the
232. e how to change screens 2 m i a Functional change menu screen Section 14 2 3 EE ER S Moni en The screen returns to the screen on which the system monitor function was activated Start from the utility screen z The screen returns to the Main e q END m Menu screen of the utility OW Z Touch Start from the user created screen Si2 The screen returns to the aur User created screen 020 DEV MON Touch Functional change Touch Q menu screen 28 CANCEL zsz Ais Qow Touch AON DEV MON Touch n Oo gt z gt 5 Ka Eug MENU WES 7 ok xnl gt Touch Sok IZE SET FORM ON MENU FORM Touch Touch Device entry screen y Touch Touch Display format change menu screen Py FILE DISPLAY AND A COPY CANCEL x O W O uw WwW 0 je O 0 Touch Touch Test menu screen Touch CANCEL CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION Touch CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 25 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation 14 2 10 Entry monitor The device monitor is a function to enter devices to be monitored in advance and monitor only entered devices This section describes how to activate the entry mon
233. e memory space 2 File reg capacity Sets the memory space number of blocks allocated to the file register Touch the O section and input the number of blocks 3 Latch range Sets the latch range power failure hold area Touch the number display section and input the value 4 RUN terminal input Sets whether or not to use one of the FX PLC input terminals for RUN input Touch the O section and set the device to be set for the RUN terminal 5 Default Initializes the parameters Point P Memory space for kana comments after changing memory space file register space If the memory space is set smaller than the total of the file register space and kana comment space the kana comment space is automatically reduced With the MELSEC F X list editor the kana comment space is not displayed Note that if any setting as described below is made the kana comment space is reduced Settings that reduce kana comment space and the kana comment space after setting change Settings resulting in Nm lt Nf x 500 Nk x 500 500 Nm Nf x 500 500 Kana comment space steps after setting change San Nm Memory space after change steps Nf File register space after change blocks Nk Comment space before change blocks Remark Settable range and default value Gs The settable range and the default value depend on the FX PLC type Refer to the following manual for details of the set
234. eaa ya eaaa ea aada andes 14 87 1444 Display aiiin ane aa ee ee AE aS 14 88 14 4 5 Operation procedures ss sssssrsesssssttttttttt cee ee eee eeeeeeeeeecaaeaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecccecaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeesnsaeeas 14 90 14 4 6 Selection and operation of modes ccccccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeecaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneees 14 92 14 4 7 Sequence program display cecceceeeeeeeceeceeeeeee cece eececaaecaeceeeeeeeeeseesecccaaeeeseeeeeeeteetesineeeees 14 93 14 4 8 Searching commands and CeVICES aossssisesssiiisisronriiiiineri dee inn ENESE EEEKE NE NEE E ES 14 95 14 4 9 Writing COMMAMNAS eee nt eee nee ee need Eiaa NEKEA EEA NE Ea 14 97 14 4 10 Changing operands set valls nsunescircensranian teoriir ii E aE 14 100 14 4 11 Deleting Commands 2 ccccceenececeteceecceenecaaneeeeenedaneeeeeeauanseeeseaaneeesegadaneeeeseneaeeeeeeneneneeeees 14 101 14 4 12 Sequence program all clear cccccccecce eenas eee eeeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeee tea eaaaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeessenaeeaeeess 14 102 14 4 13 PLC diagnostics 2 0 0 ceeecee eee eeee cette eeeneee eee teceeeeeeeeaeeeeeeceeeeaeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeaneneeaaeees 14 103 14 4 14 Parameter Setting cs heivsied tinea sini this anendi di S 14 105 TA AVS KGYWOIGS sores fe coatee A E E EE A E E T EE EE eet 14 107 14 4 16 LISLE MONMOF cniinne nrnna aee E EAR E E AA E OE R a E aE 14 109 14 4 17 Action for an incorrect key input eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
235. ease consult your transportation company APPENDICES Appendix 3 Transportation Precautions App 16 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series For the functions added by version upgrade of the GT Designer2 refer to the following L gt GT Designer2 Version2 Screen Design Manual App 17 Appendix 4 List of Functions Added by GT Designer2 Version Upgrade For GOT1000 Series INDEX A ASU edito sprene 14 49 B Backlight shutoff detection 17 7 Bal COG eccoir iaiia 2 1 2 13 Battery ociera inaina a ideas 4 3 8 7 17 4 21010 1E Siar E E A 9 1 13 2 16 2 Brightness contrast adjustment eee 11 8 Brightness contrast adjustment of display 11 8 Buzzer volume Setting s eeseeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 10 C CF card Compact Flash card saduvanueedeusvanied duvvedumntediwvaneacaeavaas 2 11 8 1 9 1 13 2 16 1 GIS AIN aenn i san cancuaagtecdnctiadsadton veahdesevauass 15 1 Cleaning of display ce ceeeeeeestteeeeeeenees 15 1 17 3 Clock SetlingS ecne nna n 12 1 Communication settings screen eee 10 2 Component list cccceceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeees 2 2 Connector conversion adapter 0006 2 1 8 19 D Daily INSPECTION 0 0 ee eee ie eeeeeenneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeae 17 2 Debug amp self Ch Ck ricresce 14 1 DIS Pla eae cetmineateemieeecuteten 14 131 Display of OS information c
236. ecaeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeseneaaneees 14 36 14 2 20 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywordS c ceeceeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeeeentaeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeettaeeeeseeaaes 14 37 14 2 21 BM monitor monitoring buffer Memory 000 02 eee ee ceee cette eter etna eee ee taeeeeeetaeeeeeetaeeeeereaea 14 38 14 2 22 Information displayed on the BM Monitor screen and key functions 14 38 14 2 23 Procedure for BM monitor basic operation cccccccceeeeeeeeeeceeccneaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeetessnaneees 14 40 14 224 Test Operation rrinin anasi a RE E EE A O E E IN aagides cobs 14 41 14 2 25 Procedure for displaying the test menu screen and the setting key window screen 14 41 14 2 26 Information displayed on the test menu screen and key functions cc eeeeee cette eeeteee 14 42 14 2 27 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen 14 43 14 2 28 Test operation ProcedUTE ivs s2sseesietd ces core davdeed ug len este ar aa r a E N EE EARE 14 45 14 2 29 Test operation basic procedure cceeceeeeeeeeecacceeeeceeeeee te caeeaaeaaeceeeeeeeeeeeseeseeececeeaeeeeeeeeeess 14 47 14 2 30 Error messages and Corrective ACtIONS cececceeeeeceeeeeeeeenne test eeeneeeeeeetaeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeneeeeeeeaas 14 48 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor is sccscccccsnencs2ieasscuswancotadavianddsadecawcamsaadasadaaavanencdadaadeeedaeswncunes 14 49 14 3 1 SPECIICALIONS sics ces soadeaacanesensaacxs cavvaadaasned cecenacaueSaneudecudenndu
237. ection type 1 When the GOT is connected to a QCPU Q mode Q series motion controller CPU or QSCPU O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection type between GOT and controller Bus Direct CPU Computer link C Link Name Description connection connection connection connection 6 G G cares GOT multidrop Reference connection Monitoring present values by entering devices to be monitored Subsection 14 2 10 in advance O O O O Entry monitor Batch monitor Monitoringthe present value ofn Subsection 14 2 14 devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value set TC monitor value contact point and coil of m Subsection 14 2 17 devices from a specified device Monitoring the present value of x A A A A devices i ified buff BM monitor OVISS led ee Subsection 14 2 21 of a specified intelligent function module Setting Resetting bit devices O Changing the present value of 42 Data word devices and buffer memory A change by test Changing the present value of TC Subsection 14 2 24 operation possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC monitoring A Ae A Changing device values by 3 Subsection 14 2 8 performing a quick test A ubsection Quick test Displaying device comments Displaying word device and buffer memory values in decimal or hexadecimal Dis
238. ed with this manual should be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that role These engineers should be fully aware of all aspects of safety with regards to automated equipment 2 Any commissioning or service engineer must be of a competent nature trained and qualified to the local and national standards required to fulfill that job These engineers should also be trained in the use and maintenance of the completed product This includes being completely familiar with all associated documentation for the said product All maintenance should be carried out in accordance with established safety practices 3 All operators of the completed equipment should be trained to use that product in a safe and coordinated manner in compliance to established safety practices The operators should also be familiar with documentation which is connected with the actual operation of the completed equipment Note the term completed equipment refers to a third party constructed device which contains or uses the product associated with this manual e This product has been manufactured as a general purpose part for general industries and has not been designed or manufactured to be incorporated in a device or system used in purposes related to human life e Before using the product for special purposes such as nuclear power electric power aerospace medicine or passenger movement vehicles consult with M
239. eeaeieraacceadasnadavecdasgundinnyecdecs Eaa 8 11 8 7 SANA areia a iE Ea ane ar aai Eh 8 12 8 751 Applicable stand ncini a A E a EE aaa 8 12 8 7 2 Installing ProcedurS sseni a e a a a aea aa a a a aaa 8 12 8 8 Protective cover for oil ccc sescscasausseacrnshunanedimcciuncAcdandassxbnsssaianaeoadhadunedsnccaaelaauontaaxtaesetes 8 13 8 8 1 Applicable protective cover for oil cccccceceeeeeeseeeeecneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseececaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeteesecncicaeeseeeeeeeeess 8 13 8 8 2 Installation PrOCECUIE eccceccececce cee eee eee ee eet eea cea aeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeecaaaaaaaaeaeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeanecanaeeeeeeeeeteees 8 13 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit coos ade ncctieciassinaitdanenenenenssoreesnlceacdeckveretedamarnes 8 16 8 9 1 Serial multi drop connection Unit a resed n aaan Aaa aaa a Ta Ea 8 16 8 9 2 Applicable serial multi drop connection Unit c ccecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeecaeceeeeeeeeeeeseceeenaeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 8 17 8 9 3 Part NaMe ostiis aa T aaa a aa aaia a a E a E A aE 8 17 8 94 J stalatioN cisa a a p Eaa a a a A aa 8 18 8 9 5 Caution for compliance with EMC Directive ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeececeecaeeeeeeeeeeeseceecanaaeaeeeeeeeeeeneees 8 18 8 10 Connector Conversion Adapter saicistecacencnsdiecssctenediaacinansoadianinadiadoiaadionsaSecumsmipiananss 8 19 8 10 1 Applicable connector Conversion adapter ccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeececeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeceecencaeeeeeeeeeeeeettess 8 19 8 10 2 Installing
240. eeeeeeeeeees 13 6 Display of utility SCTEON eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeenteeees 9 6 Display settings osc c cccadessdscgessinsteee dete ceeesennees 11 1 DIS PIA YING sassse 14 128 E Error liS tenau aea a 18 3 Error message and solution sseeee neneeese 18 3 External dimensions ccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeees App 1 F Feature Suia a a 1 4 FX list editoi vveicscteenesdevvaders snccceeuevnddecnaienecedavies 14 84 G General specifications c ceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 GOT data package acquisition 000 13 33 GOT Set Po ai iaa 11 1 GOT Start Time cccccccececeeeeeeeseeseeseeeeeeees 14 130 I Instalatii sinisisi inaina antaa aaia 6 1 Invert COOS asinen a aa a 11 7 L List of error code and error massage 18 3 M Memory card adaptorer 8 4 Message indicator cceceesseieeeeeeeeteeeerenee 18 3 O Operation setting esecuri 11 11 OPTION bs ccd inetd ccnans dncseesdasgdsn a RE 2 5 8 1 Option function board cece cecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 1 8 5 OS Melisha a 13 5 16 2 OS file storage location cceeeeees 13 1 16 2 OS installation cccceeceecceeeeeseeeeeeees 9 1 13 1 16 2 Overall configuration eorn 2 1 P Panel cutting diMeNnsiONnS ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 6 4 Patt MAME nnas caaan a i 4 1 PASSWOTA a catdecsnnardadicdanedisstatnnedcee apatnasinnsanedtuveaned 9 8 PC connection Cable ccccccec
241. eeeeeeeeeeeseneaeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeeeaaeeeseeateees 14 111 14 4 18 Error messages and corrective ACTIONS cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeseeeaeeeeseenaaees 14 111 14 5 Self CIS ia scats iettenc Senindiaaeaaionmanededecisetcsaacsadeataedieaackanadihunncuteeicaasaaabenedenannseieamelal 14 112 14 5 1 Self CHECK TUNCUON secs ceisecachscctecsacazanatvenala ned deadastendsandsanesdancausecadecanedueeracaunanndaca Ea 14 112 14 6 Memory Check ireccio E EAE 14 113 14 6 1 Memory check function 2 0 0 2 cece e cece cece cece ee cae ee eee ee ee cece caaaaaecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeaacaecaeeeeeeeeeeseeeiaaeess 14 113 14 6 2 Display operation Of memory CHECK eee eeeeeeeee eset ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaaees 14 113 14 6 3 Memory Check Operation ececceceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeseeeeaeeeeseeaaeeeseaaeees 14 114 14 7 Dr wing ONGC egdi iesirea aa a a a a a ea EKAA 14 117 14 7 1 Drawing Check ancom iero E EE AE EE yp hdadebe wecaledgas 14 117 14 7 2 Display operation of drawing CHECK esssessaiereeriie indier E E E 14 117 14 7 3 Display and operation of drawing CHECK cccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeenaeeesteeneeeeeeenaees 14 118 14 8 POM CNECK nosine a e a aE 14 121 14 8 1 Font CHECK TUMCUOM nenon EE Ea EA E A R Ganeareetieens 14 121 14 8 2 Display operation of font CHECK ecccceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeteecceeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseccsasaesaeeeeeeeeseteeesenaness 14 121
242. en Download Property Data check Touch a drive in Select drive and the data in the first folder contained in the touched drive is displayed If touch a folder name the data contained in the touched folder is displayed If touch the folder with name the data in the one higher hierarchy folder is displayed 4 Touching the A Y button in the scroll bar scrolls up or down by 1 line Touching the 4 button scrolls up or down by 1 screen If touch a file name the file is selected and the file name is highlighted Refer to the following for operation of delete copy property data check download upload Delete ise C this section COPY ee ee lt gt this section Property ie C this section Datacheck gt gt this section Download oo lt gt this section Al Upload a lt gt this section Touching lt button closes the screen 13 3 Project Information 13 15 13 3 4 Operation of project information UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS a Se N NN Py AND BATTERY 89 STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS Delete operation This operation deletes the selected file Delete project data PROJECT 1 Do you want to delete Cancel Delete is completed
243. ents are defined if OK button is touched 11 4 Security Level Change Z O O 11 4 1 Security level change functions 5 gt Changes the security level to the same security level set by each object or screen switch 5 To change the security level input the password of the security level which is set in drawing software Security level setting 0 lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Password setting 0ccceee lt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual an GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 529 oc Swe E Point f Restrictions on screen display 11 The security level change screen cannot be displayed when project data do not exist in GOT Change the security level after downloading the project data to GOT m Zz Ser gt 42 Qik Doty AON 11 4 2 Security change display operation Main menu l GOT setup Operation settings C gt Section 9 3 Utility Display ation x SHORT ow Setting CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Operation Security setting Security level change FILE DISPLAY AND COPY Security sening GOT setup Security level change x Please input password Security level change 7 8 an 4 5 GOT SELF CHECK AC H4 Input the password of the security le
244. er of the GOT Va l ee Turn on the power of the GOT __ ar Lar If an error does not occur the final 4 O tage GOT may be faulty a i h S If an error does not occur the final 4 Z H stage GOT and the bus connection k Aae cable before the final stage may be M 5 77 faulty See Repeat the examples 1 and 2 above to locate error positions Point gt Notes on narrowing the error part range 1 When disconnecting the extension base units in order use only an END instruction for the sequence program and any error resulting from the sequence program will not occur and the status of occurrence of errors will be obtained easily 2 When the frequency of occurrence of an error is low check the error by taking a rather long time with the modules disconnected The checks stated above are effective to locate a noise invading route when the mis operation is caused by noise 18 8 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection 18 3 2 Further locating error positions 18 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting Taking the following system as an example troubleshooting is shown when PLC CPU error occurred When QnASCPU and the extension base unit are used PLC main base unit GOT 1 GOT 2 Extension cable i x Bus connection Bus connection cable cable Start Check the error code step appearing on the PLC CPU Obtain the status of the error and the location where the error occurs The S
245. ered After All Clear set the above parameters etc again 14 102 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 12 Sequence program all clear 14 4 13 PLC diagnostics Zz e Displays the FX PLC error message error code and step at which the error occurred 2 m i Z Operation 2 e gt PLC diagnostics Z gt Select PLC diagnostics with 4 or y 2 lt q A ed 25 zO siz Parameter setting 9zW Keyword setup List Monitor Q ZZ Sbe e age N atera Error message Detail Step One 1 0 configuration error 1010 9 PC HPP communication error 6201 fancy eo Ly x5 oak oto al lt z PLC diagnostics screen T The following describes the contents displayed on the PLC diagnostics screen and the function of on z l screen key ra 1 Displayed contents P Error message Detail Step 1 0 configuration error 1010 PC HPP communication error 6201 x W pa oO L Ww N a 0 z 9 lal OQ oY 1 2 3 a go 5 No Item Display contents oa Displays the error message I O configuration error PLC hardware error PC HPP 1 Error message communication error Serial communication error Parameter error Syntax error Circuit error Operation error 2 Detail Displays the error code 3 St Displays the step number in the sequence program at which the error occurred e This is displayed only for a syntax error circuit error or operatio
246. ersion O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 3 Option function board For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual Section 8 3 Option Function Board 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 85 14 4 1 Specifications UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF Functions list and monitor conditions The following shows the memory that can be monitored by the MELSEC FX list editor and the FX PLC status conditions Can be monitored A Can be monitored under certain conditions x Cannot be monitored Memory that can be monitored 2 EEPROM P memory EPROM FX PLC Function Built in RAM memory Reference cassette flash memory status memory cassette memory cassette cassette Displaying sequence Subsection Reading ieee er programs RUN 14 4 7 u S i Searching commands O O O O STOP Subsection programs devices 14 4 8 a a Subsection Writing Writing commands 14 4 9 sequence L Changing operands set Subsection programs values 14 4 10 meei d 4 For Stop Subsection nserting commands q O O A i only 14 4 9 Subsection Dele
247. esigner3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting 11 18 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation z O O Z i gt E E 3 z O E Su 50 Z See ae E O5 w 020 G Zz Ser gt 42 Qik Ooty OOV CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY The clock display setting items and the time when displayed the setting screen are displayed The voltage status of the built in battery is also displayed 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 1 1 Time setting and display functions Time settings and displaying of the status of GOT built in battery are possible Reference Function Contents page F Setup the method to adjust the time between GOT clock data and clock Clock setting 12 2 data of PLC CPU connected with GOT Clock display Carry out the display and setup of GOT clock data 12 4 GOT internal battery voltage Displays GOT internal battery voltage status 12 5 status 12 1 2 Display operation of clock display and setting Main menu Time setting amp display L Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu E Time Setting amp display Clock setting Adjust GOT internal battery Normal voltage status
248. eted the completion dialog is displayed If touch OK button the dialog is closed Copy operation Copies the selected file Dialog for selecting a copy destination drive Program Data Alarm information Belect drive A Built in CF card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Please select lk Teme a destination Cance Dialog for selecting a copy destination folder Please select a destination Cancel Copy file name ALARMHST CSV Copy destination Copy now Q Touch and select the file to copy 2 If touch Copy button the message Please select a destination is displayed in the left bottom of the screen Touch the drive name display area to select a drive and then touch the Next button The dialog for selecting a copy destination folder is displayed as shown left O Touch the folder display area to select a folder and then touch the Exec button The confirmation dialog shown left is displayed 13 4 Alarm Information 13 27 13 4 4 Alarm information operation UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS a Se NaN Py AND BATTERY st STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF Touch button Same named project data has already Q Lox existed If there is n
249. eturns to monitor screen 3 Scroll button For screens in which the content does not fit on one screen page there is a right or down scroll button on the screen A lt gt Scroll one line column 4 44 b gt Scroll window 9 9 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 2 Utility basic configuration 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Change of setting value GOT setup Operat ion Communication Detail setting Zz S Zz u gt gt Buzzer volume OFF AJ 1UC24 C24 Dat bit BIT Z Security seft ing fe Utility call ke Sy Plity ee y 220 Key sensitivilty ZME Key reaction bpeed 95i Setting item Select button Setting item Select button Q Touch the select button setting point on the screen bun OK Key It is a key for selecting the setting value Repeats with each touch ON OFF zzz Winsa On 7 D e Numerical Key It is a key for inputting the numerical value It displays the keyboard on the bottom of O68 the screen when touched In the above mentioned screen example there is no setting item which displays the keyboard For the 25 operation of keyboard refer to the next page Emo WEG VETT oak oto Touching Enter c
250. f items 1 to 7 displayed a Fug A 5 eel Description of setting veo on a CC Link ooz o tem Direct CPU Computer link DIO Bus connection P f connection connection connection I G4 1 1 Network No 0 A lt FF When the z host station a a is selected O 0 When the 4 l master m 2 Station No FF as station is 1 selected 1 to 64 When a x local station D is selected 5 3 CPU No 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not m necessary when the system is connected to another CPU 2 O Decimal number O 4 Word device valie four digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 1234 Hexadecimal number four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 zZ Q 5 Device No Up to 16 devices can be entered When the CPU is an FXCPU devices cannot be entered uE For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered ou 6 Device name C GT Designer 2 Version L Screen Design Manual oa GT Designer 3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals nS a 7 Monitor display area Up to 16 devices can be displayed at a time 22 1 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 39 14 2 22 Information displayed on the BM Monitor screen and key functions 14 2 23 Procedure for BM monitor basic operation Display example when devices When no dev
251. fier based on the error code displayed upon a system alarm caused to the GOT subtract the error code by 20000 and convert the lower three digits into a hexadecimal Example If the system alarm displayed at GOT is 20144 the error code of the servo amplifier is 20144 20000 144 BIN 90 HEX 18 1 Error Contents Display 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm The system alarm detected with GOT is shown below Error k Error message Action code The number of objects of the screen to be displayed is too large and the system work area cannot be secured Set monitor points too large Decrease the number of objects from the displayed screen For the 303 Decrease setting points number of maximum objects for 1 screen refer to the following gt GT Designer2 VersionL Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals When cycle is ON and when cycle is OFF the number of objects used Set trigger points too large 304 j exceeds 100 Decrease setting points Decrease the number of objects 306 No project data The project data is not downloaded to the built in flash memory Download screen data Download the project data to the built in flash memory f The monitor device of the object is not set 307 Monitor device not set f Set the monitor device of the object 308 No comment data The comment file does not exist Download comment Create the com
252. fter setting parameter other and help modes The lower functions of the command device keys are valid If necessary switch the upper and lower functions of necessary keys for operation 14 3 9 Selection and operation of modes Select appropriate modes of the MELSEC A list editor for the operations described in Subsections 14 3 13 and 14 3 20 You can change modes as you desire during any of the operations described in Subsections 14 3 13 and 14 3 20 so that you can continue operations while changing modes 14 60 READ sesessassesecsesoe Read mode WRITE gasis Write mode INSERT t2522 820842 Insert mode DELETE Delete mode PARAM vesens Parameter mode OTHER ss 1 lt s 2228 Other mode A lt Remark Mode key input is always valid Input of the mode key clears the input data except for the step numbers The display returns to the initial status of the mode selection 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 8 Switching valid keys upper lower functions 14 3 10 Command input procedures Zz O Command input procedures can be classified as follows S ms 1 Input the command key to use the command on the key 2 Input the alphanumeric keys corresponding to each character of command sequentially 5 3 Select and input the command to be used from the Help function Command input procedures for 1 and 2 above are as follows 5 For command input procedure 3 fro
253. g Enter executes read write check for refers to the menu of GOT utility the flash memory 7 8 9 Al B refers to the button in the dialog box of GOT utility a BF a B E leo ey x 13 4 13 3 Memory Check 13 3 3 Memory check operation 1 OVERVIEW 1 m About GOT 6 A GOT is installed on the panel surface of a control panel or operating panel and connects to the PLC within the control panel The GOT PLC carries out switch operation lamp display data display message 6 display etc Connector for program a a For the display screen two kinds of screens are available user screen 26 and utility screen 1 User screen GOT The user screen is a screen drawn by drawing software 2 The objects Touch switch Lamp display Comment display and Numeric display can be ie arbitrarily arranged on the display E A horizontal format or vertical format may be selected for displaying a user s project a Moreover multiple screens created within drawing software can be individually selected or overlapped for the display For details refer to the following Lu L gt GT Designer2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual 7 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual 2 Utility Screen The utility screen is a factory drawn horizontal screen that cannot be edited Zu Installing the BootOS or St
254. g ambient temperature S of 25 C Backlight Cold cathode fluorescent tube irreplaceable by a user backlight shutoff detection function is g included Backlight off screen saving time can be set Approx 54 000h or longer Life 2 Approx 75 000h or longer Time for display intensity Time for display intensity iE reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C reaches 50 at the operating ambient temperature of 25 C Number of touch keys 300 keys screen Matrix structure of 15 lines X 20 columns Key size Minimum 16 X 16 dots per key Touch Number of points pane touched Maximum of 2 points simultaneously Life 1 million times or more operating force 0 98N max C drive 3 Flash memory Internal for storing project data 3Mbytes and OS Memory ea of 100 000 times D drive SRAM Internal 512kbyes battery backup Battery GT11 50BAT lithium battery Backup target Clock data alarm history recipe data and time action setting value Life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C Buzzer output Single tone tone length adjustable Environmental protective structure 4 Equivalent to IP67 JEM1030 front section when the USB environmental protective cover is attached External dimensions W164 6 46 x H135 5 32 x D56 2 21 mm inch Excluding USB environmental protective cover Horizontal format Panel cutting dimensions W153 6 03 x H121 4 77 mm inch Horizo
255. g the cursor to the position where the command is to be deleted Sve oin g p Sie ee 3 7 Place the cursor on the command line the line on which the step number is Szo displayed You cannot delete the command if the cursor is placed on the line of an operand or set value S gt Command line Place the cursor on this line SEO Bae Operand set value line Cannot operate on this line ator one Example eae Deleting OUT T10 K100 A a gt eee Sok 1 Stopthe FX PLC Oh Qa A lt READ gt z S E 5 A wee m Set the lt DELETE S DELETE L mode Move the cursor to the command to be deleted with 4 e or the key x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 101 14 4 11 Deleting commands 14 4 12 Sequence program all clear Clears all the sequence programs Operation WRITE mode Example Clears all the sequence programs Caution The program will be erased Press OK to continue es Set the lt WRITE gt WRITE L mode Point P Items cleared when All Clear for a sequence program is performed When All Clear is executed the parameters before program execution are initialized and Latch Clear is executed The memory space becomes the default value the comment area a 0 block the file register space a 0 block and keywords unregist
256. ge targets When a memory cassette is mounted the parameters in the memory cassette are targeted for changes Operation Parameter setting Keyword setup List Monitor 020 w E N x Memory capacity 8K File reg capacity 0 block Latch range M 500 M1023 C 100 C 199 16bit S 500 999 C 220 C 255 32bit D 200 D 511 RUN terminal input None Default OK 1 When checking parameters not changing it is not necessary to stop the PLC 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 105 14 4 14 Parameter setting UTILITY FUNCTION INTERFACE COMMUNICATION SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww N a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF Parameter setting screen The following describes the contents displayed on the PLC diagnostics screen and the function of on screen keys 1 Displayed contents No Item 1 Memory capacity ee x 1 tMemory capacity 3K 2 Fi le reg capacity 0 block 3 Latch range M500 M1023 C 100 C 199 16bit S 500 999 C 220 C 255 32bit D 200 D 511 4 TRUN terminal input None 5 Default OK Display contents Sets the memory space number of steps If you touch the K section you can change th
257. ge the clock data on the GOT and controller regardless of clock setting The setup methods of clock data are shown below Time Setting amp display If touch the clock display section the 82 01 2005 12 34 56 TUE Clock setting Adjust keyboard for input is displayed and the clock update stops voltage status GOT internal battery Normal Input time with the keyboard by referring to the table below Input the scheduled time when the operation of is to be carried 516171819 Del lt j gt out since the input time is reflected at the 011121314 Carel Enter time of the operation of The day of the week is displayed automatically according to the input date Key Contents 0 to 9 Key Input numeric value in cursor position gt Key Move the cursor Move the cursor to the left by one character when Del Key is touched while inputting year Del Key month day time minutes seconds Carry out nothing when touched other than when inputting the above Close the keyboard after the input time is displayed in clock display Enter Key The update of the clock display does not restart even if the keyboard is closed The update of the clock display restarts with the operation of Cancel the input time and returns the time of clock display to the time at which the keyboard was displayed and close the keyboard Cancel Key The update
258. gner2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals None No adjustment of clock data 12 1 Time Setting and Display 12 2 12 1 3 Clock setting operations z O oO Z 5 ms gt E e 3 z O Su 50 Z See zk e O5 w 020 Q Zz Soo Ss Fe mja Mow AON ip oO Z WwW 9 SE 2 Si 2 gt gt yo S EG Ly aS a ease LN FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 12 3 Time Setting amp display D If touch the setup item the setup contents Clock setting Adjust 02 01 2005 12 34 56 GOT internal battery voltage status is changed THU Adjust Broadcast Adjust Broadcast None Norma If touch OK button the setup contents is OK reflected With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed If touch X button without touching OK button the dialogue box shown on the left value will be canceled is displayed OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed ox Point Cancel Cancel button The time display and setting screen is displayed If touch button GOT restarts After restart GOT operates with the
259. h the registered keyword only the following operations in subsection 14 3 27 can be allowed Other modes Error step reading Buffer memory overall monitor Time monitor PLC No setting Main sub switching 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 5 Operation of keyword input 14 53 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op Ss 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF Point f When you forgot the keyword entered in the ACPU e Even if you are unsure of the keyword entered in the ACPU you cannot delete it independently If deleting user data including sequence programs does not cause any inconvenience to you clear delete the entered keyword by lt PLC memory all clear gt Note that lt PLC memory all clear gt clears user data including sequence programs as well For further information about PLC memory all clear see the following L gt Subsection 14 3 19 PLC memory all clear e When you know the keyword and want to change it or add a new keyword see the following L 3 Subsection 14 3 21 Common operation 14 54 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 5 Operation of keyword input 14 3 6 Operation methods Key arrangement and a list of key functions 1 The arrangement and functions of the
260. he Write or Insert mode 2 Check the RAM mounting 3 Check the setting of the memory protect switch in the CPU 2 3 1 Check the setting of RAM ROM 2 3 PLC is running Writing insertion or deletion was attempted during running of the CPU Stop the CPU PC No error The PLC number is set to other station Change the PLC number and set the station for access to the host Continued to next page 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 79 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x 8 W pa oO L l Ww op Ss 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF Error message Description Corrective action The value exceeding the range of the program capacity Reduce the program capacity by K steps for KS over by K steps was attempted to be set setting The value exceeding the range of the file The value exceeding the range of the file register i f KP over register capacity by K points was attempted capacity by K points was attempted to be set to be set Not available for QnACPU Set the PLC No The CPU at the list edit destination is QnACPU Set the PLC number and change the station for access The keyw
261. he number of the set points of the recipe device within the specified range There is no empty area space in D drive If the alarm log file located in the D drive needs to be backed up copy it to Capacity shortage of user s 571 the CF card with the utility and then format the D drive memory RAM ee i If the recipe function is used to read devices format the D drive and then read again to create the recipe data 18 6 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection When connect GOT and PLC CPU with bus connection and the cause is not clear in 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm execute the following troubleshooting Refer to the following for details concerning the bus connection L gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual 18 3 1 Locating error positions Explanation regarding the method of specifying the error part Please refer to User s Manual of used PLC CPU for details related to the PLC CPU error and special register 1 How to locate error positions a Use of peripheral devices Using the peripheral devices such as GX Developer check what type of the error occurs on the PLC CPU and based on the error message on the PLC CPU check each module and cable for installation and earthing statuses 2 Error timing Check the timing of errors 1 An error occurs when the power is turned on or immediately after the PLC is reset The error may be detected by the initial processing
262. hen comments are displayed Up to eight devices can be displayed at a time monitor module one word Up to four devices can be displayed at a time monitor module two word Indicates CC Link connection via G4 14 32 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 15 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions 14 2 16 Procedure for batch monitor basic operation z O oO Z 5 ms gt e z BAT MON Su 50 Zz lt 0 5u When no devices OSa are enierad When devices are entered a STEN ORM SET E BATCH MONITOR Ll Sam clio SEE NetNo O ST FF CPUNo 0 Q Z5n MENU 482 ITEM TuE Touch Mow ole aon 7 9 z Zz FEA HUD naa lt a oak 0f5 Touch Touch Touch A If necessary perform Quick test If necessary switch the screen display a Zz operation Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the z 3 Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test display format DEC HEX and a a operation of monitor devices comment no comment display n Q y z If necessary perform the following Entering monitor devices Enter the initial device name and a device number you want to monitor L3 Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices a Test operation 3 Section 14 2 24 Test operation x W pa oO L Ww
263. hing 14 10 Displaying device comments Displaying word device and buffer memory values in decimal or hexadecimal 1 The present value of V and Z cannot be changed Bus connection Direct CPU connection 2 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 3 When a QCPU redundant system is used data of the set value cannot be changed 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 1 Specifications Computer link connection CC Link connection G42 GOT multidrop connection Reference Subsection 14 2 10 Subsection 14 2 14 Subsection 14 2 17 Subsection 14 2 21 Subsection 14 2 24 Subsection 14 2 8 Subsection 14 2 7 Required Extended function OS 1 The Extended function OS shown in the table below is required Extended function OS OS memory space user area Option function board System monitor OKB Not required 2 Install the Extended function OS Install System monitor Extended function OS in the GOT For a detailed installation procedure see the following GT Designer2 Version o Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Devices that can be monitored For further information about the monitor device names that can be monitored and the scope see the following L gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 6 Access range When the GOT i
264. hose for increasing the SEO efficiency in troubleshooting age The following items can be realized with the debug function Zau Items Contents System monitor The device of PLC CPU or buffer memory of the intelligent function module can be monitored and tested P A list editor The sequence program of ACPU can be list edited ONS FX list editor The sequence program of FX PLC can be list edited Fug ao xia n ae 14 1 2 Display operation of debug az Main menu Debug amp self check Self check 3 Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu ebug amp self check Debug self check Debug Z z a o Touch a debug fay function to operate TE etl A list editor P list editor 1 Touch Debug amp self check Display Debug x O W T O Wwe WW Example of system monitor E fe CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 1 Debug 14 1 14 1 1 Debug functions 14 2 System Monitor The system monitor function is capable of monitoring and changing the devices within a target controller It is intended to troubleshoot the controller system and to streamline maintenance operations By installing the system monitor an extended function OS from drawing software into the GOT you can monitor and test the devices of the controller and the buffer memory of the intelligent function module Any device on four dedicated screens can be monitored The system monitor function
265. ication driver assigned to the channel can be changed using the communication setting To change the communication driver it is required to pre install the communication driver to be changed in the GOT K gt Section 10 1 4 Operation of communication setting 2 Standard interface display box Communication interface included as standard in GT1100 a GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD The standard interface includes the following three types RS232 For communication with PC drawing software PLC microcomputer bar code reader RFID and other equipment RS422 For communication with PLC and microcomputer USB For communication with PC drawing software GOT front face GOT rear face USB interface Standard interface mini RS 422 interface Standard interface RS 232 interface Standard interface 10 2 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 3 Description of communication setting screen b GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Standard interfaces have the following three types 2 BUS For communication with PLC x RS232 For communication with PC drawing software and barcode reader RFID 2 USB For communication with PC drawing software 10 ESS OFF CF CARD a O x 9 r Q 1S LO Zz ita Lu Ee Lu Zn
266. ices are entered J l are already entered NetNo aE FF CPUNo g 1 0 NOL 0 BM 0 BM 9 0 MENU MENU Touch D TEST FORM SET Touch Touch Touch Y If necessary perform Quick test operation If necessary switch the screen display lt gt Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the operation of monitor devices display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display If necessary perform the following Entering monitor devices L gt Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices As shown below set a unit and buffer memory VONo Set the initial device number of the buffer memory in decimal Set the first two digits of the three digit initial I O signal of the module Test operation lt gt Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation 14 40 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 23 Procedure for BM monitor basic operation 14 2 24 Test operation N WARNING Before performing the quick test operations of the system monitor function such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation metho
267. icettiacidecicsdooteassatetetansdasseniacssunnide EAA E E E RE EA A 1 REVISIONS corea a a a ern one ete A 6 INTRODUC TION tec leaiasctarddcorcanctcatumeicacsedsadtliniadteudaanidaetiamhonsduadadssutinalsiakawtdadsbanaisintnelatnkide A 8 OUTLINE PRECAUTIONS ereinen caen A 8 CONTENTS r E E E e e A 9 ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS inniicessicdicaieoadcoaiasatandpandaschenetiadscmtnustieaneseland A 17 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL ss scts iacscivks potuseactaucvesevenenassedatescveasviassdusnceecmucseeunisaiade A 22 1 OVERVIEW sorcis ieia i a 1 1 to 1 5 NSW FEatUrES eiiie a a a a E aa 1 4 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure icc recncctnsecciic tes sxesteeceecateared aniisi 1 5 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION c cseeeeeeee 2 1 to 2 13 2 1 Overall Configuration emcee eres rere mene neers erie ere ene ma ne 2 1 2 2 Component List aainicassnty ani e E a ageboe ketenes anaaneaeatsiocas ietcnaeacitehon 2 2 22 TOOT GTI Sener meee reer mere nT ere Perr ry PereD rte nr a E E 2 4 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 cccececeeeceecee cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaeceeeeeeeeeeesececneuecaeeeeeeeeeetees 2 5 3 SPECIFICATIONS srssewinstpaasatiostinntausmdicincaicunanewonia 3 1 to 3 9 3 1 General Specifications 25 ccsnusarcncauntacinanastanasaieiadaasesdddanaieduaidadandeuddessabiaaatacadidediandmeaiedaawn 3 1 3 2 Performance Specifications a caiucatstns as Sicilia bates datcusasltd nciaihadiiieytanlcptyabauiaateanelbdentdcatosatactesons 3 2 3 3 Built in In
268. ightness contrast setting lt Section 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment Invert colors 11 7 GOT setup Display be Language English Opening screen time 5 Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display ON Brightness contrast Setting Invert Colors OFF 0 With do not push OK button if you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK Cancel o 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 3 Display setting operations Ch 611150 Setting item is changed if setting item is touched ON C OFF Setting contents are defined if OK button is touched X button is touched without touching OK button the dialogue mentioned left is displayed OK button The change contents are canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The display setting screen is displayed 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup screens after completing the setting of all items to change with X button GOT restarts and reflects the setting contents 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 2 1 Brightness contrast adjustment function Brightness or contrast can be adjusted Function Contents Brightness setting Brightness of display part can be adjusted by 8 levels Contrast of display part can
269. igit for a sign are set Entry example 12345 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign are set Entry example 123456789 8 Word device present value err F D displayed in the number entry box indicates that the entry is decimal Hexadecimal number 16 bit one word module Four digits are set Entry example H AB12 32 bit two word module Eight digits are set Entry example H ABCDE123 H displayed in the number entry box indicates that the entry is hexadecimal 9 Initial I O signal of module Set the first two digits of the three digit initial I O signal of the module 10 Initial device number of buffer memory Set the number in a decimal number 1 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 14 44 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 27 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen 14 2 28 Test operation procedure Zz O Test operation takes place by setting on the setting key window screen the name and number of a device S initial device number of the buffer memory and the initial I O of the module or entering change values z This subsection takes a change of set values as an example to describe the test operation procedure S Touch the SET VAL key on the test menu screen zs The setting key window screen appears Zz Using the lt and gt keys move the cursor to the item you want to set 2 lt q The keyboard displ
270. ih 3 GT15 QC350BS 35m EE Bus cable for connection to QnA ACPU motion controller A series sold separately Product name Model name Cable length Description GT15 A1SC07B 0 7m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU motion GT15 A1SC12B 1 2m i controller CPU A series and GOT Small CPU GT15 A1SC30B 3m connection cable GT15 A1SC50B 5m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU and GOT Inter GOT GT15 A1SCO5NB 0 45m i For connecting QNAS AnSCPU motion connection cable GT15 A1SCO7NB 0 7m apples controller CPU A series and A7GT CNB GT15 A1SC30NB 3m GT15 A1SC50NB 5m For connecting QnAS AnSCPU and A7GT CNB GT15 C12NB 1 2m For connecting QnA ACPU motion controller GT15 C30NB 3m CPU A series expanded base and GOT GT15 C50NB 5m GT15 AC06B 0 6m GT15 AC12B 1 2m For connecting QnA ACPU motion controller meMe CEU GT15 AC30B 3m CPU A series expanded base and A7GT CNB connection cable GT15 AC50B 5m GT15 A370C12B S1 1 2m For connecting motion controller CPU A series GT15 A370C25B S1 2 5m basic base and GOT GT15 A370012B 1 2m For connecting motion controller CPU A series GT15 A370C25B 25m basic base and A7GT CNB GT15 C100EXSS 1 10 6m For QnAS AnSCPU motion controller CPU A SnekEPU L series to GOT long distance connection W fi a GT15 C200EXSS 1 20 6m For A7GT CNB to GOT long distance ene eae connection Combination of GT15 FXCNB and GT15 C300EXSS 1 30 6m GT15 COBS 2 2 Component List
271. il Corporation former Yamatake Corporation OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORATION KOYO El Abbreviation of KOYO ELECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO LTD SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp Manufacturing Systems Corporation JTEKT Abbreviation of JTEKT Corporation SHINKO Abbreviation of Shinko Technos Co Ltd CHINO Abbreviation of CHINO CORPORATION TOSHIBA Abbreviation of TOSHIBA CORPORATION TOSHIBA MACHINE Abbreviation of TOSHIBA MACHINE CO LTD HITACHI IES Abbreviation of Hitachi Industrial Equipment Systems Co Ltd HITACHI Abbreviation of Hitachi Ltd FUJI Abbreviation of FUJI ELECTRIC CO LTD PANASONIC Abbreviation of Panasonic Corporation PANASONIC INDUSTRIAL DEVICES SUNX Abbreviation of Panasonic Industrial Devices SUNX Co Ltd YASKAWA Abbreviation of YASKAWA Electric Corporation YOKOGAWA Abbreviation of Yokogawa Electric Corporation ALLEN BRADLEY Abbreviation of Allen Bradley products manufactured by Rockwell Automation Inc GE Abbreviation of GE Intelligent Platforms LS IS Abbreviation of LS Industrial Systems Co Ltd SCHNEIDER Abbreviation of Schneider Electric SA SICK Abbreviation of SICK AG SIEMENS Abbreviation of Siemens AG RKC Abbreviation of RKC INSTRUMENT INC HIRATA Abbreviation of Hirata Corporation MURATEC Abbreviation of Muratec products manufactured by Muratec Automation Co Ltd PLC Abbreviation of programmable controller Control equipment Generic term for cont
272. ime 5 z GoT setup Di splay If touching the setting time numerical E Saeed Erelish keyboard is displayed Input numeric with Opening screen time the keyboard Screen save time zZ Screen save backlight 2 lt q Battery alarm display So LO Sey GOT setup Di splay 2 Setting contents are defined if OK button 9 Language English is touched 28x Opening screen time 5 Sec zsz Q Screen save time 0 Min O None Saig Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display ON Brightness contrast Setting o gt OK z gt EKA Fug HEA sas 8 Oxun If button is touched without touchin With do not push OK button tL 9 if you close the screen the changed OK button the dialogue box shown on 2 value will be canceled the left is displayed 2 0K payeo lt lt OK button The changed value is al no canceled and the screen Oy wo is closed T Cancel Cancel button The display setting screen is displayed gt D 4 If close the display setting and GOT setup 5 w screens after completing the setting of all z N items to change with X button GOT 5 restarts and reflects the setting contents 2 Z O 59 2y BS Ta O oa 8 Q ee o8z SS Ooo Bae ox e 285 11 1 Display Settings 11 4 11 1 3 Display setting operations Screen save backlight Battery alarm display
273. int P Authorized representative in Europe e This product is designed for use in industrial applications e Authorized Representative in the European Community Mitsubishi Electric Europe B V Gothaer Str 8 40880 Ratingen Germany 5 2 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive The EMC Directive specifies that products placed on the market must be so constructed that they do not cause excessive electromagnetic interference emissions and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference immunity The applicable products are requested to meet these requirements The paragraphs 1 through 3 summarize the precautions on conformance to the EMC Directive of the machinery constructed using the GOT The details of these precautions has been prepared based on the requirements and the applicable standards control However we will not assure that the overall machinery manufactured according to these details conforms to the above mentioned directives The method of conformance to the EMC Directive and the judgment on whether or not the machinery conforms to the EMC Directive must be determined finally by the manufacturer of the machinery 5 1 5 1 UL cUL Standards 5 2 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive Standards applicable to the EMC Directive The following products have shown compliance through direct testing to the identified standards and design analysis forming a technical construction file to the European
274. intended to troubleshoot the PLC system and to streamline maintenance operations By installing list editor for MELSEC A an Option OS from drawing software into the GOT you can edit the ACPU QCPU A mode PLC program The features of the MELSEC A list editor are described below Parameters and sequence programs are easy to maintain You can check or partly correct change or add PLC CPU parameters and sequence programs simply by operating keys You can easily edit sequence programs without preparing any peripheral unit other than the GOT Example of changing sequence program commands LD xo Changed ip xo OUT Y20 Bp MOV DO LD Xt LD Xt Other stations are accessible D1 You can edit the sequence program for other stations in the data link system containing the GOT or GOT connected station network system or CC Link system Help function A convenient help function is supported which enables you to read write insert and delete data as you select menus Comment for each device can be displayed Comment of the device at the cursor position can be displayed W 9 OUT M50 z 10 MOV 10 gt D1 Current value Comment of D1 is displayed 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 49 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SEC
275. ion F or later 2 Checking method of hardware version Confirm the hardware version with the products rating plate GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX SIN 540001 BC BG T Hardware version MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN 8 16 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 9 1 Serial multi drop connection unit 8 9 2 Applicable serial multi drop connection unit The following serial multi drop connection unit is applicable Model GT01 RS4 M 8 9 3 Part name Contents For GOT multi drop connection 1 90 Ses cover is installed e Protective cover is removed O GT01 RS4 M 5 6 RDA RDB SDA SDB SG O EES N 2 4 5 A 9 12 10 11 No Name Specifications 1 Installation hole for the main unit Installation hole POWER Lit in green when the power is properly supplied 2 LED SD Lit in green when the data is being sent to PLC RD Lit in green when the data is being received from PLC ERROR Lit or blinking depending on the status Can be selected among 1109 OPEN and 3309 3 Terminating resistor selector set to OPEN by default 4 Connector for PLC communication D sub 9 pin male For RS 232 connection
276. ion level 2 or better Pollution level 1 An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist Pollution level 2 An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust Generally this is the level for inside the control box equivalent a control room or on the floor of a typical factory Pollution level 3 An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Pollution level 4 Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment Grounding It is necessary to use the GOT grounding terminal only when it is in the grounded condition Be sure to ground the grounding for the safety reasons and EMC Directives Functional grounding Improves the noise resistance 5 2 EMC DIRECTIVE 5 2 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive 5 2 2 System Configuration when EMC Directive is Applicable Connection conditions and models where the EMC Directive is applicable are shown below Available April 2005 ff About models applicable to the EMC Directive The following table lists the modules compliant with the EMC Directive O Compliant with EMC Directive X Not compliant with EMC Directive 6 Item EMC Directive Hardware version z 3 Bic GT1155 QTBD O A 5 GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD O B GT1155 QTB
277. ioration in the waterproof function the oil performance and the medicine performance e It is not the one to guarantee all customer s environments Moreover it is not likely to be able to use it in the environment to which oil splashes for a long time and the environment with which Oilmist is filled O P20 Shit 6 8 8 Protective cover for oil 8 15 8 8 2 Installation procedure 8 9 Serial Multi Drop Connection Unit 8 9 1 Serial multi drop connection unit GOT multi drop connection is a communication method for 1 N communication by connecting multiple GOTs to one PLC using the GT01 RS4 M serial multi drop connection module For details of GOT multidrop connection refer to the following GOT1000 Series Connection Manual e GT Designer2 e GT Designer3 e Communication driver e Communication driver e Communication interface e Communication interface Serial multi drop connection module O Connect to the PLC 6 Ca T ELR Varies according to the connection type 2000 FEF RS 485 cable lt MAX500m gt Point 1 GOTs supporting the GOT multi drop connection The followings are the GOTs compatible with the GOT multi drop connection GOT Hardware version GT1155 QTBD Hardware version C or later GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Hardware vers
278. iting WRITE mode For insertion INSERT mode Li Input the device name and gt P SP device number 4 D double word command and P pulse execution format command can also be input after the applied instruction number is input Inputting in the order P gt D is also possible 2 When a command specifies multiple devices for operations input the SP key followed by the device name and device number Point P 1 Moving the cursor to the position to write the command When starting to write a command place the cursor on the command line the line on which the step number is displayed You cannot write a command with the cursor on any other line Command line Place the cursor on this line Operand set value line Cannot operate on this line 2 Commands using a text string constant for a command operand such as ASC command With the MELSEC FX list editor text string constants cannot be written as operands such as ASC commands Use GX Developer for writing such commands 2 Example Input DMOVP DO D2 4 SOE Set the lt WRITE WRITE or L INSERT mode withla or v move the cursor to the position to overwrite insert the command 0 H Hn a 1 The MOV command is FNC12 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 99 14 4 9 Writing commands UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY
279. itor for MELSEC A Option OS is installed in the GOT Start Turn on the power to the GOT Starting from the utility Display the utility After the utility is displayed touch Debug amp self check Debug gt MELSEC A List editor from the Main Menu For how to display the utility refer to the user s manual of the GOT to be used switch MELSEC A List editor Starting from the special function set in the project data Touch the special function switch Refer to the following manual for how to set the special function switch GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions Read the PLC and display the sequence program When no keyword is entered in the target PLC When a keyword is entered in the target PLC Initial information displayed in the display area Enter the keyword Subsection 14 3 5 Operation of keyword input MODE SELECTION READ INS PARAM PRESS MODE KEY Point 1 How to display the utility For how to display the utility refer to the following Section 9 3 Utility Display 2 If the project data has not been downloaded The A list editor can be started from the utility even if the project data has not been downloaded to the GOT 14 52 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 4 Display 14 3 5 Operation of keyword input
280. itor when the system monitor function is executed 14 2 11 Information displayed on the entry monitor screen and key functions 1 The information displayed on the Entry Monitor screen is described below For the key functions see the page that follows 1 Displays a network No 2 Displays a station No 3 Displays a CPU No DEVICE MONITOR i DEVICE MONITOR ee E UNo NetNo O JST FF CPUNo 0 gt 7 ba Comments displayed 4 Displays a comment 5 Displays a data range No comments displayed 6 Displays a word device value 7 Displays bit device on off 9 Displays a device name 8 Displays a device No 0 10 Displays a monitor display area For further information about items 1 to 10 shown above see the page that follows 14 26 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 10 Entry monitor 2 The following table describes the key functions displayed on the Entry Monitor screen z Key switch Function 2 Activates the Quick test operation Z TEST m ma 7 Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices gt Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the system z MENU monitor function 2 L 3 Subsection 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation Switches the screen to the display format switching screen
281. itsubishi Electric e This product has been manufactured under strict quality control However when installing the product where major accidents or losses could occur if the product fails install appropriate backup or failsafe functions in the system e When using this product combining other products please confirm the standard and the code or regulation which a user should suit Moreover please confirm the compatibility of this product to the system machine and apparatus with which a user is used for user itself e If in doubt at any stage of the installation of the product always consult a professional electrical engineer who is qualified and trained to the local and national standards If in doubt about the operation or use please consult the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor e Since the example indicated by this manual technical bulletin the catalog etc is reference please use it after confirming the function and safety of equipment and system when employing Mitsubishi Electric will accept no responsibility for actual use of the product based on these illustrative examples e About this manual content specification etc may be changed without a notice for improvement e The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however you have noticed a doubtful point a doubtful error etc please contact the nearest Mitsubishi Electric distributor CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS a vscccccoab
282. ke valid the upper or lower function of keys available for two different purposes to operate the MELSEC A list editor 1 2 Switching the upper and lower functions of mode keys In general the upper functions of mode keys are valid To make the lower function of a mode key valid touch the key and then the mode key During switching of the upper and lower functions of mode keys the mark on the valid keys remains Switching the upper and lower functions of command device keys Switch the upper and lower functions of command device keys using the keys shown below if necessary SHIFT Makes the upper function valid SET Makes the lower function valid The keys shown below can be operated even if the lower function of a key is valid You do not need to operate the key e Comparison symbol keys at the input of comparison operation commands lt gt e Minus key in command source data For further information about the display of valid keys see the following lt gt Subsection 14 3 7 Display format of the display area Valid command device keys after setting each mode Valid command device keys after setting each mode are shown below a Valid keys after setting read write and insert modes The upper functions of the command device keys are valid If necessary switch the upper and lower functions of necessary keys for operation b Valid keys a
283. keys displayed on the MELSEC A List Editor window are described below 3 Command Device keys Display area 4 Control keys 1 Mode keys IMENT ILLER Z CALL RETIDEC J 7 Key name Summary of function Reference READ The key that specifies read or write mode Subsection 14 3 9 WRITE i i A Subsection 14 3 22 Switch the valid key with SHIFT Subsection 14 3 23 eas Subsection 14 3 9 The key that specifies insert or delete mode 1 Mode key INSERT i a AO Subsection 14 3 24 witch the valid key with SHIFT Subsection 14 3 25 PARAM The key that specifies parameter or other mode Subsection 14 3 9 OTHER Switch the upper and lower lines with SHIFT mupsechon tts 20 gt PP l Subsection 14 3 27 2 Help key HELP The key that can operate the help function Subsection 14 3 18 FROM A Key that inputs K H at the input of command device name and constant input l Only when the valid key of upper lower character needs to be switched switching is allowed with input of the END SHIFT and SET keys 3 Command Z Device key RST 0 Key that inputs the command device number and constant l Only when the valid key of upper lower character needs to be switched switching is allowed with input of the MC SHIFT and SET keys F Key that declares start of step number input or automatic scr
284. l 5 Purpose Description GT15 User s Manual GOT1000 Series lt ale GT11 General GT11 User s Manual Connection Manual gt Description m 2 nz Confirming part names and l specifications of the GOT Detailed Overview aa j me 72 Zz Confirming the GOT installation S m method Overview g Confirming the mounting method for communication units or option devices e gt E Confirming the PLC connection 7 method Detailed A Confirming the utility operation eet z z method Detailed 3 O 5 5 OZ t QO eee 56a Confirming error codes system l alarm displayed on the GOT Detailed 1 Stored in the GT Works2 GT Designer2 GT Works 3 GT Designer3 in PDF format 5 3 Other manuals The following manuals are also available The following manuals are stored in the GT Works2 GT Designer2 GT Works3 GT Designer3 in PDF format a GOT1000 Series Gateway Functions Manual Describes how to use the gateway function b GT Simulator 2 Version Operation Manual z Describes how to simulate the created project data with GT Simulator2 c GT Converter2 VersionO Operating Manual Describes how to use the GT Converter2 Zz fe a O 1 1 1 3 1 4 Features Improved monitoring performance and connectivity to FA devices e Multiple languages are displayed using the Unicode2 1 compatible fonts and beautiful characters are drawn using the TrueType and high quality fonts e Two types of display modes are provided 256 color di
285. l Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT 6 2 Panel Cutting Dimensions Make holes in the panel according to the dimensions list below s lu Also ensure 10mm of space in upper and lower parts of the panel for mounting fixtures Horizontal format If the vertical format is selected the dimension must be rotated 90 degrees m O 153 6 03 1228 gt 10 0 4 or more z O S Type Panel thickness mm inch T gt A GT1155 QTBD Ei o GT1155 QSBD ons iS GT1150 QLBD GT1155 QTBDQ Te GT1155 QSBDQ Within 2 0 08 to 4 0 16 a Zz N GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA 3 GT1155 QSBDA 3 10 0 4 GT1150 QLBDA a or more Unit mm inch M ing Positi 6 3 Mounting Position lt Zz amp When mounting the GOT the following clearances must be maintained from other structures and devices The below diagram represents a horizontal installation The same clearances must be maintained when rotating the GOT 90 degrees clockwise for a vertical installation A Z gt 22 Installation Environment A D B When the CF When the CF E E 2 f aa card is not used card is used 2 2 o JG In the presence of radiated noise or 50 mm 1 97 80 mm 3 14 50 mm 1 97 100 mm 3 93 heat generating equipment nearby or more or more or more 2 100 mm 3 93 or more 6
286. ler CPU Q series bus O A9GT QCNB z connector box connection when the cable is longer than 13 2 m Wi O o Bus connector adapter box sold separately 2 Product name Model name Contents Used for QnA ACPU motion controller CPU A series bus connection Bus connector A7GT CNB when the cable is longer than 13 2 m For changing a large connector ui adapter box to a small connector g a Protective sheet Sold separately Product name Model name Contents GT11 50PSCB Clear 5 sheets Z u m GT11 50PSGB Antiglare 5 sheets A D Protective sheet 5 7 protective sheet Bae GT11 50PSCW Clear Frame white 5 sheets 2 Z a ifs GT11 50PSGW Antiglare Frame white 5 sheets 29 USB environmental protection cover Sold separately Product name Contents 5 5 lt USB environmental Replacement environmental protection cover for USB interface on f GT11 50UCOV h j i protection cover 5 the GOT main unit front side For complying IP67 9 5 At GOT purchase it is installed in the main unit Protective cover for oil Sold separately Product name Contents Protective cover for oil GT05 50PCO 5 7 protective cover for oil Z a Zz O amp 2 2 Component List 2 12 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 Drawing software Sold separately Product name Model name Contents SW O D5C GTD2 E GT Designer2 q Drawing software for GOT1000 GOT900 series ZC indicates the version 6 d SW O DNC GTD3 E i GT Designer
287. link unit for local station ON Error _ i is judged at the CPU Replace the link unit OFF Online a i The control depends on whether the local station itself is ON Offline station to j M9240 Link status i online or offline or in the station to station mode or the self station test or self loopback mode Check the mode switch loopback test OFF Not executed ON Forward loop test PERT The control depends on whether the local station itself is M9257 Loop test status and reverse loop test are being executed executing the forward loop test or the reverse loop test If an error code not listed in the previous page is displayed contact the nearest of our system service centers agents and branch offices 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 83 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND lt O W E uw W 9 O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor The MELSEC FX list editor enables you to change the sequence program in the FX PLC This function is intended to troubleshoot the PLC system and to streamline maintenance operations By installing list editor for MELSEC FX an Option OS from drawing software int
288. ll Door QA oono LA NONON o D 5 SeS S i eee 4 Lee ou SF o oO 5 pad o 2 44 44 44 44 44 D Q z z Peto Q 32 3 x x c gt Q Mi mi oo oO ras 4 14 63 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 10 Command input procedures 5 For extension timer extension counter of AnA and AnUCPU When the extension timer T256 to T2047 and the extension counter C256 to C1023 are input as the first device of the command input the first device and the device number Ex When OUT T256 D500 is input Ww 9 9 OUT M10 a 100 e 101 PNOP 102 NOP gt 2h 5 hj 6h co W 101 OUT T256 a 102 D500 The device D500 for the T256 setting value 103 PhP NOP on the parameter is automatically displayed 104 NO P 1 O When the extension timer and the extension counter are used be sure to set the oin 257 points or more and the setting value device D W R on the parameter for both the timer and the counter 14 3 11 Action if an incorrect key is input If an incorrect key is input cancel the input contents Operation 1 Before touching the GO key before reading writing the input contents Before touching the GO key touch the key 2 After touching the key after reading writing the input contents Write the com
289. ll key 11 12 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 1 Display setting functions Setting regarding display is possible The items which can be set are shown below Items Opening screen time Screen save time Contents The title display period at the main unit boot can be set The period from the user stops the touch panel operation till the screen save function starts can be set Setting range 0 to 60 seconds 1 lt At factory shipment 5 seconds gt 0 to 60 minutes lt At factory shipment 0 minutes gt When set to 0 the function becomes invalid Screen save backlight Whether turn ON or OFF the backlight simultaneously at the screen save function start can be specified ON OFF lt At factory shipment OFF gt Language Confirmation of the current language and switching language can be performed regarding with the language displayed by utility and dialogue ETT Japanese _ Salish English _ 8 Chinese Simplified SEO korean MS German Factory setting User selected language Battery alarm display Whether to display system alarm when the voltage of the GOT internal battery has dropped can be specified ON OFF lt At factory shipment OFF gt Brightness Contrast The brightness or contrast can be adjusted lt gt Section 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment Invert colors 2 c GT1150 User creation screen and utility screen can be set to be highligh
290. llation is completed the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed Check that the message is displayed and turn the GOT power OFF When the installation is completed the power LED blinks 6 Remove the CF card after turning the power OFF If the power is turned on again the screen shown on the left is displayed The GOT goes into its factory shipped condition As necessary install each OS Standard monitor OS communication driver etc or download a project data For the installation method of each OS or the download method of project data refer to the following manual C gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals When CoreOS cannot be installed When CoreOS cannot be installed check the following contents When CoreOS cannot be installed even after the following contents are checked there may be a hardware problem Please consult your nearest sales office or FA Center Description Action The installation of CoreOS is not executed after the CF card is inserted to GOT Check that the CF card access switch of GOT is ON If it is OFF turn it ON Memory card write from drawing software may not be normally completed Execute memory card write from drawing software again The following message is displayed on GOT GOT error Contact your local sales office GOT main unit is breakdown Please consult your
291. llowing provides an example of outputting the backlight shutoff detection signal from a FX Series PLC to an external device using system information Condition The Written Device is D20 and all data is used the Select All button is clicked on the setting screen of drawing software for the system information assignment D36 b14 D36b14 Backlight shutoff detection System Signal 2 2 Turned on upon a backlight shutoff Used as shown below in the sequence program RUN monitor M8000 m D36 k4M20 Backlight shutoff detection M34 __ G Output to external device of PLC Activated the output upon battery shutoff detection indicates the output number at which the external device is connected wen Point f Precautions for the backlight shutoff status In the backlight shutoff status the touch key operates Early replacement of backlight is recommended 17 7 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection 17 5 1 Backlight shutoff detection and external alarm 18 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM This chapter describes the error messages and system alarm displayed in the GOT As the error code and error message displaying functions when an error occurs at the GOT or Controller the system alarm is available The error code can also be confirmed in the error code storage area of the system information For details of system alarm and system information refer to the following gt GT Designer2 VersionO
292. m When the user inputs a program the codes entered before a touch on the the 4th bottom line of the display area GO key will appear on If the codes cannot appear on a single line the display on the 4th line only will shift by a single character position to the left each time the user touches a key Each character that goes out of the display area by the left shift operation is retained in the memory L user has entered DMOVP K2147483647 D1000 You can move W in the specified direction right or left with the or key Display of an error message An error message will appear on the 4th line of the display area An error message on the display is cleared when you press any key Then the display resumes the state before the appearance of the error message When an error message is displayed take action according to the procedure described in the following section L 3 Subsection 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 59 14 3 7 Display format of the display area UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 3 8 Switching valid keys upper lower functions Ma
293. m alarm display function System alarm display is the function to display error code and error message when an error occurs in GOT controller or network System alarms can be reset on the System alarm display screen For details of system alarm refer to the following manual L GT Designer2 VersionO Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Functions 14 11 2 Displaying the system alarm display Main menu Debug amp self check 9 3 Utility Display Communication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display Program data control elf check Ss Touch Debug amp self check System alarm display Debug self check System alarm disp Touch System alarm display GOT error Reset When touching Reset the system alarm display on the GOT is reset 307 Monitor device not set 5 42 49 CPU error No Error 14 128 14 11 System Alarm Display 14 11 1 System alarm display function 14 11 3 Operating the system alarm display Zz e oO 5 System Alarm display resetting gt Jebug se check System alarm disp Bx ae 5 Debie celi checi oystesi alarn di n ES amp Eliminate each cause of the system alarm GOT error Reset being occurred 307 Monitor device not set Error causes can be identified by the error gt 15 42 49 code error message and channel No E CPU error displayed on the
294. m is connected to another CPU ON O OFF 5 Comment Displays a comment maximum number of characters 16 one byte characters A comment is displayed when DISPLAY is selected for comment display on the display format switching screen 6 Word device value Decimal number 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 12345 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign are displayed Display example 123456789 Hexadecimal number 16 bit one word module Four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 32 bit two word module Eight digits are displayed Display example H ABCDE123 7 Device No Up to 16 devices can be entered when the data range is word 16 bits Up to eight devices can be entered when the data range is two word 32 bits For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered 8 Device name GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual GT Designer 3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 9 Data range DW Indicates that the device value is a 32 bit two word module Nothing displayed Indicates that the device value is a 16 bit one word module 10 Monitor display area q When no comments are displayed Up to 16 devices can be displayed at a time monitor module one word Up to eight devices can be displayed at a time monitor module two word W
295. m the GOT Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction When installing the option function board or battery or operating the reset switch wear an earth band etc to avoid the static electricity The static electricity can cause the unit to fail or malfunction MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the GOT in the environment that satisfies the general specifications described in this manual Not doing so can cause an electric shock fire malfunction or product damage or deterioration When mounting the GOT to the control panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Securely connect the option function board to the connector provided for the board When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card When inserting a CF card into the GOT push it into the insertion slot until the CF card eject button will pop out Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact When removing a CF card from the GOT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting
296. m the Help function refer to Subsection 14 3 10 Command input 2 procedures Su Zz See _ gt Ene Point gt When the command is input the input details are displayed at the 4th line the lam bottom line on the display In the following description the input of SP key may be omitted when a blank space between the input command and the cursor position is automatically inserted Refer to the example in each description Sz T 1 For command code only ae Seal a When the command available on the keyboard is input araiz Command GO N 2 z Zz Ex When END is input RE HES Ww 112 OUT TO E 2 J13 PNOPR Gok 114 NOP oth END GO 9 lt 3 112 K123 a 2 113 N D D 114 gt NO0P a 115 0 P w TE b When the command not available on the keyboard is input 1 Ex When FOR KS is input x W w 50 OUT Y0022 T 51 gt NOP a 52 NOP i 5 3 NOP H A z 0 n w 51 FOR 2 2 5 1 K 5 69 54 gt NOP On 55 NOP Z gt zs to aD oa CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 61 14 3 10 Command input procedures 2 For command code and device 1 Sas te a y aaa ed arate 11 11 SEE 14 BONN LD X 0 gt GO W 112 K123 a 113 L D x0000 114 gt NOP 115 NOP 3 For commands other than above Input the SP key between the command and the device the sour
297. mand again lt _ gt Subsection 14 4 9 Writing commands Commands finalized by writing and inserting operations are revised overwritten with the program writing Remark When the CLEAR key is input in the parameter mode the GOT stops the process To continue the operation carry on the key input 14 64 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 11 Action if an incorrect key is input 14 3 12 List of functions The table below shows the functions available for each mode Mode mode display Write W Function Writes adds or modifies a program Changes a device used at the selected step in the program Displays a list of instructions that start with the specified character and allows the user to choose from them Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Declares the specified part of the program NOP Displays a comment for the specified device Read R Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Reads a program after allowing the user to specify an instruction used Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a device used Automatically scrolls the display of a program that has been read up to a specified step Corresponds to program read and automatic scroll functions described above Displays a comment for the specified device Insert I Inserts a new program into the displayed program Displays
298. mary battery Initial voltage 3 0V Storage life Approx 5 years Operating ambient temperature of 25 C T For backup of clock data alarm history recipe data Application i i and time action setting value l Remark For the battery directive in EU member states refer to 17 4 A Handling of Batteries Ro and Devices with Built in Batteries in EU Member States 8 4 3 Battery replacement procedure Replace battery periodically at intervals of 4 to 5 years as reference D Turn the GOT power off Open the back cover of the GOT Remove the old battery from the holder 4 Disconnect the old battery connector and insert the new battery connector within 30s Insert the new battery into the holder and close the back cover Turn the GOT power on Check if the battery condition is normal with the utility Refer to the following for the details of battery status display Connector Chapter 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 8 4 Battery 8 4 1 Applicable battery OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS PART NAME STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL INSTALLATION Point 1 Battery life The battery life is approximately 5 years The production date of the optional replacement battery can be confirmed by the lot No marked on the nameplate label affixed on the battery Nameplate Connector Model name LOT lt Jan 2010 o
299. mation Mount the CF card to GOT For the CF card installation removal method refer to the following L gt Section 8 1 CF Card Touch A Standard CF card in the drive selection If touching Upload button the screen shown on the left is displayed 4 If touching button the upload is executed If there is a project data of the same name in the A drive the screen shown on the left is displayed without starting the upload If touching Ok button an overwrite upload is executed to the project data of the same name If touching Cancel button the upload is canceled Q When the upload is completed the dialogue box shown on the left is displayed If touching OK button the dialogue box is closed 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 1 Function of alarm information The alarm log file held by the D drive Internal SRAM is displayed The functions below can be carried out for files Function Contents Reference page Information display of files and fold Displays name data size creation date and time of file or folder 13 24 13 25 olders Deletion Deletes file 13 26 Copy Copys file 13 27 13 4 2 The display operation of alarm information Main menu ICF Section 9 3 Utility Display 5 Communication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display Progran dataggontro Touch Program data control gt ea
300. mation about items 1 to 10 shown above see the page that follows Q ZZ SPO Point P Number of devices displayed on a single screen aon The number of devices displayed on a single screen depends on the setting of the data range as shown below i Word devices 16 bit 16 devices no comments displayed eight devices 25 oO comments displayed nee N Word devices 32 bit Eight devices no comments displayed four devices lt a R comments displayed Ze Bit devices 16 devices no comments displayed eight devices comments displayed For further information about the setting of the data range see the following z gt Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices 5 T 1 x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 31 14 2 15 Information displayed on the Batch Monitor screen and key functions 2 The following table describes the key functions displayed on the Batch Monitor screen Key switch TEST Function Activates the Quick test operation a Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices MENU Switches the screen to the functional change menu screen to activate another monitor function or terminate the system monitor function L3 Subsection 14 2 9 Changing screens common operation FORM S
301. ment display 14 2 19 Procedure for TC monitor basic operation If necessary perform the following Entering monitor devices Enter the initial device name and a device number you want to monitor lt 3 Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Test operation lt 3 Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation Canceling keywords gt Subsection 14 2 20 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords MENU Touch 14 2 20 Procedure for canceling TC monitor keywords When the target controller is a QCPU and a password is entered in the sequence program the keyword must be canceled to display the set values of times and counters The procedure for canceling keywords is described below A TES TEN OR wef Touch SET NetNo OIST FF CPUNo 0 QPG FILE NAME MAIN KEY RD Eee When a password is entered in the sequence program KEY WORD ERR will be displayed Ee ENTRY F E ee EEA 4 E 1 Keyword Release screen Y a D Enter the password entered in the sequence program KEY WORI at 1 EE a Sas e A Z key Touch this key to enter alphabetic ai icy ron te tay wort apnanete a ae characters a to z lowercase O AG Del Enter 0 9 key Touch this key to enter numbers 1 to 9 e Del key Use this key to delete an entered character e
302. ment file and download to GOT 309 Device reading error The error occurred when reading a continuous device Correct device Correct the device 1 Specified base screen window screen does not exist in the project 310 Project data does not exist or out data of range 2 Specified base screen window screen is out of the permissible area Specify the existing base screen window screen No of alarm has exceeded upper The number of alarm histories that can be observed by the alarm history 311 limit display function has exceeded the maximum points 1024 points Delete restored alarm Delete the restored history to decrease the number of alarm histories The collection frequency exceeded the upper limit when Store Memory No of sampling has exceeded and Accumulate Average were set in the scatter graph 312 upper limit 1 Approve Clear trigger setup in the scatter graph Delete collected data 2 Set the Operation at frequency over time and initialize and continue in scatter graph 315 Device writing error Error occurred while writing in the device Correct device Correct the device In indirect specification of comment parts number the data operation Cannot display or input operation 316 j result exceeded the range in which device type can be expressed value Review the data operational expression in order not exceeding the range Review expression f in which the device type can be expressed 320 Specified
303. mer HELP SO k Function indicated at the upper part of each key is f fmov gt lt f e y Function indicated at the lower part of each key is available CALL RET DEC MRD mov gt lt P l J K L M MEP 5 BcD BIN w mPs Nop END FROM Q j RJLsJLr Cu JLv JLwICxJCy UZ Example a key WWOMOIO Ges go i RST ser cJ four SET ANB ORB PLS y t Function indicated at the upper part of the key is ilo 1 2 yT ae Gs 7 ISP JL x eee eee ee es Soe en eee eee i available FROM i a Function indicated at the lower part of the key is oF available Point P To switch between two functions of keys functions indicated at upper and lower parts of the keys press the SHIFT and SET keys L3 Subsection 14 3 8 Switching valid keys upper lower functions 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 57 14 3 7 Display format of the display area COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY INSTALLATION OF UTILITY FUNCTION STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 14 58 2 4 5 6 The cursor appears The cursor appears W and is highlighted during data input Indication of the sele
304. missing bits occurs contact your nearest sales office or FA Center Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements A flicker may be caused in some display colors This is a characteristic of the LCD panel it is not due to a fault or failure of the product 14 7 Drawing Check 14 117 14 7 1 Drawing check function UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa 1S L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 7 3 Display and operation of drawing check Touching Drawing check in the Display check displays the screen describing the drawing check operation Touch the upper right of the screen to start a drawing check Before execute drawing check 1 Touching the upper right part of the screen proceeds to the next check in each step during the drawing ra check Touching the upper left part of the screen returns to the Display check screen Upper left touch Upper right touch position position 2 x For GT1155 256 colors color display blue black red purple green light blue yellow and white is available For GT1150
305. mmunication driver assignment 2 Selectable languages vary depending on the standard fonts that are installed 3 It is necessary to set the security level with drawing software 4 Itis necessary to install the RS 232 connector for test Section 14 10 I O Check 9 2 Utility Function List 9 3 Utility Display To display setting screens for each utility the main menu must displayed first The utility screen is a factory installed horizontal format screen that cannot be edited Main Menu x Communication settin I l Vad g i rr GOT setup ry 1 Time setting amp display 1 ca Program data contro lt A Debug amp self check T Language 2 1 Main menu Main Menu 5 Communication setting GOT setup Time setting amp display ca Program data control A Debug amp self check X 2 Language The menu items that can be selected from the GOT utility are displayed Touching a menu item in the main menu will display the setting screen or following selection screen for the item 2 System message switch button This button switches the language used for the utility screen and system alarms When touching the Language button the Select Language screen is displayed Select Language Q Touch the button of a language to be displayed and then The gt mark moves OK button and the language is selected Tou
306. motion controller CPU A series and GOT When using GT15 CLJEXSS 1 or GT15 CLBS ground the FC wires as shown in the figure below 1 GT15 COEXSS 1 rn ar c115 coBs is oll Hesse Eo aL fe i GT15 EXCNB Y 2SQ wire to the FG Y terminals y O Q to be 28 cm ES O Ground the FG terminal of the power supply terminal block on the GOT FG wires on GT15 CLIBS must be 28 cm or less Leave the FG ground wire on GT15 EXCNB unconnected 4 Connect the FG wire on GT15 COBS on the GOT side to the FG terminal of the power supply terminal block on the GOT 5 Connect the FG wire on GT15 COBS on the PLC side to the FG terminal of the power supply terminal block on the PLC QO Connect the LG and FG terminals on the terminal block and provide a single grounding point for them 2 GT15 COBS For both GOTs provide the same grounding as described in the section 1 above to both GOTs 7 8 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 2 4 Wiring the FG wire of the BUS cable 8 OPTION a 8 1 CF Card The CF card is used to transmit the OS or project data and to save the data of the alarm history function Refer to the following for details Ks Chapter 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL lt Zz 8 1 1 Applicable CF card 5 Th
307. n 12 LD i x 002 ser ats ve rer i i E Se 3 No Item Description Displays a mode for MELSEC FX list editor gt Subsection 14 4 6 Selection and operation of 1 Mode modes Monitor is displayed when the list monitor is executed LF Subsection 14 4 16 List monitor Displays the contents of errors that occur with the MELSEC F X list editor 2 Error message L gt Subsection 14 4 18 Error messages and corrective actions ee Displays the sequence program in list format 12 digits 3 List display area 7 aa i The position line that can be edited is displayed with a bar 4 Key area Displays the keys that can be used with the MELSEC FX list editor 14 90 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 5 Operation procedures Key functions E The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the MELSEC FX list 9 5 editor screen m Z Key Function 5 Selects a mode for MELSEC FX list editor gt Subsection 14 4 6 Selection and operation of modes z ke Displays the PLC diagnostics parameter setting and keyword selection menu Su 50 Sie zZ Switches between command keyboard 1 and command keyboard 2 ZME O5 u OZ wore k Keyboard switching in this section When inputting commands Cancels the key input when only part of the command has been input lt 3 Subsection 14 4 17 Action for an incorrect key input When option menu i
308. n use When the 2 point press installation function is used project data will be installed at the completion of the OS installation When installing the system using the utility screen install the OS and download the project data on their respective operation screens 4 The installation cannot be interrupted The followings should not be performed during the installation of BootOS or standard monitor OS The installation may fail and GOT may not operate e Turning OFF the GOT power e Pressing the reset button of GOT e Turning OFF the CF card access switch Removing the CF card When GOT does not operate due to the failure of the installation follow the procedures mentioned below e When the installation of BootOS is failed Install CoreOS lt gt Section 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS When the installation of standard monitor OS is failed Install BootOS L Section 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on 16 4 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on Zz e The displayed message is different depending on the installation condition of Standard monitor OS When S the screen requesting operation is displayed operate the GOT according to the instructions on the screen R IE Operation procedure 5 Power OFF GOT and CF card access switch Insert the CF card in which 6 BootOS Standard monitor OS or project S
309. n ON the access switch _ Memory card is not formatted or formatted incorrectly 332 Memory media is not formatted Format the memory card 334 Memory media error Memory card is faulty Replace memory media Replace the memory card The BCD BIN conversion disabled data is being displayed input BCD BIN conversion error 345 1 Change the device data to be displayed to the BCD value Correct data H 2 Correct the input value to the 4 digits integer The contents of the recipe file are not normal 351 Recipe file error 1 Confirm the contents of the recipe files in the memory card Confirm content of recipe file 2 Reboot the GOT after deleting the recipe file in the memory card format Recipe file make error Failed to generate recipe file 352 Reboot GOT after inserting Reboot the GOT after installing the memory card memory card n Failed to write in the recipe file Unable to write Recipe file 353 1 Confirm the contents of the memory card Confirm memory card is inserted ae 2 Do not pull out the memory card while recipe is operating Error occurred while writing in the recipe file 354 Recipe file write error Rae p Do not unplug the memory card while recipe is operating Error occurred while writing in the recipe file 1 Do not unplug the memory card while recipe is operating 355 Recipe file read error 2 Confirm the contents device value of the recipe file in the memory ca
310. n about communication units and cables for each connection form see the following 3 GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Controllers that can be edited with the MELSEC FX list editor Target controller FXCPU Connection forms O Available x Unavailable Function name Connection form between GOT and PLC CC Link Name Bus Direct CPU Computer link eonnecton GOT multidrop Description connection connection connection 7 connection G4 Sequence program writing parameter setting PLC diagnostics and keyword x O x x x registration etc MELSEC FX list editor 4 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 Required option OS and option function board The option OS and option function board shown below are required Option OS OS memory space user area Option function board MELSEC FX list editor OKB GT11 50FNB 1 Option OS Install the option OS in the above table to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for installing the option OS _ 3 GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 OS memory space The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to install the option OS to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the user area and information about the data using other user areas lt L gt GT Designer2 V
311. n and Battery Replacement 17 6 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection The backlight is built into GOT for the liquid crystal display When GOT detects backlight shutoff the POWER LED blinks green orange alternately The brightness of the backlight decreases with the lapse of usage period When backlight shutoff is detected or the display becomes unclear replace the backlight For replacement of the backlight contact your nearest sales office or FA Center 1 Life of backlight The usable duration of backlight can be extended by setting to Screen saving backlight off in the utility of GOT GOT set up Refer to the following for details C gt gt Chapter 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP 17 5 1 Backlight shutoff detection and external alarm When the GOT detects a backlight shutoff the system information set with drawing software is turned on You can issue a backlight shutoff of the GOT from the PLC to external devices such as the lamp or buzzer using system information To avoid any screen touch operation by the user who misunderstands it is in screen saving mode install an external alarm and interlock the loads that would cause danger For details of the system information refer to the following L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals pe Hint Example of alarm output to external devices such as lamp or buzzer 5 The fo
312. n be installed on another GOT to create a GOT that has the fs same configuration a Refer to the following section for the Installation function of the GOT Su 50 L gt Section 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card S o E biu 020 13 7 2 Operating the GOT data package acquisition function Q lt 8 Fe Main menu Program data control Sai L7 Section 9 3 Utility Display I Nenory card Format amp 2 Ea e peg sas n Touch the GOT data Sak Touch w p package acquisition Dgn GOT data package acquisition GOT data package acquisition GOT s OS project data are copied to the CF card This CF card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button e NaN Py AND BATTERY Select Drive A Built in CF card GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 7 GOT data package acquisition 13 33 13 7 1 The function of GOT data package acquisition 13 7 3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition GOT data package acquisition GOT s OS project data are copied to the CF card This CF card can be use for installation when the GOT is turned on Please select a destination and push Copy button as A Built in CF card Description Setting items Select Drive Displays the drive to which the user can copy the OS and data A Sta
313. n error CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 103 14 4 13 PLC diagnostics i Remark Error details ds For details on an FX PLC error refer to the manual below lt 3 Programming manual for the FX CPU used 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the PLC diagnostics screen Function Exits the PLC diagnostics 14 104 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 13 PLC diagnostics 14 4 14 Parameter setting Sets FX PLC parameters Parameters that can be changed and change targets 1 Parameters that can be changed The parameters that can be changed with the MELSEC FX list editor and the target FX PLCs are as follows O Can be set changed X Cannot be set changed Target CPU Item FX0 S mon FX1 FX2 C FX1S FX1N C FX2N C FX3S FX3G C FX3U C Memory space setting x O O x x O O O O File register space setting o x O O O O O O O Latch range setting x2 O O x x2 O X x O RUN terminal setting x x X O O O Q O O Initialization of parameters O O O O O O O O C 1 When connecting an FX0 S set 0 Setting other than 0 causes a parameter error 2 When the parameters are initialized the display on the MELSEC FX list editor is different from the FX PLC default values but do not change the latch range Changing the latch range causes an error 2 Chan
314. n in Remedy 1 1 is not feasible follow Remedy 1 2 lu aA W gt Connection cable Connection cable e Ground cable from the panel that houses control z Ground cable from equipment e the panel that Use the thickest houses control cable possible SB equipment W E N Use the thickest ae cable possible Remedy 1 1 7 Remedy 1 2 7 2 If taking Remedy 1 worsens noise interference taking Remedy 2 may alleviate it 3 ira O e Remedy 2 Refer to the figures Remedy 2 1 and 2 2 below a Attach a ferrite core to the cable if noise from the GOT panel has adverse effects on the GOT when Remedy 1 is taken Wind the wire around the ferrite core several times approx 3 times if a ferrite core is used If the wiring method as shown in Remedy 2 1 is not feasible follow Remedy 2 2 W lt Zz Connection cable Connection cable k a Ground cable from the panel that houses control Ground cable from equipment FG om the panel that ROLES control Use the thickest 2 F equipment cable possible Fertite core F 7 Z Use the thickest Zo cable possible Panel grounding san Remedy 2 1 Remedy 2 2 7 rA fe si lt op Z 2a zZ x Zz O amp O 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 5 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 2 1 Wiring inside Run power lines servo amplifier drive wires and communication cables so that they do not cross each other Noise interference tha
315. n of a desired language the language is selected and the Aaa f j screen returns to the Display screen nglis 9 Select Language sto fay Zz ger gt 42 Tu Mow AON N gt Z gt 4 Eug eo Eg x jenlay xng COT setup Di splay Setting contents are defined if OK button Soe 7 JZE Aeree English is touched The language display does not Opening screen time 5 Sec change till is carried out Screen save time 0 Min 0 None al Screen save backlight OFF Z Battery alarm display ON z oO Brightness contrast Setting A K ma TO If X button is touched without touchi With do not push OK button 4 X button is oui ed without touching T if you close the screen the changed OK button the dialogue box shown on Q value will be canceled the left is displ mi 0K e left is displayed b OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed 3 Q Cancel Cancel button The display setting screen L5 is displayed oo BS If close the display setting and GOT setup nd n oa screens after completing the setting of all items to change with x button GOT N restarts and reflects the setting contents og lt 583z oz E RE 235 11 1 Display Settings 11 6 11 1 3 Display setting operations Brightness Contrast Refer to the following for br
316. n the keyboard touch the MORE key to switch to the other keyboard When searching for an applied instruction touch the FNC key and input the applied instruction number When searching for a label touch P or _ and input the pointer number Cz Subsection 14 4 9 j Writing applied instructions 2 Input only when searching for commands requiring a device name and device number 3 After the search results are displayed you can continue searching with the same conditions by touching the GO key Touching any key other than the GO key ends the search 2 Example Searching for LD M8000 Search command lt WRITE gt LD MODE Set the READ gt 4 READ mode 1 Select the command 1 1 to search for I Point f Pointer P 1 searches Continue to search with the same conditions For pointer searches only labels are searched Pointers specified as operands in applied instructions are not searched 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 8 Searching commands and devices UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF Device search 1 Operation Spree os ae al i gt 6P gt enura Tea 60 I Read mode bees eee nee eS
317. n the left appears status before the mode selection MODE SELECTION READ INS PARAM PRESS MODE KEY O If necessary start the next operation 14 72 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 19 PLC memory all clear 14 3 20 List of operation procedures z O O 14 3 21 Common operation z ms gt e Details Purpose Procedures key input sequence Input when the Input of keyword at keyword is p y Keyword gt GO Zz start up registered in the 2 ACPU Su 220 Mode selection 240Z PARR Mode key READ INSERT PARAM 205 Switching of valid Select the mode Sein key SHIFT gt Mode key WRITE DELETE OTHERS oza Switch the valid Switchi vali key function witching of vali indicated atthe SHIFT or SET e K upper lower part of S gt Basic gen the key by a user ZRS operation IgE Aeonin i Perform the Ont ction for incorrec 5 cat operation for CLEAR Mode key or SHIFT Mode key cow inpu p incorrect key input Perform operation Perform program display gt LHELP gt 1 gt 1 gt 1 gt Input the capital letter e Operation of with the Help operation in the Write Insert mode of the command tans command help KW fun
318. ndamentals 2 Uploading from other GOT BootOS or Standard monitor OS has been installed lt gt Chapter 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Point f Precautions on writing BootOS Standard monitor OS in CF card When writing BootOS Standard monitor OS etc in the CF card be sure to execute by the utility of other GOT or drawing software The installation is not executed properly with the CF card to which uploaded from the utility of GOT or copied by softwares other than drawing software Note the available capacity of the CF card The available capacity of BootOS and Standard monitor OS can be confirmed by To Memory Card of drawing software Communicate with Memory Card GOT Type GT11 a 320 240 Boot Drive Project Data C Buitin Flash Memory Project Data D kbyte E ZE Capacity of data of OS to be transferred Special Data T kbyte Buffering area size 0 kbyte 16 2 Prior Preparations for Installing BootOS and Standard Monitor OS 16 3 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK Py CLEANING OF STANDARD MONITOR OS op DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card There are the following two types for the BootOS Standard monitor OS installation
319. ndard CF Card will not appear if a CF card is not inserted 2 Copy Copying begins when Copy is touched 13 34 13 7 GOT data package acquisition 13 7 3 Display example of GOT data package acquisition 13 7 4 GOT data package acquisition operation Zz O o 5 GOT data package acquisition operation on the display gt Copy the following OS that is installed on the GOT and data to the CF card E GOT data package acquisition x Touch A Standard CF Card under Select GOT s OS project data are copied to Q 2 highlight it the CF card This CF card can be use De ec for installation when the GOT is Touch the Copy button to begin copying 7 turned on 30 5 Please select a destination and Suz push Copy button SER SET Select Drive A Built in CF card os gy gt EO E Doty aon Different dialogs appear depending on the s Caution is status of the copying destination Follow Copy destination the dialog that appears 3 amp 2z GOT data are already exist ERS If execute copy operation all GOT D a data on the CF card will be deleted 5 2 lt Copy now oh 3 ox a Se N N Py AND BATTERY Upon completion of OS Data copying a dialog that indicates a completion of copying will appear Touch the OK button to close the dialog window Copy is completed GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND
320. ne ChNo 0 by using Communication Settings of the GOT main unit Refer to the followings for the Communication Settings button the hardware check for the If touch the Self RS 232 interface is carried out After selecting Self the transferred data and received data are verified through the self loopback connector If data can not be received during data transmission the dialog shown left is displayed and the GOT restarts which notifies the self loopback connector failure self loopback connector communication error or RS 232 interface hardware failure 4 During check the dialog shown left is displayed 5 When all checks end normally the dialog shown left is displayed and the GOT restarts 14 10 I O Check 14 10 3 I O check operation 14 127 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww N a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF RS232 communication check QO If an error occurs the dialog is displayed at that point Verify 4 BYTE notifying the GOT has terminated abnormally and Restart which byte the error occurred and then the GOT restarts If a verification error occurs the RS 232 interface hardware may be faulty 14 11 System Alarm Display 14 11 1 Syste
321. nearest sales office or FA Center The following message is displayed on GOT CF card error Installation will be canceled Check whether the CF card can be used CF card is broken e Format the CF card and execute the installation again e Replace the CF card The following message is displayed on GOT Wrong operation system Either the wrong type of GOT was selected for the Core OS write setting of the drawing software or the data on the CF card are broken Make sure that the correct type of GOT is selected and execute Core OS write again The following message is displayed on GOT The version of OS is not acceptable to this GOT Installation will be canceled Confirm the version of OS Install Core OS from the latest version of drawing software 16 5 CoreOS 16 5 2 When CoreOS cannot be installed 16 13 UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK Dey CLEANING OF STANDARD MONITOR OS ep DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS WARNING When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire
322. ner of the screen the main menu is displayed E Turn the GOT power on with the upper left corner touched 9 3 Utility Display 9 3 1 Display operation of main menu 5 a Communication setting A GOT setup Time setting amp display E Program data control Debug amp self check Language Remark Lock the utility display by password When a password is set on the GOT using drawing software a password dialog box is displayed when trying to access the main menu of the utility display The password setting option in drawing software is located in the common menu Main Menu Please input password J When the password is not matched the following error message is displayed NR PARIECS The password is wrong When touching OK the screen returns to the monitor screen 1 Input operation of password 1 Input the password after touching 0 to 9 A to F key 2 Define the password by touching Enter key after inputting password 3 To correct the input character touch Del key to delete the correcting character and then reinput retype the new character 2 Password input cancel operation When X button is touched the screen returns to the monitor screen Refer to the following for details on setting passwords L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual
323. ng of screen saving back light ON OFF Zkz EHT Switching message language Japanese English Chinese Simplified Korean Sai Display German Setting of battery alarm display ON OFF N Setting of Invert colors ON OFF ON Cfp Ch LEB Qa Qa Z GT1150 x5 Oma 8 ook E A 7 OLH O Brightness Liquid crystal intensity setting contrast Liquid crystal contrast setting Operation Setting of buzzer volume z Setting of window move buzzer volume z oO Security setting Security level change security password input of each object Be wo Utility call key Setting of the menu call key zo Key sensitivity Key sensitivity setting Key reaction i x Display of key reaction speed oO speed m Oo Selection of base clock uy Lu Display current time of clock 2 Time setting amp display Q Set current time of clock Display of battery status Zz O 59 2y 25 go ae oa S Elm we o8z 26 5o EQO Se 209 peT 285 9 2 Utility Function List 9 2 Program data control OS information Item Functions overview Installing OS Uploading OS Property display of OS Kind version and date Data check of system file OS Project Information Downloading project file Uploading project file Project file deleting Copying project file A drive A drive Property display of project file Date version and screen title Data check of project file Alarm information
324. nheaaaceexnandPacedanndd caadnesauenaeesed deeaueacnentaens 14 50 V4 3 2 ACCESS FANGS e N E 14 51 14 3 3 PreCaUtlonS srecineiiie ienien nn n a pitas eben tae EEE AEE RTEA ENESE AEE EE 14 51 TA A DISPIAY e N 14 52 14 3 5 Operation Of keyword IM PUL cxiccciass sancevessdacedaatinedancanesadectonsaaacaacus cameducaunaaatedencandesedueeascanveumeneateacs 14 53 14 3 6 Operation Methods cc ceececcceeeeeeeeeeeeeee cae eeeeeeee cece see caaaaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecaeaaeeeseeeeeeseesecseeeeeeeeeeeees 14 55 14 3 7 Display format of the display Area eee eee eeene eee ee eeene AAAA ARKAAN NENEA ANEREN 14 57 14 3 8 Switching valid keys upper lower functions 0 eee eeeeete eee eee eete eee eeeeaeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaees 14 60 14 3 9 Selection and operation Of modes cecececeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteccceaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesecacecaecaeeeeeeeeeess 14 60 14 3 10 Command input ProCedures ccccccceeceeeeceeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeesecaaeaaaeaeeeeeeeeeseseesecencaueaeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 14 61 14 3 11 Action if an incorrect key iS input esensi aian E E 14 64 14 3512 List of TUNCHONS niinniin EEEE EE EE iota tac E EEE 14 65 14 3 13 Basic OPCrAllOMN siaaa e a a a a a a sacs 14 66 14 3 14 Reading sequence programMS ssssesesssssrissstttttttttt ttnt eee taeeeeeeeeaeeeeseeaeeeseeenaeeeeeeeiaeeeeesaes 14 66 14 3 15 Changing Overwriting COMMANAS sssssssiisserisnriinnnniaeiindnnn ananin ennn Kina anA naa ANNAE RASNA 14 67 14 3 16 Ad
325. not be installed cccccccceceseeccceeeeeeeceeeeenseeceeeesnsneaeeeeeseaaeeseeeneacaeeeensenaaes 16 13 17 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 17 1 to 17 7 Is A Dai WINS CUO a seerne a E E RRR 17 2 17 2 Periodic Inspection sais dinscciinndedecedianasadicidadertdenstdeendsdtsededeataassaaaddeanidueiedasscbaasdasduhedibda 17 2 17 3 Cleaning Method 000eneeeeeeennnnnnnnnnnnnnrnenenne eee eeennnnnnnnn nannan anae rererere reran 17 3 17 4 Battery Voltage Low Detection and Battery Replacement sseseeee 17 4 17 5 Backlight Shutoff Detection aoe tecscecsceutteucasettectbte tea tule ait tinecsicadeedsaccadateeawdeiecse 17 7 17 5 1 Backlight shutoff detection and external alarm ccccccccceeeeeeeeeneneeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeeseeeieeeeeneenaees 17 7 18 ERROR MESSAGE AND SYSTEM ALARM A EAE E A ANE A E ET 18 1 to 18 11 18 1 Error Contents Display ccanacsoncoasson cede decoisadenctuadiadidacarsansaetausadadaswenanctdcaderdcasaennuiiweas 18 1 18 2 List of Error Message System ALAN xacdacicsesecistat sds sscistadesaantucatozancedcendovasaxtdapecaetasess 18 3 18 3 Troubleshooting in Bus Connection iiscisceccccterdstcancelts dicecscnnteebactanndiocdedensdiGtenbecds 18 7 18 3 1 LOCating anor poslo mcs E 18 7 18 3 2 Further locating error pOSitionS 2 0 ceeecceeeeceeeeceeeceeeeceeeeseneeneeeeeeseeceeeeseneeceseeesseeceeeesntneeeeetneanes 18 8 18 3 3 Specific example of troubleshooting ececcceceec
326. ns pees gE BS Remark General preventive measures against noise 2 m There are two kinds of noises Radiated noise that is transmitted into the air and 2 Conductive noise that is directly transmitted along connected lines 3 Countermeasures must be taken considering both kinds of noises and referring to lt the following 3 points 2 1 Protecting against noise 7 a Keep signal lines away from noise sources such as a power cable or a high power drive circuit b Shield the signal lines 2 Reducing generated noise a Use a noise filter etc to reduce the level of the noise generated due to a source such as a high power motor drive circuit b Attach surge killers to the terminals on the No Fuse Breaker NFB electromagnetic contactors relays solenoid valves and generators to suppress noise interference WIRING 3 Releasing noise to the ground a Make sure to connect the ground cable to the ground b Use a short and thick cable to lower its impedance c Ground the power system and the control system separately OPTION 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 1 1 Wiring example Connect the power supply to the power terminals on the back panel of the GOT Use 0 75mm or thicker cables to avoid voltage drop and tighten the terminal screw with the specified torque securely GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD H g A oF CARD ACCESS OFF ON lt 4 CF C
327. ntal format 3 2 Performance Specifications Item Weight Specifications GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD 0 7kg Excluding mounting fixtures Compatible software package I 2 3 GT Designer2 Version2 73B or later GT Designer3 Version1 or later GT Designer2 Version2 or later GT Designer3 Version1 or later e Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Flickers may be observed depending on the display color Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect e Flickers and partial discoloration may be generated on the liquid crystal display panel due to the display contents or the contrast adjustment However please note that these phenomena appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect e There is a difference in the display brightness and the color tones between liquid crystal display panels When using multiple liquid crystal display panels please note that there is an individual difference between them e A crosstalk shadow as an extension of the display may appear on the liquid crystal display panel Please note that it appears due to its characteristic e When the display section is seen from the outside of the display angle the display color seems
328. nvironmental protection cover equipped with the GOT 5 and remove the mounting screws z Zz Remove the old USB environmental protection cover from the GOT to replace it with the new USB environmental protection cover USB environmental Fix the new USB environmental protection cover while fitting its protecion cover E projection to the hole in the GOT and mount the cover to the GOT using Projection lt 2 the mounting screws A aes Tightening torque 0 36 to 0 48Nem for both mounting screws A and B a dp 6 Mounting screw A Sm Mounting screw B z M3 x 6 pan head screw z Point P Precautions when the USB environmental protection cover is opened Environmental protective structure of USB interface is IP2X when the USB environmental protection cover is opened 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover 8 11 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental protection cover 8 7 Stand Stand is used to fix the GOT to standing status in order to debug the monitor screen data easily 8 7 1 Applicable stand The following stand is applicable for GT100 Product name Model Contents GT05 50STAND Stand for 5 7 Stand A9GT 50STAND Stand for 5 7 8 7 2 Installing procedure Adjust to Adjust the mounting angle of GOT with the angle adjusting fitting of pes 55 65 or 75 the stand Angle adjusting fitting Put the GOT into the stand from the stand front side and fix it using GOT the fixtures mounting face For how to mo
329. o Ch No setting Set the channel numbers of the communication interface Communication parameters PSSN SI i Set communication parameters of communication devices o gt setting 2 2 gt Era HUWA HEA 58 a oak 10 1 2 Communication setting display operation ozi Main menu Communication setting o L Section 9 3 Utility Display Z amam Communication Setting z oO Standard I F Setting Be wo Communication RS422 zo sett RS232 Host PC x 7 Host PC iE aval Wu N CH Dr iver assign G Definition of ChNo 0 None LFA device 8 Barcode 9 PC Z we On 2S zs ig oa S 25 wok Ooz 352 EQO aE 283 2 5S Zov 10 1 Communication Setting 10 1 10 1 1 Communication setting functions 10 1 3 Description of communication setting screen Name of setting item and display item columns for Communication Setting Communication Setting Standard I F Setting ChNo R5422 lt lt 2 ChNo R5232 lt 2 9 Host P0 lt 4 ChNo USB lt 2 Host PO lt 4 Definition of ChNo O None L FA device 8 Barcode 9 PC 1 Channel Driver assign a Assigning channel No Channel No s can be assigned to each of the communication drivers installed in the GOT Without setting Communication Settings in drawing software communication with PLC CPU is only available after assigning a channel No with this function b Changing communication driver The commun
330. o GOT by the Utility operation Point gt Precautions on executing program data control function When execute program data control function Standard monitor OS has to be installed in GOT in advance Thus this function cannot be used for the initial installation of Standard monitor OS after purchasing GOT Install Standard monitor OS by the following two methods 1 Method using drawing software GT Designer2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 2 Installation method when turning the GOT power on lt Section 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on Operation procedure Power OFF the GOT After CF card access LED is off install the CF card in which BootOS Standard monitor OS or project data is stored in the CF card interface of GOT Switch ON the CF card access switch of GOT Display the program data control function screen Utility on the GOT and install See he BootOS Standard monitor OS from the CF DIR G1SYS 02 01 05 14 42 Al card to GOT Program Data 0S information A Touch Install 16 6 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card 16 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility The CF card access LED is lit during install Zz Boot 0S 4 YAK ILA CT execution Now installing Boot0S 9 Do not pull out the CF card power
331. o be monitored in advance Batch monitor Monitoring the present value of n devices from a specified device Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection A CC Link connection G4 3 TC monitor Monitoring the present value set value contact point and coil of m devices from a specified device BM monitor Monitoring the present value of x devices in specified buffer memory of a specified intelligent function module A A A Data change by test operation Setting Resetting bit devices Changing the present value of word devices and buffer memory Changing the present value of TC possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC monitoring Quick test Changing device values by performing a quick test Display switching 14 8 Displaying device comments Displaying word device and buffer memory values in decimal or hexadecimal Aw O GOT multidrop connection 1 These items cannot be monitored when an A motion controller CPU is monitored 2 V Z and A cannot be monitored or their present values cannot be changed 3 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 1 Specifications Reference Subsection 14 2 10 Subsection 14 2 14 Subsection 14 2 17 Subsection 14 2 21 Subsection 14 2 24 Subsection
332. o file of the same name in the Do you want to overwrite copy destination folder starts to copy If there is a file of the same name in the copy destination folder the following dialog is displayed without starting the copy If copy in this case the copied file is 0K Cancel overwritten to the project data in the copy destination folder If touch OK button starts to copy If touch Cancel button cancels to copy When the copy is completed the dialog of completion is displayed If touch OK button closes the dialog Copy is completed 13 28 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation 13 5 Memory Card Format Z fo o 13 5 1 Format function of memory card 2 Formats the CF card or Internal SRAM 5 13 5 2 Display operation of memory card format Su Main menu Program Data control Program Data control S32 LF Section 9 3 Utility Display Sie O5 w 020 Touch Zz ouc LOn Program data control Memory card format ee Tu Mow AON Memory card format Program data Memory card format mae Be lect Drive 2 gt 4 A Built in CF card Eug HEA N D n D Internal SRAM Select a drive and format it 3 a Se N N Pet AND BATTERY aS O aE O na a p Point gt Formatting the D drive Internal SRAM G If the GOT is turned off and left in the status without a battery for 30s or longer the data in the D drive
333. o the GOT you can edit the FX PLC program The features of the MELSEC FX list editor are described below Parameters and sequence programs are easy to maintain You can check or partly correct change or add FX PLC CPU parameters and sequence programs simply by operating keys You can easily edit sequence programs without preparing any peripheral unit other than the GOT Example of changing sequence program commands Changed LD X000 LD X000 OUT Y020 _e OUT Y030 LD X001 LD X001 Errors that occur during list editing can be checked easily Error messages error codes and number of steps for errors that occur in the FX PLC can be checked Details can be checked immediately even for errors that occur during list editing Error message Detail Step 1 0 configuration error 1010 PC HPP communication error 6201 Commands and devices can be searched and displayed Commands and devices used in sequence programs can be searched The correction position can be searched for cases such as when you want to correct a specific device Searched device M800 Search device Displays the searched device N 7 LD M 800 gt OUT T 4105 K 100 LD X 002 D 10 8 LD M 10 9 OUT T 10 K 100 12 LD x 002 13 OR x 020 14 AND M 100 14 84 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 1 Specifications System configuration This section describes the system configuration of the MELSEC F X list editor For further informatio
334. of clean Upper right touch position 16 INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS Zz fe AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 2 Zz ms gt E To execute the GOT utility BootOS or Standard monitor OS has to be installed in the C drive Flash 5 memory This chapter explains the installation using GOT Pe Drawing software CF card gt GOT 2 BootOS or Su Write OS standard monitor OS 220 file installation S42 gt When GOT is remote installed zuk easily using the CF card OZD o the GT Designer2 CF card CF card in GOT GT Designer3 GOT gt CF card gt GOT o BootOS or Bim gt Upload OS standard monitor OS SEO file installation ie Install OS from GOT to GOT using THE the CF card aot Install the CF card CF card in GOT 6 gt For details of the installation using drawing software refer to the following Ze Fua L gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual pRa we GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals eae 0f5 Point P CoreOS pore pan Q Section 16 1 to 16 4 of this chapter describes BootOS and Standard monitor OS A only z oO For CoreOS refer to the following ae wo lt Section 16 5 CoreOS T9 as D Je O LWW Yn 5 oO We oO Z lt L 4 O STANDARD MONITOR OS op DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND 16 1 16 1 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Required for Installation
335. ogram data control OS information Belect drive A Built in CF card C Flash Memory Select a drive and operate BootOS and D Internal SRAM OS files 13 6 13 2 OS Information 13 2 1 Function of OS information 13 2 3 Display example of OS information OS information screen D Program Data 0S information Select drive A Built in CF card C Flash Memory Internal SRAM OS information screen Storage file folder display screen Program Data 0S information Size Date Time 02 22 06 12 50 a 07 21 06 15 15 B i Install Upload Property Data chec 4 Number Item Contents i The drive of which file or folder is displayed can be selected When the CF card is 1 Select drive _ not installed A Built in CF card will not be displayed 2 Kind Indicates whether the displayed name is for file or folder in In case of file displays the extension in case of folder displays DIR The file name or folder name which is stored in the selected drive or folder is displayed 3 Name i When the file name or folder name exceeds 20 characters the exceeding characters the 21th character or after are not displayed 4 Path name The path name of the currently displayed drive folder is displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time The date and time when each file was installed are displayed
336. oll SET Switch key that makes the lower character valid on each key with dual functions Subsection 14 3 9 Whether upper or lower character is valid can be checked on the display SHIFT Switch key that makes the upper character valid on each key with dual functions Subsection 14 3 9 Whether upper or lower character is valid can be checked on the display CLEAR 4 Control key When the Help function is used the screen returns to the display at the input of the HELP key In the Parameter mode the process is cancelled After restarting continue the operation If the Clear key is pressed when the system is not in the Parameter mode Other mode or Help function the screen returns to the initial status of the mode selection The input commands or device numbers except for the mode are cleared This is used for repeating the procedure if incorrect keys are pressed Subsection 14 3 11 In the Other mode the screen returns to the previous display SP Key that provides blank space at the command and at between device names gt Key that moves the cursor on the display gt gg or determines scroll directions Subsection 14 3 8 GO Press this key at the last of a series of key operations to execute the operation Check the details of key operations on the display before pressing this key 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor Subse
337. olor draw display and Drawing check ar O x O x overlap display check of liquid crystal Font check Installed fonts check O x O x Touch panel TS Touch panel operation check O X O x check 5 5 2 Connected target confirmation O x O x 2 I O check E 3 Self loopback check O X O x 3 Monitoring of the LED status display of the NETWK unit MELSECNET H communication unit and status display CC Link communication unit GT15 a i J61BT13 Displaying GOT errors CPU errors a System alarm x O 6 network errors O x display Resetting GOT errors x O Displaying GOT start date and time current GOT start time f O x O x time accumulated operating hours Displaying the screen to clean the display Screen cleaning Scena O x x Backlight maintenance notification time setting Display section maintenance notification Maintenance report time setting 7 Touch key maintenance notification count setting Maintenance report Built in flash memory maintenance notification count setting Function to reset the values of backlight maintenance notification time counted for Integrated value maintenance time report display section maintenance notification time touch key O x x reset 7 oan ee maintenance notification count and built in flash memory maintenance notification Integrated value reset count 1 Itis necessary to perform the followings by drawing softwar
338. on from G1L of operation log file to CSV O 2 x 2 G10 TXT conversion Conversion from G10 of logging file to TXT O O x a Deletion of a operation log file or folder O O x x Operation log Copying of an operation log file oO O x x information Moving of an operation log file oO O x x Changing of an operation log file name O O x x Creating of a new operation log folder O O x x Displaying and searching of the list of operation logs O O a Hard copy Deleting hard copy file O x x x information Copying hard copy file O x Xx x Memory card Formatting memory card O x oO x format Memory F Displaying the memory free space of GOT O x O x information Displaying the name data size and creating date O x x x of file or folder Special data Deleting special data file or folder O x x x information Special data file check O x x x Downloading special data of A drive Standard CF card to C drive Built in flash memory 2 x x 5 GOT data Copies OS special data and project data to the package O x O x a memory card acquisition Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function Debug Self check O Applicable x Not Applicable Not required aha GT Soft Drawing E Setting items Function GT15 GOT 1000 GT11 Setting Changing the present value of the device ZZ System monitor of PLC the buffer memory monitor of o O x O x Zo monitor the test function and special memor
339. on location Inside control panel 3 o9 Overvoltage category ll or less L x Pollution degree 4 2 or less 326 3 Cooling method Self cooling 2 Class D grounding 100 or less To be connected to the panel when grounding is not Grounding g g p 9 g possible PA 1 STN liquid crystal type to be stored at or below 39 C WBT z 2 Do not use or store the GOT under pressures higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Oft Failure to observe this instruction may cause a malfunction 2 When the air inside the control panel is purged by pressurization the surface sheet may be lifted by high pressure As a result the touch panel may be difficult to press and the sheet may be peeled off 3 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within the premises Category Il applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the raged voltage of 300 V is 2500 V 9 4 This index indicates the degree to which conductive pollution is generated in the environment where the in equipment is used In pollution degree 2 only non conductive pollution occurs but temporary conductivity may be produced due to condensation Zz O e oO 3 1 General Specifications 3 1 3 2 3 2 Performance Specifications e GT1155 QTBD
340. one 14 8 2 Display operation of font check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check L gt Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Display clock Debug amp self check Display check Debug self check Display check Drawing check Font check Starting font check Touch Font check in the Display check Touch Font check to display the screen describing the font check operation Touch the upper right of the description screen to start the font check Point f Notes on font check Judged as normal if the following characters are correctly displayed UNICODE Alphabetic amp etc 0 x 0000 to 0 x 04F9 From basic Latin to Krill Hangul 0 x ACOO to 0 x D7A3 Hangul Hangul auxiliary Chinese Characters 0 x 4E00 to 0 x 9FA5 CJK integrated Kanjis If the characters above are not displayed correctly the fonts may not be normally installed Install the Standard monitor OS again 14 8 Font Check 14 121 14 8 1 Font check function UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa 1S Wwe Ww op fs ie 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 8 3 Font check operation Touching Font check in the Display check menu displays the screen describing the font check operation Touching
341. onfirm the input range of the value to be input as clock data and input the proper value again Cancelled the file of different contents and created a new file Unnecessary file deleted to j pia f 522 Note that the old file is cancelled and the new file is created if the file of create new file ste ai the same name with different contents exists when creating files 504 Device writing error When writing in the device error occurred Correct device Correct the device 595 Unable to read write alarm log Unable to read the alarm log file saved by the different project files under different projects Confirm where to store the alarm log file and alarm log file e No CF card is installed in the drive or the access switch is turned on 1 Install a recording medium in the specified drive 535 Cannot open image file 2 Turn the access switch on e The specified file is not found in the card 3 Add the image file or change the image file name to a correct one i There is an error in the image file data or the image file format is not Image file error or invalid file 536 i t supported oe Change to the correct image file The key code input execution trigger was ON with the non target key code 550 Invalid key code set in the key code storage device Confirm the key code supported by the object where error occurs The number of the set points of the recipe device exceeds the specified F range 2 9 Recipe device pointstoo larg Put t
342. onfirms the numerical input When the setting range exists it repeats the numerical without displaying keyboard z Example 4800bps 9600bps 19200bps amp he T a e Setting Key It shifts to the setting screen of each setting item when touched wa LO GOT setup Display contrast Language English 3X Brightness setting 5 8 Opening screen time Q Sec B X Screen save time 0 Min 0 None Contrast setting 8 16 G Screen save backlight OFF Battery alarm display ON is i Brightness contrast Setting 2 0K OK 2 2 Setting contents are reflected if OK button is touched Zz If X button is pressed without touching OK button the dialogue below is displayed and the changes ae are canceled then the dialog box is closed Su With do not push OK button Zz if you close the screen the changed tn value will be canceled Wop OK oa N og OK Cancel a49 osz E OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Se Cancel button The operation setting screen is displayed TE Zov 9 3 Utility Display 9 10 9 3 3 Basic operation of settings change Keyboard operation Touch the numerical value to be changed 2 Keyboard for numerical input is displayed and cursor is displayed simultaneously The key board display position changes by the position of numerical value touched At the time of numerical input displayed in the position which will not interrupt the inputting Cursor
343. onnecting GOT to the RS232C port of Panasonic GT09 C30R20903 9P 3m Electric Works PLC For connecting GOT to the RS232C port of Panasonic GT09 C30R20904 3C 3m Electric Works PLC Connection cables for YASKAWA PLCs Sold separately Product sare Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R40201 9P 3m GT09 C100R40201 9P 10m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module GT09 C200R40201 9P 20m RS 422 GT09 C300R40201 9P 30m cable GT09 C30R40202 14P 3m GT09 C100R40202 14P 10m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC GT09 C200R40202 14P 20m GT09 C300R40202 14P 30m GT09 C30R20201 9P 3m GT09 C30R20202 15P 3m RS 232 For connecting GOT to YASKAWA PLC GT09 C30R20203 9P 3m cable GT09 C30R20204 14P 3m GT09 C30R20205 25P 3m For connecting GOT to YASKAWA MEMOBUS module Connection cables for YOKOGAWA PLCs Sold separately Product no Model name Cable length Description name GT09 C30R40301 6T 3m GT09 C100R40301 6T 10m GT09 C200R40301 6T 20m GT09 C300R40301 6T 30m For connecting GOT to YOKOGAWA PC link module GT09 C30R40302 6T 3m GT09 C100R40302 6T 10m GT09 C200R40302 6T 20m RS 422 GT09 C300R40302 6T 30m cable GT09 C30R40303 6T 3m GT09 C100R40303 6T 10m GT09 C200R40303 6T 20m GT09 C300R40303 6T 30m For connecting Connector Conversion Box to YOKOGAWA GT09 C30R40304 6T 3m temperature controller GT09 C100R40304 6T 10m GT09 C200R40304
344. onversion adapter 9y ne Sg The following connector conversion adapter is applicable ag O o Model Contents ifs GT10 9PT5S For GOT multi drop connection 8 10 2 Installing procedure z 3 z Turn the GOT power off 2 Connect the connection conversion adapter to the RS 422 485 interface on the GOT Fix the connection conversion adapter to the GOT using the provided M3 tapping screws Tightening torque 0 3 to 0 6 Nem 8 10 Connector Conversion Adapter 8 19 8 10 1 Applicable connector conversion adapter 9 UTILITY FUNCTION Utility is a function which carries out connection of GOT and PLC screen display and operation method settings program data control and self check etc Refer to the following for the utility function list lt Section 9 2 Utility Function List 9 1 Utility Execution For utility execution utility has to be displayed by installing BootOS and Standard monitor OS in the C drive Flash memory There are following three types for the installing Standard monitor OS methods 1 Drawing software gt GOT Via USB interface or RS 232 interface GT Designer2 GT Designer3 BootOS or Standard monitor OS installation 2 Drawing software CF card gt GOT OS file BootOS or Standard write monitor OS installation Install the CF CF card card in GOT GT Designer2 GT Designer3 3 GOT CF card gt GOT OS file BootOS Standard WY upload monitor OS installation Install the
345. operation gt D Input the HELP key in the Read mode READ HELP 2 1 Select Read 2 Select INSTRUCTION 2 Set the MOV command MOV co co 14 70 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 18 Using the help function lt Display gt HELP MENU 1 READ 2 COMMENT DISPLAY CLEAR END READ KKK READ KKK KEY IN INSTRUCTION ICLEAR END_HELP MENU kkk READ kkk KEY IN STEP NO MOV CLEAR END HELP MENU 6 D20 13 MOV 13 D20 13 K2Y0018 R 6 D20 2 13 gt MOV 13 D20 NOT FOUND Q Reading MOV D20 K2Y0018 of the 13th step Message when the MOV command is not present after the 13th step Now reading the command with the Help function command specification is completed 2 Displaying comment The following example shows the procedure of displaying the comment in the Read mode Operation example lt Key operation gt input the HELP key in the Read mode HELP 2 Select 2 COMMENT DISPLAY Select 1 YES Move the cursor to the following step lt Display gt HELP MENU 1 READ 2 COMMENT DISPLAY CLEAR END COMMENT DISP 1 YES 2 NO CLEAR END HELP MENU R 0 gt LD X0000 1 OUT Y0020 2 LD X0000 Motor start limit Display the comment of the device at the cursor position 0 LD X0000 1 gt OUT Y0020 2 LD X0000 Motor start check 14
346. ord is not input Set the PLC No The PLC parameter was changed Read the ladder monitor again The GO key was pressed without input of the keyword on the keyword input screen The PLC parameter exceeding the file R register capacity was set Set the PLC number and change the station for list edit Or select the same station and input the keyword Restart the GOT system if required The PLC parameter was changed Restart the GOT system The capacity of the file R register was set Read the ladder monitor on the PLC again if required The PLC program was edited Read the ladder monitor again Edit the PLC program Read the ladder monitor on the PLC again if required 14 80 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 28 Error messages and corrective actions PLC CPU error messages and troubleshooting When the error step read in other mode is performed the error message and the error step of the current error in the ACPU are displayed Error messages error details and corrective actions are displayed below If an error message appears take the following actions to resume operation amp Check the error message If the error code is not displayed check the error code of special register D9008 with the system monitor function Refer to Section 14 2 Remove the cause of the error Display 1 Example of display for an error in the CPU other than AnA and AnU Mode is displayed
347. ormat now Reconfirm whether to format the CF card If touch OK button starts formatting If touch Cancel button cancels formatting 13 30 13 5 Memory Card Format 13 5 3 Format operation of memory card Format is complete amp Remark Restrictions on formatting Ro 13 6 Memory Information 13 6 1 Memory information function D When the formatting is completed the completion dialog mentioned left is displayed If touch OK button closes the dialog e When use an unformatted CF card in GOT format the CF card by PC GOT cannot format the unformatted CF card e The formatting of GOT does not change the file system Example FAT16 of the CF card and inherits the file system before formatting The following shows the amount of the memory empty area size and boot Drive information empty area size which can be used by the user of each drive A Standard CF card C Built in Flash Memory 13 6 2 Memory information display operation Main menu L Section 9 3 Utility Display Comunication sett ing G23 Time setting amp display Ca Prosram data control E 08 information Mai Alarm information Ta Project information Memory card Format Program data control Ta Project information Memory card Format E reng information Yy Memory information Memory information Program data Memory inf
348. ormation lash A Built in CF card 249192 K byte C memory empty area size gt Flash Memory Project data area 2942 K byte OS area 2056 K byte 13 6 Memory Information 13 31 13 6 1 Memory information function UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS e NaN Pe y AND BATTERY st STATUS DISPLAY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 13 6 3 Display example of memory information Program data Memory information memory empty area size Built in CF card 249192 K byte 1 Flash Memory Project data area 2942 K byte OS area 2056 K byte Description No Setting items 1 Flash memory empty area size Indicates the amount of memory empty area size for each drive in which a file or folder can be stored If CF card is not mounted A Standard CF card is not displayed 13 32 13 6 Memory Information 13 6 3 Display example of memory information 13 7 GOT data package acquisition Zz 2 are E 13 7 1 The function of GOT data package acquisition 2 This function copies the following OSs that are installed on the GOT and the data to the memory card e OS Boot OS Standard monitor OS Communication driver Extended function OS Option OS 2 e Project data Copied data can be used as a backup or they ca
349. ounding 1009 or less 1009 or less 1 Independent ground 2 Shared grounding 3 Common grounding eee Best condition Good condition Not allowed Use the cable of 2mm or more for grounding Set the grounding point closer to the GOT to make the grounding cable short as possible Recommended terminal shape e Terminal screws should be tightened to between 0 5 to 0 8 N m Terminal screws must be secured to prevent a loose connection thus avoiding a malfunction Failure to do so may cause equipment failures or malfunctions Terminal Solderless Terminal Solderless 03 2 screw terminal screw terminal or less Lov a Sinn SH Fe When wiring one cable to When wiring two cables to one terminal one terminal Cable size For power supply 0 75mm min For grounding 2mm min Solderless terminal M3 solderless terminal applicable solderless terminal RAV 1 25 3 V2 N3A and FV2 N3A Tightening torque 0 5 to 0 8Nem 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 1 1 Wiring example 7 3 OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM PART NAME SPECIFICATIONS STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE UL cUL es INSTALLATION WIRING OPTION 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy Grounding of the GOT may cause electric potential difference and noise interference which may result in GOT malfunctions These problems may be resolved by taking the following measures Wiring path of the GOT s ground cable and po
350. panel tighten the mounting screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause the GOT to drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT Securely connect the option function board to the connector provided for the board When inserting removing a CF card into from the GOT turn the CF card access switch off in advance Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card When inserting a CF card into the GOT push it into the insertion slot until the CF card eject button will pop out Failure to do so may cause a malfunction due to poor contact When removing a CF card from the GOT make sure to support the CF card by hand as it may pop out Failure to do so may cause the CF card to drop from the GOT and break When using the GOT in the environment of oil or chemicals use the protective cover for oil Failure to do so may cause failure or malfunction due to the oil or chemical entering into the GOT WIRING PRECAUTIONS Be sure to shut off all phases of the external power supply used by the system before wiring Failure to do so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions Please make sure to ground FG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying 100 or less which is used exclusively for the GOT Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction Correctly wire the GOT power supply se
351. per left part judge that the upper left area operates normally 1 Fora monochrome 16 scale GOT the part is displayed with a subtracted yellow color 14 124 14 9 Touch Panel Check 14 9 3 Touch panel check operations 14 10 I O Check 14 10 1 I O check function The I O check is a function which checks whether GOT and PLC can communicate with each other If I O check ends normally the communication interface and the connection cable hardwares are normal To execute I O check the PLC communication driver has to be installed in GOT in advance from drawing software Refer to the following for the details related to the installation of the PLC communication driver K gt GT Designer2 VersionO Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Point P I O check function Controllers except MITSUBISHI PLC cannot be checked with the use of I O check function When checking the communication between GOT and controller follow Preparatory Procedures for Monitoring in GOT 1000 Series Connection Manual c gt GOT 1000 Series Connection Manual 14 10 2 Display operation of I O check Main menu Debug amp self check Self check lt Section 9 3 Utility Display Main Menu Debug amp self check Memory check m Display check Touch panel check mw 1 0 check A self check y Touch I O check Touch Debug amp self check I O check GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD
352. perating hours is a reference for the accumulated time while GOT is powered on or reset restarted OS installation communication setting change 14 12 GOT Start Time 14 131 14 12 3 Display of GOT start time UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 15 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CLEAN In utility the screen can be set as not to be effected by touching the screen when clean with clothes For cleaning method refer to Section 17 3 Cleaning Method 15 1 Clean 15 1 1 Display operation of clean Main menu 79 3 Utility Display Main Menu GOT setup Time setting amp display Program data control rE Debug amp self check L Cleag Touch Clean Please press top corner button Even if touch points other than the upper left corner and upper right corner of the screen the GOT does not operates 15 1 2 Operation of clean If touch the upper left and upper right corners of the screen at the same time the screen returns to the previous screen display Upper left touch position For details of cleaning method refer to the following L Section 17 3 Cleaning Method 15 1 15 1 Clean 15 1 1 Display operation
353. play 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices Zz O O Zz WARNING z E Before performing the quick test operations of the system monitor function such as turning ON or OFF bit device changing the word device current value changing the settings or current values of the timer or counter and changing the buffer memory current value read through the manual z carefully and make yourself familiar with the operation method e During quick test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform Sus significant operation for the system 329 False output or malfunction can cause an accident SmE 020 The quick test operation procedure for monitor devices is described below 2 The Entry Monitor screen is taken as an example to describe quick test operation when the system monitor function is executed The operation procedure is the same even if the batch monitor TC monitor or BM monitor is selected z Example of quick test operation when the entry monitor is selected 225 Zee ate aon Fig eo oak oto Q lt z A 5 T 1 x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 DETELA TES TEMENO ORME SET fl NetNo O ST FF CP This indicates that Quick test operation is valid CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION Quick test of bit devices Quick test of word devices 1 To quick test of bit devices 2 To quick test of word devices CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLA
354. play switching Subsection 14 2 7 1 These items cannot be monitored when a motion controller Q series is monitored 2 The present value of Z cannot be changed None of the connection types supports V 3 When a motion controller Q series is connected device comments cannot be displayed 4 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 5 When a QCPU redundant system is used data of the set value cannot be changed 6 The QSCPU does not support the connection type 14 6 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 1 Specifications 2 When the GOT is connected to a QnACPU Function O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Connection type between GOT and controller Name Entry monitor Description Monitoring present values by entering devices to be monitored in advance Batch monitor Monitoring the present value of n devices from a specified device TC monitor Monitoring the present value set value contact point and coil of m devices from a specified device BM monitor Monitoring the present value of x devices in specified buffer memory of a specified intelligent function module Data change by test operation Setting Resetting bit devices Bus connection Changing the present value of word devices and buffer memory Changing the present value of TC possible during TC monitoring Changing the set value of TC possible during TC monitoring Quick te
355. played Up to four devices can be displayed 1 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 27 14 2 11 Information displayed on the entry monitor screen and key functions 14 2 12 Procedure for entry monitor basic operation BAT MON SiS When no devices are entered Display example when devices l J are already entered MENU MENU Touch Touch TEST FORM th Touch Touch Touch v If necessary perform Quick test operation gt Subsection 14 2 8 Quick test operation of monitor devices If necessary switch the screen display Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display If necessary perform the following Entering monitor devices Enter the name and number of the devices you want to monitor one by one lt 37 Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Deleting entry devices lt gt Subsection 14 2 13 Deleting entry devices Test operation 3 Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation Point f If more than eight devices are registered 14 28 You can register up to eight entry devices If more than eight devices are registered the oldest ones
356. plicability of monitoring for each keyword protection level Zz OW The applicability of monitoring for each protection level is as follows zz ZHE afet When only keyword is registered ata a 9 ano keyword are registered Keyword Setting items All Rea E roneo Read EES D incorrect 3 A Write protection a operation f write All Protect Write cancelled 2 gt Ten write TRA Tea Protect Exa prohibition A prohibition prohibition Cua protection it A E Device monitoring O O O x O O O ome see T C setting values oxun l and file register x x x x O O O Device from D1000 change a Other than the 2 O O O x O O O lt above gt lt 1 When the T C set values are specified indirectly changing devices is available z A gt 3 Difference between All Protect and All operation prohibition US i 7 gt i LO When All Protect is selected both device display and input by the programming tool or GOT are prohibited When All operation prohibition is selected device display and input are possible x although operations by the programming tool are all prohibited z na A 7 aval When Keyword and Customer Keyword is selected on the selection screen for registration and the mm keyword input is completed the Customer Keyword registration screen is the displayed S When the customer keyword is input and the Enter key is touched registration is completed To set the customer keyword 8 digits from 0 to 9 or A to F must be used 3 O
357. pposite i e the power cables are wrapped around the filter However as with all EMC situations the more correctly applied precautions the better the systems Electro magnetic Compatibility The ferrite recommended is a TDK ZCAT3035 1330 or similar The ferrite should be placed as near to the 24V DC terminals of the GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD and GT1150 QLBD as possible which should be within 75mm of the GOT terminal 2 GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA Twist the 24VDC cables to connect to the GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ and GT1150 QLBDA The ferrite filter is required for the 24VDC cables The filter should be attached in a similar manner as shown in the figure opposite i e the power cables are wrapped around the filter However as with all EMC situations the more correctly applied precautions the better the systems Electro magnetic Compatibility The ferrite recommended is a TDK ZCAT3035 1330 or similar The ferrite should be placed as near to the 24V DC terminals of the GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ and GT1150 QLBDA as possible which should be within 75mm of the GOT terminal Up to 75mm 5 7 5 2 EMC DIRECTIVE 5 2 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives
358. pt for special D special M and R Switches the target ACPU in GOT operations in each mode Switches the target program Main Sub in GOT operations in each mode Forcibly changes the ACPU running status between RUN and STOP Performs a read or write operation to the ACPU memory in the machine language 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 65 14 3 12 List of functions UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Dey FILE DISPLAY AND x 8 W pa 1S L m a j e 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 3 13 Basic Operation This section takes an easy operation example to describe the basic operation of the MELSEC A list editor 14 3 14 Reading sequence programs Operation example lt Key operation gt lt Display gt select the Read mode R 7 D20 2 14 END READ 15 gt NOP 16 NOP 2 Read the Oth step O gt LD 1 OR GO SET 0 j eo 2 ANI 3 OUT c0 Q Scroll the screen with the 14 66 14 3 MELSEC A List Editor 14 3 13 Basic Operation 14 3 15 Changing Overwriting commands z O The example shown below is used to describe how to change sequence program commands 2 m gt Before change 5 3 OUT Y010 4 O
359. ption Function DOAN sasrxinsncesssnssincinetinenthobinsbenn danexedanioiebinxeneditonenieieasanidacinaiospebobes 8 5 8 3 1 Applicable option function board ccc cceceeeeeececce cee ce eee ee eee ee ee ceeeaeaeaeceeeceeeeeeeeeeesessensaasaeeeeeeeeeeeeess 8 5 83 2 Pat NaMe Serano on a oot aae a aan advan ten a a beet aaa Ea aiaa aaa aE aiaia 8 5 8 3 3 How to install or remove the option function DOArd cccceceeeceececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeaaecaeeeeeeeeetees 8 6 8 A Batt ry op ee eae ene Be a Bete eaaa a a a aa a te eee eee ne ee eee E ar 8 7 84 1 Applicable battery 4 sccdi sigdetetecisenes Soh vohdd shel igdtend S lets dated 8 7 8 4 2 Battery SPOCINCAUIONS sssi eisa SEE E STEE 8 7 8 4 3 Battery replacement ProCe Cure ccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeceeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaaeaeceeeeeeeeeseteeeenaeeaeseeeeeeeteees 8 7 8 5 Protective Sest er iereies POT ea ice Oar POET Mee Cnr Ono NT et Beer OD IIe Pr aT One 8 10 8 5 1 Applicable protective SHEE ecccccececcceceeeeeeeeeeeceeeaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeecaaeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeesececcnieeeeeeeeeeeess 8 10 8 5 2 Installing ProCeCUne siisii e a Calvin vd encatwennaean a desea divans iia A eet 8 10 8 6 USB Environmental Protection Cover ceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeaeassseesseeeeeeeeeeees 8 11 8 6 1 Applicable USB environmental protection COVED cccccccceceeeeeeeeeenceeaeeeeeeeeeeeseceecniceeeeeeeeeeeeess 8 11 86 2 Installing PrOCCQIUIC eosin a
360. puter link Bus connection i p f connection connection connection G4 1 5 1 Network No 0 FF When the host station z is selected 2 0 When the Su 50 2 Station No FF master 220 station is sxe selected Sein Zu 1 to 64 When a O 0 local station is selected 3 CPU No 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not necessary when the system is connected to another CPU A Displays a comment maximum number of characters 16 one byte characters Zo 4 Comment A comment is displayed when DISPLAY is selected for comment display on the ZRS display format switching screen E Qo Decimal number AOD 5 S6t value Four digits are displayed Display example 1234 Hexadecimal number Four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 5 Decimal number wos Four digits are displayed Display example 1234 EHG 6 Present value Hexadecimal number ista Four digits are displayed Display example H AB12 sas Present values cannot be monitored when the CPU is an FXCPU ooz 7 Device No Up to eight devices can be entered Ss For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered 8 Device name KE GT Designer 2 Version L Screen Design Manual a GT Designer 3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Z When the CPU is a QnACPU or QCPU A program name will be displayed When z there are plural program names the initial z 9 File name file name to be executed will b
361. r Sold separately Product name Contents Connector i F GT10 9PT5S For GOT multi drop connection conversion adapter 2 13 2 2 Component List 2 2 2 Option Optional components for GT11 3 SPECIFICATIONS a is P aA W 3 1 General Specifications 3 3 0 Item Specifications Display 5 Operating p 0 to 50 C d section T ambient Other than i qo temperature f __ O to 55 C when horizontally installed 0 to 50 c when vertically installed HE display section 25 no Storage ambient temperature 20 to 60 C 3 Operating ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH non condensing Storage ambient humidity 10 to 90 RH non condensing g y Half Frequency Acceleration Sweep Count 8 amplitude Compliant Under 5 to 9Hz 3 5mm i Vibration resistance wna IVON 9 to 150H 2 10 ti h B3502and vibration pevoene i 9 8m s a nee Jin an 1IEC61131 2 a Under 5 to 9Hz 1 75mm directions continuous 9 to 150H 5 vibration o Z 4 9m s m p 2 A Shock resistance Compliant with JIS B3502 IEC 61131 2 147 m s 3 times each in X Y and Z directions ba lt Must be free of lamp black corrosive gas flammable gas or excessive amount of S Operating atmosphere j i electro conductive dust particles and must be no direct sunlight Same as for saving Operating altitude 2 2000 m 6562 ft max a Zw Installati
362. r later gt lt Dec 2009 or before gt 3 digit 2 digit TC Month TC Month example Jan example Oct 1 Jan to 9 Sep 1 Jan to 9 Sep X Oct Y Nov Z Dec X Oct Y Nov Z Dec Year example 2010 Year example 2008 Last two digit of year Last digit of year The production date of the battery built in the purchased GOT can be confirmed by the production No S N marked on the GOT main unit a GT1155 QTBD GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Example nameplate manufacture s serial number 1010001 GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QSBD IN 20 4 26 4VDC POWER 9 84W MAX gt I sin 1010001 BC MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN 80M1 IND PONT EQ c US LISTEI lt Jan 2010 or later gt Actual product nameplate 7 digi differs from the shown above 0 1 T L Control number Month example Jan 1 to 9 Jan to Sep X Oct Y Nov Z Dec Year example 2010 Last two digit of year lt Dec 2009 or before gt 6 digit X Oct Y Nov Z Dec T L Control number Month example Oct 1 to 9 Jan to Sep Year example 2009 Last digit of year 8 4 Battery 8 4 3 Battery replacement procedure b GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDQ GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDQ GT1150 QLBDA GRAPHIC OPERATION TERMINAL MODEL GT1155 QTBDQ
363. r of L gt GO gt Top number of S gt GO AnA AnUCPU only used in the latch relay step y relay internal relay L Top number of M gt GO 2 i Set the top device used in the Timer setting low speed high speed h other than AnACPU en Sp 1 gt 3 Top number of timer gt GO gt 2 retentive timers Set the number of timers used the top device number Top device for storage Timer setting that stores the setting value 1 gt 3 gt No of timers gt GO oF setting values 7 AnACPU after T256 and the top k device used in the low speed gt GO gt Top number of timer gt GO gt 2 highspeed retentive timers Set the number of counters Counter setting used and the top device 1 gt 4 No of counters gt GO gt Top device for storage GO 2 AnACPU only number that stores the setting of setting values value after C255 kd y Setting of latch range Set the range of the device 1 gt 5 7 gt Top number of latch gt GO gk i gt 2 WDT setting for latch setting gt 1 gt y gt gt END End number of latch gt GO WDT setting Set the value of the watchdog 1 gt 6 gt WDT value GO gt 2 input unit 10 other than AnA AnU timer in the unit of 10 ms Haia input unit 10 ms Setting of I O control 1 gt 77 gt F gt GO gt 2 system only for Set the I O control system sls A3HCPU and A3MCPU When parameter setting is 2 gt CLEAR
364. racters the 21th character and after are not displayed 4 Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed 5 Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name 6 Date and time Displays the date and time when each file has been created Displays the size in use and the entire size of the drive selected by Select drive 8 Operation switch Displays the execution switch of each function Delete copy which can be executed on the alarm information screen 13 24 9 Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files Point gt Display of creation date and time The creation date and time display is not updated even if a file is created or updated while displaying the alarm information display screen If close the screen currently displayed moving the screen to the folder of the upper hierarchy etc and display the screen again the updated contents are displayed Remark Folders and files displayed Refer to the following for the details of folders and files displayed K Section 13 1 4 Display file 13 4 Alarm Information 13 4 3 The display example of alarm information 13 4 4 Alarm information operation Zz O oO 5 The display operation of alarm information gt Alarm information screen Ed If touch a drive of Select drive the z Program Data Alarm information information in th
365. ransporting the GOT with the low battery voltage or the battery the reached battery life may unstabilize the backup data unstable during transportation Make sure to transport the GOT main unit and or relevant unit s in the manner they will not be exposed to the impact exceeding the impact resistance described in the general specifications of this manual as they are precision devices Failure to do so may cause the unit to fail Check if the unit operates correctly after transportation REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Ver Revision Mar 2005 JY997D17501 Oct 2005 JY997D17501 Nov 2006 May 2007 First edition Partial correcting ABOUT MANUALS ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL Chapter 1 Section 2 2 3 1 3 2 4 2 Chapter 6 7 Section 8 1 8 4 8 5 9 2 9 3 Chapter 10 11 12 13 Section 14 1 14 3 16 2 16 3 17 4 Chapter 18 Appendix2 Appendix 4 Additions Section 13 6 16 4 Partial correcting ABOUT MANUALS ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL Section 2 2 7 1 9 2 9 3 10 1 Chapter 11 Section 13 1 Chapter 14 Section 16 3 16 4 Appendix1 Appendix2 Appendix 4 Additions Section 7 2 13 7 14 8 14 9 A JY997D17501 JY997D17501 Partial revisions ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS IN THIS MANUAL ABOUT MANUALS Section 4 1 Appendix 4 Additions Section 1 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 4 4 2 Chapter 5
366. ration never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS A WARNING When power is on do not touch the terminals Doing so can cause an electric shock or malfunction Connect the battery correctly Do not discharge disassemble heat short solder or throw the battery into the fire Incorrect handling may cause the battery to generate heat burst or take fire resulting in injuries or fires Before starting cleaning or terminal screw retightening always switch off the power externally in all phases Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failure or malfunction Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit STARTUP MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the unit Doing so can cause a failure malfunction injury or fire Do not touch the conductive and electronic parts of the unit directly Doing so can cause a unit malfunction or failure The cables connected to the unit must be run in ducts or clamped Not doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged due to the dangling motion or accidental pulling of the cables or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault When unplugging the cable connected to the uni
367. rd Error occurred in the specified file register when executing the recipe 7 function by specifying the file register name File system error occurred in ON 1 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the file register 356 PLC name Confirm file register i F 2 Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer 18 4 18 2 List of Error Message System Alarm Error Error message Action code When executing the recipe function specifying the file register name error occurred in PLC CPU drive 357 Error in specified PLC drive 1 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC Confirm PLC drive CPU drive 2 Execute the recipe function again after formatting the PC memory in the specified PLC CPU drive with GX Developer When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name PLC CPU file register could not be accessed PLC file access failure Ka Si 358 Execute the recipe function again after confirming the specified PLC CPU Confirm PLC drive S i P drive file register name When you specify drive 0 execute the recipe function again after changing to other drives When the recipe function is executed specifying the file register name Processing from another i other peripherals carry out the process to the file register 359 peripheral device
368. re removing the CF card from 6 CF card access switch ON art card being accessed CF card removal prohibited OFF No access to CF card CF card removal possible 7 CF card cover Open or close when inserting or removing the CF card 8 Option function board option Connect when using optional functions 9 Option function board cover Remove when using the option function board 10 Reset switch Hardware reset switch Use an isolated rod to operate 11 Battery cover Open or close when replacing the battery 12 Power terminal Al and FG terminal for power supply 24VDC to GOT and 13 Power terminal cover Open or close when connecting a power terminal Color transparent 14 CF card interface Interface for installing the CF card to GOT 15 CF card eject button Button for removing the CF card GT11 50BAT battery for storing clock data alarm history recipe data and 16 Battery time action setting value The project data is stored in the built in flash memory 17 Terminating resistor selector switch Terminating resistor selector of RS422 485 4 2 Back Panel 3302 OPEN 110Q At factory shipment 3300 E GT1155 QTBDQ GT1155 QSBDQ GT1150 QLBDQ GT1155 QTBDA GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA
369. ready installed Existing 0S Ver 01 02 C Expected 0S Ver 01 01 B Because of version down GOT aborts installing o Touch the OK button to cancel the installation Restart the GOT b When the Boot OS Standard monitor OS and other OSs are stored on the CF card The installation of the Boot OS will be skipped and an installation of the Standard monitor OS and other OSs will take place The following message will appear if the Standard monitor OS is already installed on the GOT Boot OS has been already installed Existing OS Ver 01 00 A Expected 0S Ver 01 00 A Existing basic OS and other OS and project data will be deleted Do you want to install OK Cancel Touching the OK button will start the installation Touching the Cancel button will stop the installation 16 8 16 4 When Installing the Different Version of BootOS Standard Monitor OS Regardless of the types of data as described in section a and b above on the CF card or whether the version of the OS to be installed is the same as the current one or newer a window Zz that has the version information and a message that asks whether to continue installation will 2 appear 9 ppear 5 gt 5 Boot OS has been already installed Existing OS Ver 01 00 A 2 Expected 0S Ver 01 00 A Existing basic 0S and other OS and
370. rol equipment manufactured by each corporation Temperature controller Generic term for temperature controller manufactured by each corporation Indicating controller Generic term for indicating controller manufactured by each corporation CHINO controller Abbreviation of indicating controller manufactured by CHINO CORPORATION PC CPU module Abbreviation of PC CPU Unit manufactured by CONTEC CO LTD GOT server Abbreviation of GOTs that use the server function GOT client Abbreviation of GOTs that use the client function Windows font Abbreviation of TrueType font and OpenType font available for Windows Differs from the True Type fonts settable with GT Designer3 Intelligent function module Indicates the modules other than the PLC CPU power supply module and I O module that are mounted to the base unit MODBUS RTU Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a serial communication MODBUS TCP Generic term for the protocol designed to use MODBUS protocol messages on a TCP IP network HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL Functions This manual describes functions available for the GT Designer2 Version 2 96A GT Designer3 Version1 28E For the added functions by the product version upgrade refer to the list of functions added by GT Designer2 version upgrade in Appendices Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual 13 3 3 Memo
371. ry check operation Carries out write read check of memory F Refers to the information Aaa ied Point P When drive is not displayed require When the drive memory to check is not displayed confirm the mounting procedure a i EN or memory type with reference to the following a Remark CF card inserting removing method gt Section 7 1 CF Card When no faults are found in mounting etc a memory failure may be arosen Replace the CF card or Flash memory For details of Flash memory contact your neares sales office or FA Center Refers to the supplementary explanations for reference i The following example explains about Memory Check using Flash memory For the CF card memory check install the CF card before carrying out the same key operations as built in flash memory Indicates the items in which the detailed Select Flash Memory in the Memory check explanation is described manual chapter setting screen and touch the Check button section item of the manual Internal Flush memory area write read check INgelect the OK button the numeric keyboard winWow is displayed 0 0 0 If select the Cancel button the screen returns to the initial menu Indicates the operation steps Execute now 0K Cancel too Menu and items are differentiated with 2 Touch BEB and then Enter parentheses The password is fixed to 5920 Touchin
372. s connected to the remote I O station in MELSECNET H network system only the master station can be monitored The access range other than above is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 14 2 System Monitor 14 11 14 2 1 Specifications UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww op a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF Precautions 1 Monitoring and testing real number data Real number data cannot be monitored and tested All word devices containing real number data are monitored in integer data binary data 2 Monitoring devices in 32 bit two word module When monitoring word devices T C D W etc in 32 bit two word module those with 32 bits of data remaining are monitored Devices with 16 bits one word of data remaining are not monitored If an odd number is specified for the first monitor device number the last device number of the specified controller will not be displayed Example When the data entry of the A2ZNCPU is monitored in units of 32 bits from odd numbers D1
373. s displayed Closes the option menu Be j LON Commands cannot be deleted with this key lt gt Subsection 14 4 11 Deleting commands 52 ame Space key ator on This key is used when setting timers and counters writing applied commands etc Displays the list from a specified step No when the step No is input oO 9 Fe FEA mee al Moves the list display area bar up and down and switches the line being edited DRA ogn Determines the key operation Q w w Inputs commands device names etc z to The key contents depend on the input contents z The commands that can be used differ depending on the target FX PLC T o a Refer to the manual for the FX PLC to be used a to etc 4 me x Exits the MELSEC FX list editor 1 Keyboard switching Touching the MORE button switches the command keyboard 1 and command keyboard 2 When you touch the button for a keyboard function the optimum keyboard for input for that function is displayed automatically Command keyboard 1 Command keyboard 2 x oO Ww pa 1S L Ww N a O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 91 14 4 5 Operation procedures 14 4 6 Selection and operation of modes The MELSEC F X list editor has four modes READ WRITE INSERT and DELETE Select an appropriate mode for the intended operation For more information on the mode to sele
374. scenseeeeeeeess 11 12 11 4 Security Level Change os cccucrics es se recta cnitarts dacs eeioae ae ennenen reee eer ereere erenn 11 14 11 4 1 Security level change functions 00 0 0 eee e eect eee eentte ee eeeeeae eset etaeeeeeeeeaeeeesesaaeeeeseenaeeeeeeeeaaas 11 14 11 4 2 Security change display Operation sissies meire eee raneren rand rne EAEAN AEREE 11 14 11 4 3 Security level change oparatoM ncen aE A A 11 15 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting xccscccccscccccectecesstecctscssessseseavescescensvestersvenssvectedennstenntedniesmnwos 11 16 11 5 1 Utility call key Setting function accent Hentai i 11 16 11 5 2 Utility call key display operation 0 eect eect eetne eee teeter eee eeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeaeeeeeeaas 11 16 11 5 3 Utility call key setting operation 12 CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY TIME SETTING AND DISPLAY 12 1 to 12 5 12 1 Time Setting and DiSOIAY sascisisciettetiesessscasesedideadedieidecadhpidehiedsnsaadadeeaateedaatdhaestunceoee 12 1 12 1 1 Time setting and display FUNCTIONS eee cette eee ente eee eee e eee et taaeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeiaeeseeeaas 12 1 12 1 2 Display operation of clock display and Setting ccc ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeenneeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeeeeseaes 12 1 12 1 3 Clock setting OPerations cc cece ee eeteeeee eee onenian EEEn Naana NEN naaie a 12 2 PROGRAM DATA CONTROL 0 45 13 1 to 13 36 13 1 Data Storage LOCAMNOM sieisen eaea e e aa aa
375. se an accident due to false output or malfunction If a communication error including cable disconnection occurs while monitoring on the GOT communication between the GOT and PLC CPU is suspended and the GOT becomes inoperative as described below 1 GT1155 QSBD GT1150 QLBD Become inoperative 2 PLC CPU shuts down and the GOT becomes inoperative For the system configuration with GOT assuming communication error occurs in the GOT the switches for critical operation to the system should be set in the device other than GOT False output or malfunction may occur Do not use the GOT as the warning device that may cause a serious accident An independent and redundant hardware or mechanical interlock is required to configure the device that displays and outputs serious warning Failure to observe this instruction may result in an accident due to incorrect output or malfunction DESIGN PRECAUTIONS A WARNING Incorrect operation of the touch switch s may lead to a serious accident if the GOT backlight is gone out When the GOT backlight goes out the POWER LED flickers green orange and the display section turns black and causes the monitor screen to appear blank while the input of the touch switch s remains active This may confuse an operator in thinking that the GOT is in screensaver mode who then tries to release the GOT from this mode by touching the display section which may cause a touch switch to operate Note th
376. selected drive or contained in the selected folder When the file or folder name exceeds 18 characters the 19th and later characters are not displayed If the displayed project data is a GOT monitoring target file mark precedes the file name If the displayed project data is currently selected to be displayed asterisk precedes the file name 3 Name Path name Displays the path name of drive folder which is currently displayed Size Displays the size of the file displayed in Name Date and time Displays the date and time when each file is installed Size of the drive Displays the size in use size of the drive selected in Select drive Displays the execution switch of functions download upload etc which can be 8 Operation switch Bo Aus carried out in Project information 9 Number of files Displays the total number of the displayed files Remark Displayed folders and files Refer to the following for the details of displayed folders and files K7 Section 13 1 4 Display file 13 14 13 3 Project Information 13 3 3 Display example of project information 13 3 4 Operation of project information Display operation of project information Project information screen Program Data Project information Belect drive A Built in CF card C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM ae Project information screen Storage file folder display scre
377. sent value operation screen for word devices 16 bit one word module 32 bit two word module BM VAL 16 BM VAL 32 Present value operation screen for buffer memory 16 bit one word module 32 bit two word module 1 Displays a network No 2 Displays a station No 3 Displays a CPU No 4 Sets on off Displays whether decimal or hexadecimal is selected D Decimal H Hexadecimal O ST No DEV IGE i i VOID 7 Sets a T C set value ne _I_isy4 y E TS ECS ie nis Enter Del At x DEVICE I ine a 5 cots tro procent DEANNA o IDIKI RI tp HAA 6 Enter Del A 9 Sets the initial I O signal of a module ST Ta 0 HEX 1 0 NOU Ti 8 94 Bl aly AlS 6 0 DI 4 gt SETA ea a Es O Jae Enter_ Del Ac 14 2 System Monitor 14 43 14 2 27 Information and set items displayed on each setting key window screen 5 Sets a device number 6 Sets a device name 10 Sets the initial device number of the buffer memory UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Pe FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa 1S L Ww N a O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 2 Set items on the setting key window screen The table shown below describes details of
378. so may result in an electric shock product damage or malfunctions Please make sure to ground FG terminal of the GOT power supply section by applying 100Q or less 5 which is used exclusively for the GOT 25 Not doing so may cause an electric shock or malfunction g N Correctly wire the GOT power supply section after confirming the rated voltage and terminal os arrangement of the product Not doing so can cause a fire or failure Tighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range 2 Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or the GOT O Exercise care to avoid foreign matter such as chips and wire offcuts entering the GOT g Not doing so can cause a fire failure or malfunction 2 WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Plug the communication cable into the connector of the connected unit and tighten the mounting z and terminal screws in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction z Overtightening can cause a short circuit or malfunction due to the damage of the screws or unit z This chapter describes the wiring to the GOT power supply section y 1 For the connection with a PLC refer to the following lt 2 O GOT1000 Series Connection Manual F o 586 2 For the dimensional drawing of connection cables refer to the following Ba S Appendix 1 External Dimensio
379. splay and monochrome display In the monochrome display 16 scales are used to improve the display e High speed monitoring through high speed serial communication at maximum tare of 115 2 kbps or through bus connection with the PLC e High speed display and high speed touch switch response More efficient GOT operations including screen design startup adjustment management and maintenance works The 3MB user memory is included as standard e CF card interface is included as standard The USB connector is positioned on the GOT front This enables the system startup to be performed more efficiently using FA device setup tool and eliminates the indirect works opening and closing the control panel cable replacement cable rewiring in order to improve the working efficiency Enhanced support of FA setup tools e PLC program transfer and monitoring are possible via the personal computer that is connected to the GOT if connected directly to the A QnA L Q or FX series of the PLC CPU FA transparent function 1 1 Features 1 2 Rough Pre operation Procedure 1 The outline procedure before operating GOT is shown z 4 Start S x Refer to GT Designer2 Version Install GT Designer2 or GT Designer3 in the PC Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual _ Refer to GT Designer3 Version Screen Design Manual Fundamentals E Refer to GT Designer2 Version O E
380. st Changing device values by performing a quick test Display switching Displaying device comments Displaying word device and buffer memory values in decimal or hexadecimal Direct CPU connection A Computer link connection CC Link connection G4 s A GOT multidrop connection 1 The present value of Z cannot be changed None of the connection forms supports V 2 When the GOT is connected to a QnACPU whose date shown on the rating plate is earlier than 9707B device comments cannot be displayed 3 Indicates CC Link connection via G4 14 2 System Monitor Reference Subsection 14 2 10 Subsection 14 2 14 Subsection 14 2 17 Subsection 14 2 21 Subsection 14 2 24 Subsection 14 2 8 Subsection 14 2 7 14 7 14 2 1 Specifications UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND lt O W E uw W 9 O 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 3 When the GOT is connected to a ACPU QCPU A mode or A series motion controller CPU O Available A Partly restricted x Unavailable Function Connection type between GOT and controller Name Entry monitor Description Monitoring present values by entering devices t
381. st Editor 14 3 1 Specifications Required option OS and option function board Z The option OS and option function board shown below are required S ms Option OS OS memory space user area Option function board E MELSEC A list editor OKB GT11 50FNB 5 1 Option OS Install the option OS in the above table to the GOT e Refer to the following manual for the procedure for installing the option OS 2 q lt 3 GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual 30 5 GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Zy biu 2 OS memory space ozo The available memory space shown in the table above is required in the user area to install the option OS to the GOT Refer to the following manual for the procedure for checking the available memory space of the a user area and information about the data using other user areas 25 gt EO lt gt GT Designer2 Version O Basic Operation Data Transfer Manual nee GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Egy 3 Option function board Mount one of the option function boards in the above table on the GOT o For how to mount an option function board on the GOT refer to the following manual 2 gt 4 gt Section 8 3 Option Function Board BES n 14 3 2 Access range OH The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller 9 Refer to the following manual for details of the access range a gt GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design
382. starts normally the dialog mentioned left notifying that it is on checking until the CPU communication check ends normally 4 When the CPU communication check ends its result is notified by dialog If the CPU communication check ends normally the dialog notifying of the normal termination mentioned left is displayed If touch the button in the dialog after confirming the result returns to I O check If the dialog mentioned left is displayed after selecting or during CPU communication check confirm the following e No misconnection with CPU gt GOT1000 Series Connection Manual e No hardware error C GOT1000 Series Connection Manual e No missettings of parameter Section 10 2 Communication Detail Settings If touch the OK button in the dialog after confirming the result returns to I O check Self loopback Display unit bac RS232 communication check Error The following cause Connection error H N error parameter setting error Restart CPU communication check Executing now CPU communication check No error Restart D For preparation for the self loopback communication check insert the connector for self loopback check Customer purchased shown in the diagram left in the RS 232 interface For this connector short 2 and 3 pins 7 and 8 pins 4 and 6 pins respectively Set the interface channel setting for the self loopback check to no
383. t Section 9 3 Utility Display OE l p Communication setting Tea 0S information GOT setup fei Alarm information Time setting amp display Taj Project iggormation Progran dataggontrol Debug amp self cj J Henory card Form Touch Project information Program data control a Se N N Py AND BATTERY Project information Program Data Project information 5 Belect drive 5 u onal A Built in CF card w aad O C Flash Memory Select the drive and operate project data file D Internal SRAM ue On 92 Ss z4 to Hao OQ CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 3 Project Information 13 13 13 3 1 Function of project information 13 3 3 Display example of project information Project information screen Storage file folder display screen Project information screen Program Data Project information Belect drive A i Built in CF card nd gt a C Flash Memory D Internal SRAM Data check Property Number Item Contents The drive by which a file or folder is displayed can be selected 1 Select drive Ps F When the CF card is not connected A Built in CF card is not displayed Indicates the type of the displayed name file or folder 2 Kind The file is indicated with an extension while the folder is indicated with DIR Displays the name of file or folder saved in the
384. t do not hold and pull the cable portion Doing so can cause the unit or cable to be damaged or can cause a malfunction due to a cable connection fault Do not drop or apply any impact to the battery If any impact has been applied discard the battery and never use it The battery may be damaged by the drop or impact Before touching the unit always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body etc Not doing so can cause the unit to fail or malfunction Replace battery with GT11 50BAT by Mitsubishi electric Co only Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion Dispose of used battery promptly Keep away from children Do not disassemble and do not dispose of in fire DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When disposing of the product handle it as industrial waste When disposing of batteries separate them from other wastes according to the local regulations For details of the battery directive in EU member states refer to 17 4 PA TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to Appendix 3 for details of the regulated units Before transporting the GOT turn the GOT power on and check that the battery voltage status is normal on the Time setting amp display screen utilities screen In addition confirm that the adequate battery life remains on the rating plate T
385. t compatible with 2nd keyword 2nd keyword is ignored 1 For details on FX PLCs compatible with the 2nd keyword or customer keyword refer to the following C FX series PLCs Manual Protect A keyword with cancelled protection is reactivated for protection Keyword protection function is valid when the 2nd keyword is registered Touching the Protect key activates keyword protection 10 2 Communication Detail Settings 10 15 10 2 3 Display contents of communication detail settings an UTILITY FUNCTION 1 w g Le ae im Z EA O lt 9 z St ZYE E Eiu SEA DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 11 DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS GOT SET UP Setting screen for display and setting screen for operation can be displayed from GOT setup In the setting screen for display and the setting screen for operation the following settings can be set Screen Description Reference page Opening screen time screen save time screen save backlight language battery alarm display 11 1 Setting screen for display invert colors Brightness contrast 11 8 Buzzer volume window move buzzer key sensitivity key reaction speed 11 12 Setting screen for Security setting 11 12 operation Utility ca
386. t even if any problem or fault should occur in the graphic operation terminal device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi graphic operation terminal has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or Public service purposes shall be excluded from the graphic operation terminal applications In addition applications in which human life or property that could be greatly affected such as in aircraft medical applications incineration and fuel devices manned transportation equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices shall also be excluded from the graphic operation terminal range of applications However in certain cases some applications may be possible providing the user consults their local Mitsubishi representative outlining the special requirements of the project and providing that all parties concerned agree to the special circumstances solely at the users discretion GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows Vista Windows 7 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
387. t is generated by cables that cross each other may cause malfunctions Surge suppressors are an effective way to filter out surge noise that is generated from no fuse breakers NFB electromagnetic contactors MC relays RA solenoid valves and induction motors Refer to the section to follow for surge killers 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers to control equipment Uncrossed power lines and Crossing power lines and communication cables communication cables GOT connection cable GOT connection cable i ENE Terminal block PLC I O wire A Drive control wire Terminal block 7 2 2 Outside the panel To pull the power line and communication cable out of the panel make two pullout holes away from each other and pull the cables through Putting both cables through the same pullout hole will increase noise interference Power line Power line Connection Sy cable Connection H cable ME Pullout hole Pullout hole Keep the power line and communication cable inside the duct at least 100 mm away from each other If that is not possible the use of a metal separator inside the duct can reduce noise interference Power line 100mm or more Signal line power line Signal line Wiring the power line and communication cable inside the duct Wiring duct Separator 7 6 7 2 Wiring inside and outside the panel 7 2 1 Wiring inside 7 2 3 Attaching surge killers
388. table range and the default value lt gt Programming manual for the FX PLC used 14 106 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 14 Parameter setting 2 Key functions z The table below shows the functions of the keys that are used for the operation on the parameter 2 setting screen 2 m 2 Key Function Defau t Initializes the parameters z O Completes the changed setting contents T ow 50 Skz x Ends parameter setting Suit O5 u 020 14 4 15 Keywords oz Loe 452 2 Registers deletes releases protection for and sets protection for the FX PLC keywords otk AON Function usability of the MELSEC FX list editor for keyword protection levels The functions that can be used with the MELSEC FX list editor depend on the keyword protection level 9 gt Zz O Available X Unavailable ae meS Keyword protection level en ore Function All operation protect Reag incorrect prie Incorrect write Keyword not Reference oga All on line operation protecuon protect Write registered keyword CR protect ee protect protect 2 protection canceled f Displaying sequence Subsection a Reading programs a E O O 14 4 7 A sequence z programs Searching commands Subsection devices A a 2 3 14 4 8 2 W o Subsection Writing Writing commands x x x O jae tS sequence 1 programs Changing operands set Subsection values x x x O 14 4 10 5 W Subsection T Inserting
389. ted or not 41 If setting 0 the title screen is not hidden The title screen is always displayed for 4 seconds or longer which changes depending on the project data contents ON OFF lt At factory shipment OFF gt 2 Applicated to GT1150 QLBD only Standard monitor OS Ver 03 01 00 or later 11 1 11 1 Display Settings BootOS Ver 03 01 M or later 11 1 1 Display setting functions Point 1 Display setting by drawing software Set title display period screen save time and screen save backlight at GOT set up in System Environment of GT Designer2 When using GT Designer3 execute the settings at GOT Setup of GOT Environmental Setting When change a part of the setting after downloading the project data change the setting by Display screen of the GOT L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Screen save and screen save backlight OFF function When using the screen save and screen save back light OFF function select valid invalid by the system information reading device in System Environment of GT Designer2 When using GT Designer3 select valid invalid by the reading device of System Information in GOT Environmental Setting For system information details refer the following L gt GT Designer2 Version Screen Design Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals 11 1 Display Settings 11 2 11 1 1 Display se
390. terface Specifications x jencxcsdicedeUosacedcs scl danaventvdliecindasiAvactatedanadedboskccasdadeabuciedds 3 6 3 4 Power Supply Specifications amciticarciasedcinincdachesescinpecdcnenncherhrexaudsenhenmdisaatiacdtoncacenctas 3 8 Av PART NAME secicessctvsatiesioisssoteisitetivenisnerssteriavieolael 4 1 to 4 4 4 mont eane e a a 4 1 42 Back ANN acces sates e E A E E emt 4 2 5 UL cUL STANDARDS AND EMC DIRECTIVE EA E O E A A E A 5 1 to 5 8 5 LUL CUL Standards cicien ieee ew ele 5 1 5 2 EMC DIREC TWV E ecien eeaeee Ea aE E E ea e EE eNi 5 1 5 2 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive aessseseessnessssrresseennesersnnnaasetnneeenannnastnennectnanne 5 1 5 2 2 System Configuration when EMC Directive is Applicable ccceeeeeeeeceeceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeens 5 4 5 2 3 Wiring Precautions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives 00 cece eee e tree eeeeees 5 5 6 INSTALLATION pocosscciasniicatdisseseicarerwuninavosunuesdates 6 1 to 6 7 6 1 Control Panel Inside Dimensions for Mounting GOT ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeettteaaeees 6 2 6 2 Panel Cutting IMS SIND Sx cteca wca ach aed oe etcos aes rentree ereere ereenn ceed nenene eene 6 4 6 3 UIT POSION sesh erinet edn ds cececeiedte core ee es iiaa 6 4 6 4 Control Panel Temperature and Mounting Angle 2 2 cccccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneceeeeeeeee 6 5 6 5 Installation Procedure i i cadundencanecdadnddducumanaituiscstadadtenenianacndcdadbaansinecetadatec
391. the set items mentioned on the preceding page Description of setting N i CC Link o tem Direct CPU Computer link Bus connection gt connection connection connection G4 1 1 Net No 0 FF When the host station is selected 0 When the master 2 Station number FF PEA station is selected 1 to 64 When a local station is selected 3 CPUN 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not o necessary when the system is connected to another CPU 4 On Off setting Set 1 On Set 0 Off 5 Device No For further information about device numbers and names that can be entered GT Designer 2 Version O Screen Design Manual 6 Device name f GT Designer 3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fundamentals Decimal number 16 bit one word module Six digits including a digit for a sign are set Entry example 12345 32 bit two word module Ten digits including a digit for a sign are set Entry example 123456789 7 T C set value a D displayed in the number entry box indicates that the entry is decimal Hexadecimal number 16 bit one word module Four digits are set Entry example H AB12 32 bit two word module Eight digits are set Entry example H ABCDE123 H displayed in the number entry box indicates that the entry is hexadecimal Decimal number 16 bit one word module Six digits including a d
392. thod of CoreOS 23 Fie Before installing CoreOS pka x5 1 Installation method Sok CoreOS can be installed only using the memory card ees The installation via USB RS 232 or Ethernet is not available 2 CF card to be used z CF card of 32MB or more is required amp oO 3 BootOS 5 gt By installing CoreOS BootOS is also installed with its latest version automatically zQ No operation is required to the user zz D a O na 7 kK O oO We oO Z i 1 STANDARD MONITOR OS op DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND 16 5 CoreOS 16 11 16 5 1 Installation method of CoreOS Installation method of CoreOS ae Write CoreOS from drawing software to the Memory card wite Boot OS wite Core 0S write CF card Points of caution aA For details on the operation method of lt How to Install gt drawing software refer to the following L irun nite GOT and insert Core0S installed Memory card into the GOT Do not tum OFF or reset GOT during Core0S installation to avoid failing pa manual an wil take a few minutes to start Core S installation After completion of installation restart GOT after tuming OFF removing Memory Reinstall and download the followings after GOT is restarted 1 Basic 0S Communications driver Required other OS pesa oe LC GT Designer2 Version O Basic ep ls cased o enson E it ble Ge rtlson Operation Data Transfer Manual GT Designer3 Version1 Screen Design Manual Fund
393. tility Display Operation GOT setup Operation Buzzer volume Window move buzzer Touch an item to Security setting Setting PEES Utility call key Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 Key reaction speed Standar d 0 ms OK Point gt Restart after setting change If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the X button after the setting of each item excluding the security setting is changed and touch the button on the GOT setup screen the GOT will restart After GOT restarts it is displayed with the changed settings If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above the setting contents are canceled without reflected GOT setup EJ Display Ci Operation If touch X the GOT restarts and the changes are reflected 11 11 11 3 Operation Settings 11 3 2 Display operation of operation setting 11 3 3 Setting operation of operation Zz O E S 5 Buzzer volume window move buzzer S E SAE i x Setting items are changed if setting item is touched Window move buzzer ON ee Z Security setting Setting Buzzer volume SHORT LONG _ OFF E ope 7 ow ELE CEEA HSY Setting Window move buzzer OFF Ss ON 220 Jaisa DuZ Key sensitivity 6 Max 8 e Key reaction speed Standard 0 ms
394. ting commands 14 4 11 Subsection Sequence program all clear 14 4 12 Subsection PLC diagnostics RUN veer O O O O STOP Display Subsection Parameter setting k For Stop Set O O A x 14 4 14 only K 4 RUN Subsection eywor i O O O O STOP 14 415 1 The operation is available only when the protect switch is OFF 2 The available memory differs depending on the FX PLC being used For further information see the following manual The hardware manual of the FX PLC being used 14 4 2 Access range The access range is the same as the access range when the GOT is connected to a controller Refer to the following manual for details of the access range 14 86 lt 3 GT Designer2 Version O Screen Design Manual GOT1000 Series Connection Manual Mitsubishi Products for GT Works3 14 4 MELSEC FX List Editor 14 4 2 Access range 14 4 3 Precautions Zz O 1 Using other peripheral equipment for sequence program parameter change S When using the MELSEC FX list editor do not change programs or parameters in the PLC CPU z from other peripheral equipment 5 If you make a change temporarily exit the MELSEC F X list editor after the change is made then 5 start the MELSEC FX list editor again If you carelessly change the program on one PLC from multiple units of peripheral equipment z including GOT the contents of the program in the PLC CPU and the peripheral equipment may 2 not be
395. tion procedure common to the system monitor screens 14 2 4 Functional change menu screen This subsection describes the configuration of the functional change menu screen and the functions of the keys displayed on it The table below describes the functions of the keys displayed on the functional change menu screen 14 14 Key Function Performs entry monitoring in the Entry Monitor window DEV MON Subsection 14 2 10 Entry monitor Performs batch monitoring in the Batch Monitor window BAT MON Subsection 14 2 14 Batch monitor Performs TC monitoring in the TC Monitor window TC MON ae gt Subsection 14 2 17 TC Monitor Monitoring Timers and Counters Performs buffer memory monitoring in the BM Monitor window BM MON SO Subsection 14 2 21 BM monitor monitoring buffer memory The system monitor function is deactivated and the screen returns to Main Menu END of the utility 14 2 System Monitor If the system is activated from the User screen the screen returns to it 14 2 3 Operation procedure common to the system monitor screens 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Zz O E This subsection describes how to specify network numbers monitor stations and monitor devices by taking 2 the Entry Monitor window as an example z The procedure for specifying network numbers monitor stations and monitor devi
396. tis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the
397. to change the value display format DEC HEX on the Entry a FORM Monitor screen or comment no comment display 2 lt L3 Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display on Z Switches the screen to the Device entry screen to enter monitor devices or delete or test entry devices 2t Su Entering monitor devices 37 Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices elem SET Deleting entry devices 37 Subsection 14 2 13 Deleting entry devices Test operation gt Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation Scroll displayed information upward or downward by a line to display the preceding or next monitor device that is not currently displayed When five or more monitor devices are entered these switches are available when their comments S zz are displayed ION aj yy x9 A Scrolls information upward by a line TME Yow aon v Scrolls information downward by a line 3 The following table below describes the range of display of items 1 to 10 displayed A o lt Feee Description of setting Em WES 7 oO No Item Bus Direct CPU Computer link CC Link connection lt 8 Om connection connection connection G4 1 oga OLN 1 Network No 0 F When the host station is selected 2 Station No FF 0 When the master station is selected z 1 to 64 When a local station is selected z l 3 CPUN 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multipl
398. tor3 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT SoftGOT1000 Abbreviation of monitoring software GT SoftGOT1000 GT Converter2 Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series GT Designer2 Classic Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 Classic for GOT900 series GT Designer2 Abbreviation of screen drawing software GT Designer2 for GOT1000 GOT900 series iQ Works Abbreviation of iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works MELSOFT Navigator Generic term for integrated development environment software included in the SWQDNC IQWK iQ Platform compatible engineering environment MELSOFT iQ Works GX Works2 Abbreviation of SW O DNC GXW2 E and SW O DNC GXW2 EA type programmable controller engineering software GX Simulator2 Abbreviation of GX Works2 with the simulation function GX Simulator Abbreviation of SW O D5C LLT E EV type ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT EV or later versions GX Developer Abbreviation of SW O D5C GPPW E EV SW D5F GPPW E type software package GX LogViewer Abbreviation of SW O DNN VIEWER E type software package PX Developer Abbreviation of SW O D5C FBDQ E type FBD software package for process control MT Works2 Abbreviation of motion controller engineering environment MELSOFT MT Works2 SWO DNC MTW2 E MT Developer A
399. ts will not be displayed when any of the devices listed below is monitored e Internal device of the GOT GB GD GS e Host device X Y WW WR when a CC Link is connected d Displaying the comments of QCPUs QO02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU Q25PHCPU Q12PRHCPU Q25PRHCPU QO2UCPU QO3UDCPU QO4UDHCPU QO6UDHCPU Comments will not be displayed when the following PLC parameters PLC file settings are set e When the comment file is set to Not used e When the comment file is set to Use the same file name as the program e When a password is set to the comment file e When a comment file is stored in program memory e Displaying the comments of QCPUs QOOJCPU QOO0CPU Q01CPU Comments will not be displayed when the following PLC parameter PLC file setting is set e When the comment file MAIN does not exist in the program memory f Displaying the comments of QnACPUs With a QnACPU whose date on the rating plate is earlier than 9707B comments cannot be displayed Use a QnACPU whose date on the rating plate is 9707B or later Also comments will not be displayed when the following settings are made to the PLC parameter PLC file setting is set When the comment file is not set Not used e When the comment file is set to Use the same file name as the program e When a keyword is entered for each memory 14 20 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment dis
400. tting functions z O S Z ms gt E ke 3 z O Su 50 Z See zk occu 020 G Zz Soe gt 42 Qik Ooty OOV CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY FILE DISPLAY AND COPY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS 11 1 2 Display operation of display setting Main menu GOT setup Section 9 3 Utility Display ain Mer nr n se ine seOANG displa Program Debug amp sel Display Opening screen time Sec Screen save time 0 Min O None Screen save backlight Battery alarm display Touch an item to Brightness contrast Setting change settings Point gt Restart after setting change If return the display to the GOT setup screen by touching the button after the setting of each item is changed and touch the X button on the GOT setup screen the GOT will restart After GOT restarts it is displayed with the changed settings If restarted the GOT by powering OFF the GOT without the procedure above the setting contents are canceled without reflected GOT setup If touch X the GOT restarts and the changes are reflected 11 3 11 1 Display Settings 11 1 2 Display operation of display setting 11 1 3 Display setting operations Zz o Opening screen time screen save t
401. u Zz data is stored in the CF card interface of ate e GOT SER SET 2 Switch ON the CF card access switch of GOT Q Power ON the GOT touching the upper and 25x ke lower left corners of the GOT screen See oit AON N A a gt oak oth BootOS and Standard monitor OS are Boot0S 4 YAKILA CT installed in the built in Flash memory Now installing Boot0S Qa The CF card access LED is lit during lt installation Do not pull out the CF card or power off the ze GOT while the CF card access LED is lit 26 zz O T O 5 GOT restarts automatically after installation D GOTe REIL ET is completed Reboot When Standard monitor OS is already installed touch the OK button to reboot S the GOT aE On N 7 After confirming that GOT restarted Z normally switch OFF the CF card access ng switch of GOT 22 1 O Confirm the CF card access LED is extinguished remove the CF card from the CF interface of GOT a al Sa te Wyte ooz ZEO Sir ova TEE 30s z702 Eo 25x Zon 16 3 BootOS and Standard Monitor OS Installation Using CF Card 16 5 16 3 1 Installation method when the GOT is turned on 16 3 2 Installation method using the program data control function Utility For details of program data control function refer to the following lt gt Chapter 13 FILE DISPLAY AND COPY PROGRAM DATA CONTROL Program data control is a function to install OS files from the CF card t
402. und Proceed to the next operation found Not found The specified device cannot be found Proceed to the next operation Check the program memory space and delete commands 2 i O St p oveifiowi The program may exceed the available to keep it within the space k space Writing is not executed On lt 3 Subsection 14 4 11 Deleting commands gy Z An invalid command non existent 25 Command error ait Input the correct command Wop command was specified oo Zz O If an incorrect key is input cancel the input contents o R gt Operation z 5 1 Before touching the GO key before reading writing the input contents Before touching the GO key touch the CLR key 6 z cy 2 After touching the GO key after reading writing the input contents 5x2 Sve Write the command again lt gt Subsection 14 4 9 Writing commands zuk oer ve 020 Commands finalized by writing and inserting operations are revised overwritten with the program writing 14 4 18 Error messages and corrective actions a SOR 452 This section describes the error messages displayed when the MELSEC F X list editor is executed and puik corrective action AON Error Message Description Corrective action A 2 z Z gt Can not display while Check the protected operation Feo rotected hi i iari Thal apetatlon protect antizplagiarism i Clear the keyword protection or delete the keyword pRa Can not operate while or incorrect
403. unt the GOT refer to the following L3 Section 6 5 Installation Procedure For details of the stand refer to the following pE GT05 50STAND lt gt GOT1000 series User s Manual A9GT 50STAND A9YGT SOSTAND User s Manual 8 12 8 7 Stand 8 7 1 Applicable stand 8 8 Protective cover for oil Use of the protective cover for oil improves waterproof property oil resistance and chemical resistance of the GOT S ii 8 8 1 Applicable protective cover for oil 2 The following protective covers for oil are applicable to the GT100 z Product name Contents z Protective cover for oil For 5 7 GOT fi 2 8 8 2 Installation procedure 2 fe os 3 ey z Point gt Before attaching protective cover for oil G A protective film is attached on the display area when the GOT is shipped Make g N sure to remove the protective film before attaching the protective cover for oil For attaching the protective cover for oil to the GOT already mounted on the control panel follow the procedures as below Remove the GOT from the control panel Make sure to externally shut off all phases of the power supply and remove all cables from the GOT in 3 advance e Clean dirt off surfaces of the GOT and control panel Q When the USB environmental protection cover is installed on the GOT D S u remove the cover sE E 2 After removing the cover put the USB connector protective sticker on the 59 G O
404. utions the Part which Matches the EMC Directives 2 Bus connection cable The following products are used in the EMC specification compatibility test conducted by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation e ZCAT3035 1330 ferrite core manufactured by TDK corporation e AD75CK type cable clamp manufactured by MITSUBISHI e Zipper tube SHNJ type manufactured by Zippertubing Japan Ltd GOT Unit Existing Cables GT15 QC O B GT15 QC I BS modified as shown in EX 2 GT1155 QTBDQ Peel the sheath at both ends of the cable and expose the shield GT1155 QSBDQ braided wire for grounding For grounding with clamps refer to GT1150 QLBDQ Grounding the cable El GT15 C O BS GT15 C O EXSS S1 modified as shown in EX 3 Peel the sheath at both ends of the cable and expose the shield braided wire for grounding For grounding with clamps refer to GT1155 QTBDA Grounding the cable GT1155 QSBDA GT1150 QLBDA Other bus connection cables modified as shown in EX 4 Wind cable shield material around the cable and pull out the grounding braided wire of the cable shield material Attach the ferrite core to the cable in the specified position and insert the braided wire for grounding into the ferrite core User Made Cables The cable need to be independently tested by the user to demonstrate EMC compatibility when they are used with the GOT the PLC of MELSEC Q series MELSEC QnA series and
405. vel which is set in drawing software CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 11 4 Security Level Change 11 14 11 4 1 Security level change functions 11 4 3 Security level change operation Password input operation GOT setup Security level change Please input password l 0 Security level change success Password error By touching 0 to 9 A to F key the password of the changed security level is input When correcting the input character touch Del key to delete the correcting character and input the password again After inputting password touch the Enter key When the password matches a message notifying successful change of the security level is displayed When the password does not match an error message is displayed If OK button is touched it returns to the password input screen again If X button is touched it returns to security setting screen Remark About forgetting to return to the original level after changing security level temporarily When use GOT after temporarily changing the security level do not forget to return the security level to the original level 11 15 11 4 Security Level Change 11 4 3 Security level change operation 11 5 Utility Call Key Setting
406. vice installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel or cabinet It not only assure the safety but also has a large effect to shut down the noise generated from GOT on the control panel 1 Control cabinet a Use a conductive control cabinet b When attaching the control cabinet s top plate or base plate mask painting and weld so that good surface contact can be made between the cabinet and plate c To ensure good electrical contact with the control cabinet mask the paint on the installation bolts of the inner plate in the control cabinet so that contact between surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area d Earth the control cabinet with a thick wire so that a low impedance connection to ground can be ensured even at high frequencies 22mm 2 wire or thicker is recommended e Holes made in the control cabinet must be 10 cm 3 94inch diameter or less If the holes are 10cm 3 94inch or larger radio frequency noise may be emitted In addition because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel door and the main unit reduce the clearance as much as practicable The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an EMI gasket on the paint surface 5 2 EMC DIRECTIVE 5 2 5 2 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive at lt 12 gt Ao ow cx aka 8 E N W OVERVIEW CONFIGURATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS S97 PART N
407. ware package a ba 2 3 4 GT Designer2 Version2 58L or later GT Designer2 Version2 or later GT Designer3 Version1 or GT Designer3 Version1 or __ later later e Bright dots always lit and dark dots unlit may appear on a liquid crystal display panel It is impossible to completely avoid this symptom as the liquid crystal display comprises of a great number of display elements Flickers may be observed depending on the display color Please note that these dots appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect Flickers and partial discoloration may be generated on the liquid crystal display panel due to the display contents or the contrast adjustment However please note that these phenomena appear due to its characteristic and are not caused by product defect There is a difference in the display brightness and the color tones between liquid crystal display panels When using multiple liquid crystal display panels please note that there is an individual difference between them A crosstalk shadow as an extension of the display may appear on the liquid crystal display panel Please note that it appears due to its characteristic When the display section is seen from the outside of the display angle the display color seems like it has changed Please note that it is due to its characteristic Please note that the response time brightness and color of the liquid crystal display panel may vary depending
408. wer line Bundling the GOT s ground cable and power line together can cause interference noise which may result in malfunctions Keeping the GOT s ground cable and power line away from each other will help minimize noise interference Powersupply for power equipment Power supply for power equipment Good Wiring the ground cable away from the Bad Bundling the ground cable and power cable the power cable Connecting the ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment to the panel to which the GOT is grounded When running a single ground cable from the panel that houses such piece of control equipment as a sequencer to the panel to which the GOT is grounded the ground cable may have to be directly connected to the terminal on the GOT Connection cable Ground cable from the panel that houses control equipment If electric potential difference between the ground points created by it causes malfunctions lowering the voltage as shown in Remedy 1 below may solve the problem 7 4 7 1 Power Supply Wiring 7 1 2 The cause of malfunctions related wiring Remedy e Remedy 1 Refer to the figures Remedy 1 1 and 1 2 below If the electric potential difference between the ground cable and the panel that houses the GOT is creating problems connect the ground cable to the panel also If the wiring method as show
409. will be deleted one by one and the eight latest entry devices will be monitored If necessary delete unnecessary entry devices and re enter ones you want to monitor 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 12 Procedure for entry monitor basic operation 14 2 13 Deleting entry devices This subsection describes how to delete entry devices Deleting entry devices with the system monitor function executed is described below ae ONCE TES TENO ORME NetNo OJST FF CPUNo Q Touch SET When specifying the device When deleting devices at a time name you want to delete NetNo OST FF CPUNo 0 NetNo O ST FF CPUNo 0 i a dea XI weve o ASYI AJL S a vy BI FID WIR gt EE Ee ES E G Enter Del A Enter the device name you want to delete in 1 Enter the device number you want to delete in 2 Touch the Enter key Touch the x key The window closes For further information about key window operation see lt 5 Subsection 14 2 6 Key window setting columns and operation procedure 14 2 System Monitor 14 2 13 Deleting entry devices UTILITY FUNCTION COMMUNICATION INTERFACE SETTING DISPLAY AND OPERATION SETTINGS CLOCK SETTINGS AND BATTERY STATUS DISPLAY Py FILE DISPLAY AND x W pa oO L Ww N a 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION INSTALLATION OF CoreOS BOOTOS
410. witches the screen to the display format switching screen to change the value display format DEC HEX on the Batch Monitor screen or comment no comment display Subsection 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display SET Switches the screen to the Device entry screen to enter or test monitor devices Entering monitor devices lt gt Subsection 14 2 5 Entering monitor devices specifying monitor stations and devices Test operation lt _ gt Subsection 14 2 24 Test operation Scroll displayed information upward or downward by a line to display the preceding or next monitor device that is not currently displayed When five or more monitor devices are entered these switches are available when their comments are displayed Al Scrolls information upward by a line W Scrolls information downward by a line 3 The following table below describes the range of display of items 1 to 10 displayed Description of setting No Item Computer link CC Link connection Bus connection Direct CPU connection y connection 1 G4 1 Net No 0 FF When the host station is selected 2 Station No FF 0 When the master station is selected 1 to 64 When a local station is selected 3 CPU No 0 to 4 This item must be set only when the system is connected to multiple QCPUs It is not necessary when the 4 Bit device ON OFF syste
411. without the cover 8 8 Protective cover for oil 8 8 2 Installation procedure Make sure that corners of protective cover for oil match those of GOT front Protectivecover for oil fe Panel cut dimensions Mounting metal fixture Control panel Point gt Precautions for protective cover for oil e The protective cover for oil is a consumable product Check the cover for scratch damage or dirt at regular intervals and replace with new one if necessary a e Do not push the protective cover for oil with pointed tools including mechanical pencils and screwdrivers Doing so causes scratches and damages of the cover e Do not clean the protective cover for oil with bleaches thinners organic solvents corrosive chemicals and others Doing so causes changes in 5 shape and color of the cover Eig e When the protective cover for oil is attached to the GOT do not stretch and ao bend the cover too much Doing so may cause a separation between the sheet and rubber Do not place or use the protective cover for oil in direct sunshine 2 e When the protective cover for oil gets dusts wipe the dusts off with a damp ie cloth e When the protective cover for oil is used the USB connector on the GOT g front face cannot be used 2 e When the protective cover for oil is used the human sensor does not correctly operate e Do not do a frequent detaching the protective cover for oil It causes P deter
412. x a alarm file from G1A to TEXT E Historical graph a 5 Historical graph display of alarm file O x x x D display O Total graph l Total graph display of alarm file O x x x display G1P CSV conversion Conversion of O x x x advanced recipe file from G1P to CSV G1P TXT conversion Conversion of O x x x advanced recipe file from G1P to CSV Advanced recipe Deleting advanced recipe file or folder O x x x information Copying advanced recipe file O x x x Moving advanced recipe file or folder O x x x Changing advanced recipe folder name O x x x Creating a new advanced recipe file or O x x x folder Loading record value O x x x Advanced recipe Saving record value O x x x record list Matching record value O x x x Deleting device value O x x x Continued to next page Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 12 Program data control O Applicable x Not Applicable Not required ing i f GT Soft Drawing Setting items Function GT15 SET IE GT11 Setting G1L CSV conversion Conversion of logging O x x x file from G1L to CSV G1L TXT conversion Conversion of logging file from G1L to TXT 9 as cs Logging Deleting logging file or folder O x x x information A E Copying logging file O x x x Moving logging file O x x x Changing logging file name O x x x Creating a new logging folder or file O x x x G10 CSV conversion Conversi
413. y and the ae buffer memory Ladder Displaying ladder monitor and executing hard O x x x nn monitor copy O lt Changing PLC program of ACPU and Q A list editor gmg d O x O x a parameters Be Qus FX list rac List editing PLC program of FX PLC O x O x ieee editor Executing the monitor and data change for Intelligent the buffer memory of intelligent function module module on the dedicated screen O x x x A uu 2 monitor Or monitoring available to check the signal 2 B status of I O module Monitoring the network status of z Network it MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 O x x x monitor MELSECNET II and MELSECNET B Q motion Servo monitor and parameter settings of the monitor motion controller CPU Q series 2 5 5 Servo Executing each monitor function parameter amplifier change test operation and others of the O x x x monitor servo amplifier Executing the position display monitor CNC equivalent to the display dedicated to it MELDAS the alarm diagnosis monitor the O x x x monitor tool offset parameter the program monitor etc Appendix 2 Usage Condition of Utility Function App 14 O Applicable x Not Applicable Not required ing i i GT Soft Drawing Setting items Function GT15 SET Tae GT11 Setting A drive memory check Standard CF card O x O x C drive memory check Built in flash Memory check O x O x memory D drive memory check Built in SRAM x x O x Missing bits c
414. y 220 is DEVICE MONITOR Zur oSm Oso Q ZZ T 382 WE ately Switching the display format from DEC to HEX Switching no comment display to comment display Ekg DEA Oa a5 oak oto al lt z 5 a 5 T x W pa oO L m p Ss 0 CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 14 2 System Monitor 14 19 14 2 7 Switching the display format DEC HEX and comment no comment display Point f 1 Changing the comment or comment capacity of the controller If you change a comment or comment capacity of the controller after the system monitor function is activated the comment may not be properly displayed on each monitor screen After a comment or comment capacity is changed turn off the GOT and turn it on again 2 Switching the display format DEC HEX The present value of word devices and the present value and set value of timers counters will be displayed in decimal or hexadecimal numbers 3 Switching comment no comment display The comments written to the target controller will be displayed or not be displayed Priority of comment display Extension comment gt Comment 4 Comment No comment display a The BM monitor does not display comments b Comments will not be displayed when any of the CPUs listed below is monitored e FXCPU QnACPU or Q series motion controller CPU whose date on the rating plate is earlier than 9707B c Commen
415. y Q Ow GIF 16STG FON 06 10 04 14 21 Zgo 16dot Standard Gothic Font Item Contents Zn Basic 02 01 50 500K 7 eism G1F128TG FON 06 10 04 14 21 Name Displays the file name 020 12dot Standard Font Displays the following items according Basic 02 01 50 406K to the file type Boot BootOS Kind Standard Standard monitor OS om Communication Communication driver 23 R r Zz Option Option OS nee Extend Extended function OS Doct Displays the version of BootOS and Version Os Displays the date and time of the file O z Date Time i Zz creation z T HES Size Displays the file size amp D Soe Omtn If touch A button of the scrollbar the 3 screen scrolls up down by one line If touch 4 button the screen scrolls up down by one screen Touching button returns the screen to the previous screen display a Se N N Py AND BATTERY GOT SELF CHECK CLEANING OF DISPLAY SECTION CoreOS BOOTOS AND STANDARD MONITOR OS INSTALLATION OF 13 2 OS Information 13 11 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Data check operation Carries out data check of the selected system file When data is normal Data normal When data is erroneous Data error ox 13 12 13 2 OS Information 13 2 4 Operation of OS information Touch Data check button after selecting a data check target file The dialog mentioned left will be displayed after executing data check Touching OK
416. you close the screen the changed value will be canceled OK OK Cancel 11 2 Brightness Contrast Adjustment 11 2 3 Brightness adjustment operation 7 Brightness can be adjusted by touching key of brightness adjustment 2 Contrast can be adjusted by touching key of contrast adjustment Setting contents are defined if OK button is touched 4 If OK button is touched without touching button the dialogue box shown on the left displayed OK button The changed value is canceled and the screen is closed Cancel button The brightness contrast adjustment screen is displayed 11 3 Operation Settings Z Q 11 3 1 Operation setting functions T Setting regarding GOT operation can be set 5 The items which can be set are described below Function Contents Setting range r OFF SHORT LONG E Buzzer volume setting Buzzer volume setting can be changed lt At factory shipment 30 5 SHORT gt Zy l ON OFF S23 A Whether turn ON OFF buzzer when move window Window move buzzer volume setting lt At factory shipment 1 1 can be selected ON gt Security level change screen can be displayed Security setting screen change Section 11 4 Security Level Change Utility call key setting screen can be displayed Utility call key screen change lt Section 11 5 Utility Call Key

GT11 User`s Manual - Mitsubishi Electric

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents